asWedit help v. 300 (C) A. Stochniol   658 1099 1 11 10 133 1000 706 1001 1147 1002 1590 1003 2847 1004 3219 1005 3595 1006 4141 1007 4350 1008 4511 100100 4812 100200 6136 100300 6731 100500 7061 100501 7679 100600 7924 100700 8463 10070000 9244 20 10753 2000 11979 200001 12757 200002 13271 2001 14245 2002 14599 2003 15145 2004 15690 2005 16167 2006 16381 2010 16588 2011 17913 30 18226 3000 18550 3001 18829 3002 19307 3003 19555 3004 19826 3005 20344 300400 21553 300401 22106 300000 22583 300200 23950 30020001 26240 30020002 26416 30020003 26707 300300 26912 40 27568 4000 28218 400000 28550 4003 28809 4001 29375 4002 30057 4004 30861 50 31332 5000 32045 5001 32802 5002 33292 500200 33717 50020000 33893 500201 34213 50020100 34393 500202 34717 50020200 34880 500203 35184 50020300 35335 500204 35776 500205 36056 5003 37001 5004 37396 500400 38106 50040000 38272 500401 39107 500402 39292 500403 39528 500404 39738 500405 39881 500406 40069 500407 40853 500408 41801 500409 42239 500410 42367 500411 42496 500412 42625 500413 42754 500414 42883 500415 43012 500416 43141 500417 43270 500418 43399 500419 43528 500420 43657 50041000 43787 5005 47152 500500 47456 50050000 47622 500501 48295 500502 48538 500503 48747 500504 49000 500505 49123 500506 49246 500507 49369 500508 49492 500509 49615 500510 49738 500511 49862 500512 49986 500513 50110 500514 50234 500515 50358 500516 50482 500517 50606 500518 50730 500519 50854 500520 50978 500555 51102 5006 51760 500600 51918 50060000 52107 500601 54409 50060100 54602 60 55652 6003 56352 6004 56817 6005 57335 600500 57473 6006 57756 6008 58613 600800 58838 6009 60208 80 60323 8000 61202 8001 61389 8002 62261 8003 62611 8004 63793 8007 64063 800300 68485 800301 69138 800302 71240 800303 71957 80030210 77073 80030100 78274 80030101 78502 800201 78777 80020101 81172 80020102 83051 80020103 83122 8050 83179 805000 83964 805001 84830 805002 85830 80020100 86380 27 86846 77 88740 7700 89001 7701 89356 7702 89490 7703 89765 7704 90097 7705 90785 7706 91151 770600 91716 7707 91975 800204 92387 800205 93069 80020500 93379 80020501 94706 80020502 94926 80020503 95074 80020504 95421 80020505 95829 80020506 96098 80020507 97036 80020508 97784 80020509 97850 80020510 99155 8056 100132 805600 100586 805601 107696 805602 110484 805603 112950 805604 120774 805605 126257 805606 128057 2701 128599 2703 129186 2704 129611 2705 130068 2706 130373 2708 131199 2709 131595 2710 132276 2711 132957 2712 133640 2743 134463 2715 134845 2716 135244 2717 135654 2718 136022 2719 136641 2720 136937 2726 137175 2728 139860 2729 141055 2730 141632 2731 141840 2733 142213 2734 142308 2735 142615 2736 142743 2737 142909 2739 143774 2740 144215 2745 144403 2747 144806 2744 145378 1800000000 145866 396 145909 196 146218 700000 146527 650077 147881 75000100 148919 75000101 149112 75000102 149307 75000103 149509 75000104 149709 75000105 149911 75000106 150107 75000107 150298 75000108 150493 75000109 150682 75000110 150871 75000111 150990 75000112 151109 75000113 151228 75000114 151347 75000115 151466 75000116 151585 75000117 151704 75000118 151823 75000119 151942 2007 152061 2062 152610 2063 153896 206300 155343 2064 160083 200700 161536 200701 163390 2008 164694 2009 165714 200900 166344 4008 167071 4007 167309 400700 167640 400701 170676 400702 172270 400703 172730 4005 173193 4006 174562 6000 175106 600000 176394 600001 177284 600002 178165 600003 179829 600004 180616 6001 181200 6002 181329 6052 181709 605200 181946 60520000 182863 6007 184335 700200 184593 70020000 184781 750201 186414 75020100 186604 8005 188017 800500 189410 800501 190156 800502 195353 800503 197593 80050300 198237 80050301 199036 80050302 199508 80050303 200938 80050304 201606 800504 202295 800208 203366 80020800 206178 80020801 207942 4 211236 400 213270 401 214784 402 215671 403 218050 404 218608 405 219576 406 220366 407 221155 408 221971 409 223109 410 224763 411 225500 412 226133 413 227392 414 228230 415 229202 416 230093 417 230799 418 231717 419 232666 420 234275 421 235001 422 236118 423 237463 424 238647 425 242993 426 243524 427 246082 433 247872 434 248970 435 249601 436 250117 437 250874 438 252223 439 258622 440 260199 441 261041 442 261978 443 266284 444 268732 445 269646 446 272092 447 273355 448 274353 449 276310 450 277393 451 278497 452 279249 453 281045 454 281568 455 283626 456 284507 457 285330 458 286444 459 288041 460 288872 461 290264 462 291035 463 292025 464 292823 465 293761 467 294548 468 300484 469 303094 470 305191 471 307803 472 308825 473 309232 474 310008 475 310807 476 311825 477 312703 398 313625 397 316114 71 317004 7100 317309 710002 317493 710005 317721 7101 317939 7102 318100 7110 318493 66 318713 6600 318975 6601 319198 6602 319636 76 319848 7600 320153 7601 320355 2 320534 200 322719 201 324332 202 325316 203 327695 204 328253 205 329318 206 330108 207 330897 208 331810 209 333133 210 334975 211 335712 212 336445 213 337704 214 338639 215 339708 216 340477 217 341594 218 342582 219 343385 220 344303 221 345352 222 347160 223 347983 224 349197 225 350641 226 351924 227 356270 228 356801 229 359359 235 361251 236 362349 237 362980 238 363503 239 364357 240 365805 241 372334 242 373911 243 374850 244 375886 245 380192 246 382640 247 383554 248 386000 249 387263 250 388358 251 390315 252 391398 253 392684 254 393535 255 395431 256 395954 257 398112 258 399090 259 400010 260 401124 261 402820 262 403748 263 405140 264 406008 265 407095 266 407990 267 408928 269 409812 271 416173 272 419004 274 421200 275 424033 276 425941 277 426963 278 427545 279 428418 280 429314 281 430514 282 431489 199 432411 198 433290 197 435779 5 436760 561 441964 500 442188 595 442624 581 443052 504 443820 614 444601 584 445162 583 445901 654 446136 609 446356 502 447120 593 447926 637 448321 501 449859 503 450183 582 450821 585 451948 625 452673 505 453216 655 453508 656 454038 506 454725 507 455175 508 455402 626 455780 509 456288 603 456755 644 457215 671 457555 657 457892 604 458051 605 458776 599 459480 600 459804 510 461243 576 461461 562 461741 669 462636 645 463134 615 463628 616 464128 511 465042 563 465578 630 466101 512 466615 607 467176 633 467729 513 469972 514 470580 515 471681 516 472126 517 472281 598 472494 518 473854 622 474759 586 475819 564 476197 519 476510 565 476787 658 477121 611 477681 670 478614 578 478765 659 478995 660 479204 520 479870 661 480539 617 480885 652 481234 675 481607 521 481977 523 482394 522 482700 618 482947 663 483102 524 483254 525 485056 580 486115 526 487182 566 487402 572 487552 527 487981 528 489384 529 490246 667 490915 567 491115 627 491342 631 491822 632 492520 568 493216 530 493380 531 493561 532 494112 533 494431 569 495171 534 495335 535 495596 538 495887 536 496539 650 496914 673 497054 672 497346 620 497567 537 497727 587 497934 608 498180 635 498725 638 499247 592 499448 539 499767 540 500426 541 500602 570 500931 665 501138 542 501575 666 502013 543 502585 544 503158 545 503468 634 503707 546 505947 612 506509 571 507589 636 507727 547 508203 573 508490 548 509250 613 511147 549 511504 649 512015 550 512271 643 512515 596 512945 551 513453 606 513735 552 514361 648 514867 647 515111 553 515400 653 515784 639 516433 623 516827 577 517910 624 518273 628 520838 554 521318 555 521841 588 522023 642 522442 668 523003 594 523258 640 523563 590 524064 589 524372 579 524673 556 524900 602 525055 591 527394 610 528260 557 528792 641 529215 558 529471 597 529704 629 529928 646 530498 621 530724 664 530875 559 531023 619 531534 662 531880 674 532223 651 532587 601 532954 560 534513 574 534942 575 535190 70 535434 7000 535739 700002 535923 700005 536151 7001 536369 7002 536530 7010 536923 65 537143 6500 537405 6501 537628 6502 538066 6505 538278 650500 538871 650501 539523 650502 539687 650503 540419 650504 540997 650505 541458 650506 541627 75 541772 7500 542016 750001 542218 7502 544387 428 427 429 427 430 427 431 427 432 427 466 465 40000 521 40001 536 40002 665 40003 666 40004 554 40005 624 40200 615 40201 662 40202 661 40203 637 40204 505 40205 650 40206 663 40207 664 40208 616 40209 656 40300 655 40301 598 40302 613 40303 608 40304 521 40305 624 40500 523 40501 624 40600 649 40601 630 40602 658 40900 508 40901 626 40902 628 40903 627 40904 629 40905 625 41000 669 41100 654 41700 515 41800 503 41900 515 42200 648 42201 505 42202 637 42203 601 42204 660 42300 596 42301 630 42302 658 42400 595 42401 519 42402 532 42403 624 42500 647 42501 538 42502 632 42503 631 42504 635 42505 657 42506 636 42507 670 42600 633 42601 634 42602 644 42603 657 42604 670 42700 503 43400 601 43401 596 43402 638 43403 503 43500 597 43700 553 43701 505 43702 637 43703 674 43704 675 43705 527 43706 602 43707 671 43708 663 43709 664 43710 646 43800 594 43801 510 43802 673 43803 557 43804 596 43805 530 43806 552 43807 585 43900 541 44100 641 44101 640 44200 521 44201 665 44202 666 44203 554 44204 525 44300 672 44400 515 44500 516 44501 538 44502 524 44600 512 44601 601 44602 659 45000 515 45001 639 45002 640 45100 557 45101 547 45200 503 45300 620 45301 557 45400 559 45700 653 45701 667 45800 537 45801 534 45802 549 46000 668 46001 637 46002 596 46003 601 46004 660 46700 603 46701 601 46702 503 46703 604 46704 605 46705 626 46800 601 46801 660 46802 503 46803 610 46804 513 46805 546 46806 539 46807 626 46900 537 46901 512 46902 545 47000 601 47001 660 47002 503 47003 610 47004 513 47005 546 47006 539 47007 626 47200 503 47201 626 47202 610 47500 515 47501 642 7103 452 7104 410 7105 434 7106 412 7107 199 7108 7110 710000 700000 710001 435 710003 409 710004 710005 71000200 433 71000201 471 71000202 405 71000203 445 71000204 442 71000205 439 71000206 457 71000207 464 71000500 426 71000501 448 71000502 425 710100 427 710101 427 710102 427 710103 427 710104 427 710105 427 710200 700200 710201 450 710202 475 710203 441 710204 419 710205 420 710206 415 710207 417 710208 444 711000 401 711001 454 711002 408 711003 446 711004 460 711005 449 711006 418 6603 396 6604 400 6605 437 6606 6505 660000 421 660001 463 660002 414 660003 456 660004 440 660005 476 660006 413 660100 404 660101 436 660102 473 660103 407 660104 459 660105 465 660106 465 660107 474 660108 455 660109 423 660110 406 660200 447 660201 477 660202 416 660203 461 660204 397 7602 402 7603 453 7604 443 7605 403 7606 422 760000 424 760001 750001 760002 438 760003 469 760004 458 760005 451 760100 750201 760101 467 760102 411 760103 472 760104 470 760105 468 478 199 479 398 480 397 230 229 231 229 232 229 233 229 234 229 268 267 273 275 270 275 20000 521 20001 536 20002 665 20003 666 20004 554 20005 624 20006 576 20007 623 20008 529 20009 622 20100 576 20101 623 20102 529 20103 622 20200 615 20201 662 20202 661 20203 637 20204 505 20205 650 20206 663 20207 664 20208 616 20209 656 20300 655 20301 598 20302 613 20303 608 20304 521 20305 624 20400 576 20401 623 20402 529 20403 622 20500 523 20501 624 20600 649 20601 630 20602 658 20700 576 20701 623 20702 529 20703 622 20800 576 20801 623 20802 529 20803 622 20900 508 20901 626 20902 628 20903 627 20904 629 20905 625 20906 576 20907 623 20908 529 20909 622 21000 669 21100 583 21101 576 21102 623 21103 529 21104 622 21300 576 21301 623 21302 529 21303 622 21400 576 21401 623 21402 529 21403 622 21500 601 21501 606 21502 609 21503 599 21504 600 21505 610 21506 576 21507 623 21508 529 21509 622 21600 601 21601 606 21602 609 21603 599 21604 600 21605 610 21606 576 21607 623 21608 529 21609 622 21700 576 21701 623 21702 529 21703 622 21800 576 21801 623 21802 529 21803 622 21900 515 22000 503 22001 576 22002 623 22003 529 22004 622 22100 515 22101 576 22102 623 22103 529 22104 622 22200 576 22201 623 22202 529 22203 622 22300 576 22301 623 22302 529 22303 622 22400 648 22401 505 22402 637 22403 601 22404 660 22405 576 22406 623 22407 529 22408 622 22500 596 22501 630 22502 658 22503 576 22504 623 22505 529 22506 622 22600 595 22601 519 22602 532 22603 624 22700 647 22701 538 22702 632 22703 631 22704 635 22705 657 22706 636 22707 670 22800 633 22801 634 22802 644 22803 657 22804 670 22900 504 22901 576 22902 623 22903 529 22904 622 23600 601 23601 596 23602 638 23603 503 23700 558 23800 576 23801 623 23802 529 23803 622 23900 553 23901 505 23902 637 23903 674 23904 675 23905 527 23906 602 23907 671 23908 663 23909 664 23910 646 23911 576 23912 623 23913 529 23914 622 24000 594 24001 510 24002 673 24003 557 24004 596 24005 530 24006 552 24007 585 24008 561 24009 576 24010 623 24011 529 24012 622 24100 541 24200 576 24201 623 24202 529 24203 622 24300 641 24301 640 24302 576 24303 623 24304 529 24305 622 24400 521 24401 665 24402 666 24403 554 24404 525 24500 672 24600 515 24700 516 24701 538 24702 524 24800 512 24801 601 24802 659 24900 576 24901 623 24902 529 24903 622 25200 515 25201 639 25202 640 25203 576 25204 623 25205 529 25206 622 25300 557 25301 547 25302 576 25303 623 25304 529 25305 622 25400 504 25401 576 25402 623 25403 529 25404 622 25500 620 25501 557 25600 559 25601 576 25602 623 25603 529 25604 622 25700 576 25701 623 25702 529 25703 622 25800 576 25801 623 25802 529 25803 622 25900 653 25901 667 26000 537 26001 534 26002 549 26003 576 26004 623 26005 529 26006 622 26100 576 26101 623 26102 529 26103 622 26200 668 26201 637 26202 596 26203 601 26204 660 26300 576 26301 623 26302 529 26303 622 26400 576 26401 623 26402 529 26403 622 26500 576 26501 623 26502 529 26503 622 26700 576 26701 623 26702 529 26703 622 26900 603 26901 611 26902 612 26903 601 26904 607 26905 503 26906 604 26907 605 26908 626 26909 576 26910 623 26911 529 26912 622 27000 609 27001 599 27002 600 27003 610 27004 576 27005 623 27006 529 27007 622 27100 601 27101 660 27102 609 27103 610 27104 513 27105 546 27106 599 27107 600 27108 539 27109 626 27110 506 27111 507 27112 576 27113 623 27114 529 27115 622 27200 537 27201 512 27202 545 27203 576 27204 623 27205 529 27206 622 27300 609 27301 599 27302 600 27303 610 27304 576 27305 623 27306 529 27307 622 27400 601 27401 660 27402 609 27403 610 27404 513 27405 546 27406 599 27407 600 27408 539 27409 626 27410 506 27411 507 27412 576 27413 623 27414 529 27415 622 27500 609 27501 599 27502 600 27503 610 27504 576 27505 623 27506 529 27507 622 27700 609 27701 599 27702 600 27703 610 27704 626 27705 576 27706 623 27707 529 27708 622 27800 576 27801 623 27802 529 27803 622 27900 576 27901 623 27902 529 27903 622 28000 515 28001 642 28002 576 28003 623 28004 529 28005 622 28100 576 28101 623 28102 529 28103 622 7103 452 7104 410 7105 434 7106 412 7107 199 7108 7110 710000 700000 710001 435 710003 409 710004 710005 71000200 433 71000201 471 71000202 405 71000203 445 71000204 442 71000205 439 71000206 457 71000207 464 71000500 426 71000501 448 71000502 425 710100 427 710101 427 710102 427 710103 427 710104 427 710105 427 710200 700200 710201 450 710202 475 710203 441 710204 419 710205 420 710206 415 710207 417 710208 444 711000 401 711001 454 711002 408 711003 446 711004 460 711005 449 711006 418 6603 396 6604 400 6605 437 6606 6505 660000 421 660001 463 660002 414 660003 456 660004 440 660005 476 660006 413 660100 404 660101 436 660102 473 660103 407 660104 459 660105 465 660106 465 660107 474 660108 455 660109 423 660110 406 660200 447 660201 477 660202 416 660203 461 660204 397 7602 402 7603 453 7604 443 7605 403 7606 422 760000 424 760001 750001 760002 438 760003 469 760004 458 760005 451 760100 750201 760101 467 760102 411 760103 472 760104 470 760105 468 7003 254 7004 210 7005 236 7006 212 7007 199 7008 7010 700001 237 700003 209 700004 700005 70000200 235 70000201 276 70000202 205 70000203 247 70000204 244 70000205 241 70000206 259 70000207 266 70000500 228 70000501 250 70000502 227 700100 229 700101 229 700102 229 700103 229 700104 229 700105 229 700201 252 700202 280 700203 243 700204 221 700205 222 700206 217 700207 219 700208 246 701000 201 701001 256 701002 208 701003 248 701004 262 701005 251 701006 220 6503 196 6504 200 6505 239 6506 6505 650000 223 650001 265 650002 214 650003 258 650004 242 650005 281 650006 213 650100 204 650101 238 650102 278 650103 207 650104 261 650105 267 650106 267 650107 279 650108 257 650109 225 650110 206 650200 249 650201 282 650202 218 650203 263 650204 197 7501 7502 7502 202 7503 255 7504 245 7505 203 7506 224 750000 226 750002 240 750003 272 750004 260 750005 253 750200 750201 750201 269 750202 211 750203 216 750204 215 750205 275 750206 275 750207 275 750208 277 750209 274 750210 271 283 199 284 198 285 197 200800 2010 200801 2007 200802 2009 200702 2008 200703 2009 200901 2007 200902 2008 206200 600800 206201 2726 206202 2726 19700 200701 39700 200701 399 199 2012 6000 40070000 4008 40070001 4007 40070100 4008 40070101 4007 40070200 4008 40070201 4007 40070300 4008 40070301 4007 600200 6052 600201 6052 600202 6052 600203 6052 600204 6052 600205 6052 600206 6052 600207 6052 600208 6052 200000 2001 200100 2000 200101 200001 100800 100300 100801 200002 100101 200002 10010000 2726 100400 200002 10020000 2726 10050000 100501 10050001 2726 10060000 2726 200200 2010 200201 2004 200202 2011 200203 200001 200204 200002 200300 2010 200301 2004 200302 2011 200303 200001 200304 200002 200400 2011 200401 2002 200402 2003 200403 200001 200404 200002 200500 2011 200501 2002 200502 2003 201000 20 201001 50 30000000 300200 30020000 300000 300100 3000 800206 8056 800207 8005 80560100 2726 80560400 60520000 80030000 8003 80030001 800301 80030102 8001 80030103 8002 80030104 8003 80030105 8004 80030200 10 80030201 20 80030202 30 80030203 40 80030204 50 80030205 60 80030206 80 80030207 70 80030208 65 80030209 75 80030211 8001 800200 800302 800202 27 800203 77 8006 2 2700 2739 2702 2011 270100 2000 270300 2010 270301 2004 270302 2011 270303 2709 270304 200001 270305 200002 270400 2010 270401 2004 270402 2011 270403 2709 270404 200001 270405 200002 270500 2011 270501 2002 270502 2003 270503 2709 270504 200001 270505 200002 270600 2701 270601 2716 270800 2739 270900 2710 270901 2711 270902 2712 271000 2711 271001 2712 271002 200001 271003 200002 271100 2710 271101 2712 271200 2710 271201 2711 274300 3005 271600 2719 271800 7704 271900 2718 272000 100300 272001 200002 272800 2704 272801 2729 272802 2705 272900 2709 272901 2728 272902 200001 272903 200002 273100 200002 273300 1007 273400 2708 273401 2739 273500 2001 273600 3001 273700 2745 273900 2708 274000 2739 274001 2734 274002 200002 274500 2737 274700 7707 2713 2704 2714 7700 2721 3003 2722 800301 2723 7705 2724 7706 2732 2705 2738 2715 2741 7706 2746 7707 2742 80020509 2748 2701 274400 300000 2707 805001 2725 805000 2727 8050 30040000 300400 30040001 300400 30040002 300400 30040003 300400 30040004 300400 30040005 300400 30040006 300400 30040007 300400 30040008 300400 30040009 300400 300500 3005 300501 3005 30040100 300401 30040101 300401 30040102 300401 30040103 300401 30040104 300401 30040105 300401 30040106 300401 30040107 300401 30040108 300401 30040109 300401 400001 400000 400002 400000 400003 400000 400004 400000 400005 400000 400006 400000 400007 400000 400008 400000 400300 80020510 600600 6006 600601 6006 600602 6006 600603 6006 600604 6006 500000 50 500100 50 50020401 50 50020501 50 500001 50041000 500101 50041000 50040600 50041000 50040700 50041000 50040800 50041000 50040900 50041000 50041000 50041000 50041100 50041000 50041200 50041000 50041300 50041000 50041400 50041000 50041500 50041000 50041600 50041000 50041700 50041000 50041800 50041000 50041900 50041000 50042000 50041000 50050400 500555 50050500 500555 50050600 500555 50050700 500555 50050800 500555 50050900 500555 50051000 500555 50051100 500555 50051200 500555 50051300 500555 50051400 500555 50051500 500555 50051600 500555 50051700 500555 50051800 500555 50051900 500555 50052000 500555 50055500 50041000 50020400 500205 50020500 500204 5007 2010 500300 5003 500301 5003 500302 5003 500303 5003 600900 6009 600901 6009 600902 6009 600903 6009 600904 6009 600905 6009 600906 6009 600907 6009 600908 6009 600909 6009 80020102 50041000 80020103 8050 80020508 800302 80030300 80020507 80030301 770600 80030302 800300 770100 1001 770101 1004 770700 770600 77060000 7706 77060001 7707 ~0000000001

@(#) asWedit help file: Ver. 3.0, 23 Oct 1996
@(#) Copyright 1995, 1996 AdvaSoft Ltd, All rights reserved.


~0000000010
	File menu (Alt+F)

The File menu provides following commands:

    New 	- creates a new asWedit window

    Open... 	- opens an existing file

    Template... 	- opens a template to start a new document

    Close 	- closes the active file and window

    Save 	- saves the active file

    Save As... 	- saves the active file under a new name

    Insert... 	- inserts a file into the edited text

    Print... 	- prints the active file or a selection

    Exit 	- exits from the current window and quits asWedit if that was the last window
~0000001000
	File|New  (Ctrl+N)

The File|New command opens a new asWedit window with a default NoName1 file (or NoName2, and so on).

You will be prompted for the name of the file when you attempt to save the edit window contents.  This allows you to start typing as soon as the window is opened.

The new edit window is completely independent from the previous one(s) (except the help system which is shared between all asWedit windows).

~0000001001
	File|Open...  (Ctrl+O)

The File|Open command displays the   Open a File   dialog box, where you select or enter the name of a file to open.

If the current window is being used to edit any text, a new window will be created to edit the requested file.

The new window is completely independent from the previous one(s), except the help system which is shared between all asWedit windows.

_________
See also:
  Pop-up menu 

~0000001002
	File|Template...

The File|Template command displays the   Open a Template   dialog box, where you select or enter the name of a template file to use.

The template is used to start a new document.  If the current window is being used to edit any text, a new window will be created.  If you selected the wrong template just select another one in the window containing the wrong template.
The template facility is primarily used for HTML files.

The new window is completely independent from the previous one(s), except the help system which is shared between all asWedit windows.

Defining template directory.
The default directory where the templates reside is specified via the following resource:
	*template_dialog.directory:		/usr/local/lib/templates

The program is delivered without the resource being defined.  If you want to enable this facility edit the above resource in the AsWedit file and specify your existing template directory.  As with any other X Window resource you can customize it also on a personal basis (in your AsWedit file or in .Xdefaults file).
Note -- no trailing spaces are allowed in the above directory definition.

If the template directory is not defined than the initial startup directory is used instead.

~0000001003
	File|Close

The File|Close command closes the edited file and its associated window (if it is not the last asWedit window).

If you've modified a file without saving it, you get first the  File not Saved !  warning dialog and you have to decide whether or not to save the file.  Alternatively you can abandon the operation by activating the Cancel button.

~0000001004
	File|Save (Ctrl+S)

The File|Save command saves the edited file to disk.  Pressing the Ctrl+S key from within the program also performs the same task.

If you haven't specified a file name yet (i.e. your text is called NoName1, NoName2, or so on ) you will be prompted to do so in the same way as in File|Save As... command.
_________
See also:
  Pop-up menu 

~0000001005
	File|Save As...

The File|Save As command opens up the  Save As   dialog box, where you can save the edited file under a different name.

You can enter the new file name or select it from Files and Directories boxes, and then activate the OK button.

If you use the name of an existing file, asWedit prompts you with   Overwrite ?   question dialog.  You must then decide to overwrite the existing file or Cancel the operation.

Note: having saved the file all windows containing the old file name are updated with the new one.

~0000001006
	File|Insert...

The File|Insert command opens up the   Insert a File   dialog box, where you select or enter a file name.  Contents of the file will be inserted at the current cursor position.

~0000001007
	File|Print...  (Ctrl+P)

The File|Print command opens up the   Print   dialog box, where you select what to print and which printer to print on.

~0000001008
	File|Exit

The File|Exit command closes all asWedit windows and removes the program from the memory (quits it).

If you've modified a file without saving it, asWedit prompts you to do so before exiting.  See the  File not Saved !  warning dialog.

_________
See also:
  Pop-up menu 

~0000100100
	Open a File dialog box

Open a File dialog box comes up when you choose the File|Open menu command.

To open a file:
1.  Type or select the name of the file you want to open.  If the file is not listed in the current directory, either type the directory name in front of the document name, or select the directory in the Directories box.
2.  Choose OK.

If you would like to view only the file, set the Open for view only button.

If the current window is being used to edit any text, a new window will be created to edit the requested file.

For a detail description how to select a file see:
	 Selecting a file 

Notes: 
If you want to change the default filter mask define the '*open_dialog.pattern' resource in the AsWedit resource file or in your .Xdefaults file.  Alternatively you can start asWedit with the following command line (as an example we filter '.html' files):
	asWedit -xrm "*open_dialog.pattern: *.html"
(to have the above filter in all your file selection boxes just use the 'pattern' recource declaration).

If a file is read only you cannot edit it and it is opened automatically in the view only mode.  The view only mode can be easily recognized by lighter color of the main window and a letter 'R' in the Status Line (you would find that many menu options are insensitive as well).

~0000100200
	Open a Template dialog

Open a Template dialog comes up when you choose the File|Template menu command.  Use this dialog to open a template file and start a new document with the template inserted.

To open a template file (and start a new document based on it):
1.  Type or select the name of the template file you want to use.  If the file is not listed in the current directory, either type the directory name in front of the document name, or select the directory in the Directories box.
2.  Choose OK.

For a detail description how to select a file see:
	 Selecting a file 

~0000100300
	File not Saved ! warning dialog

File not Saved ! warning dialog comes up when you choose either the File|Close or File|Exit menu commands and you've modified a file without saving it.

You have to decide whether or not to save the file.  Alternatively you can abandon the operation by activating the Cancel button.

~0000100500
	Save As dialog box

Save As dialog box comes up when you choose the File|Save As menu command.

To save file under a new name:
1.  Type or select the new file name.  If the required file is not listed in the current directory, either type the directory name in front of the file name, or select the directory using the Directories box.
2.  Choose OK.

If you use the name of an existing file, asWedit prompts you with  Overwrite ?   question dialog.  You must then decide to overwrite the existing file or Cancel the operation.

For a detail description how to select a file see:
	 Selecting a file 

~0000100501
	Overwrite ? question dialog

You've just specified name of a file which already exists.  You have to decide now either to carry on the operation (i.e. overwrite the previous file contents) or Cancel the whole operation altogether.

~0000100600
	Insert a File dialog

Insert a File dialog comes up when you choose the File|Insert menu command.  Use this dialog to insert a whole contents of a file in a current cursor position.

To insert contents of a file:
1.  Type or select the name of the file you want to insert.  If the file is not listed in the current directory, either type the directory name in front of the document name, or select the directory in the Directories box.
2.  Choose OK.

For a detail description how to select a file see:
	 Selecting a file 

~0000100700
	Print dialog

Print dialog comes up when you choose the File|Print menu command.

To select print range	Select this
___________________________________
Entire document		Complete document radio button
Selected text only	Selected text only radio button

Setting printer:
Choose one from the list of Printers installed.  Having done so, the printer name is copied to the Print using: area, where you can add extra parameters (e.g. "-n 3" would give you three printed copies).  You may even specify your own/special print command.

You can also use the print dialog to apply UNIX filters to either a selected text or the entire edit buffer.  For details see:
	 Applying a UNIX filter 

(there you can find out how to write out a selected text to a file, and more ...).

~0010070000
	Applying a UNIX filter

You can use the Print dialog to apply UNIX filters to either a selected text or the entire edit buffer.  To do that specify a required filter command in the  Print using:  area.

If you want to intercept output of the filter use a specialized Tools|Filters|New Filter command.  With that command you can direct output to the current window, a new window or a text dialog.

The examples below show how useful the Print dialog with UNIX filters can be.

Block write.  Sometimes it is very useful to save a selected text into a file.  To do this:
- select the text
- in the Print dialog set the  Selected text only  button (to pop-up the Print dialog use the File|Print command)
- in the  Print using:  area write the following command:
	cat - > file_name
- activate OK button

You can use the above method together with other UNIX filters to implement a number of interesting features.  For example using as a print command:
	fmt > file_name
would create a formatted output on the file_name (further details see man pages for fmt), and the following "print" command:
	spell > file_name
would create a file with list of spelling errors.

Notes:
You should substitute the "file_name" above with your chosen file name.  But remember, that the system does not check if such a file already exists, so carefully choose the name to avoid overwriting your "precious" file.
Most of the UNIX filters operate on complete lines, so DO include in the selected text the final line feed.

~0000000020
	Edit menu  (Alt+E)

The Edit menu provides commands to cut, copy, and paste text in the edit window.  In the HTML mode you can also edit and delete HTML tags.
If you make a mistake, you can undo changes.  You can also reverse the effect of your recent undo(s).

Each of the Edit menu commands is listed below:


	 Undo 

	 Redo 

	 Cut 

	 Copy 

	 Paste 

	 Clear 

	 Select All 

In the HTML mode the following are also available:

	 Edit Tag... 

	 Delete Tag 

	 Replace... 

Before you can use most of the commands in this menu, you need to know about selecting text (because most editor actions apply to selected text).
You can select text either with keyboard or with the mouse.  See  Text selection  for more information.

Once you have selected text, the edit commands in the Edit menu and the Clipboard become available.  The  Clipboard  is the magic behind cutting and pasting.  It's a special area in X Window System that holds text that you have cut or copied, so you can paste it elsewhere.  The Clipboard works in close co-operation with the commands in the Edit menu.

To switch HTML mode on (for editing files for World Wide Web) use the 
	Options| HTML mode  command.

~0000002000
	Edit|Undo	(Ctrl+Z)

The Edit|Undo command restores the edited file to the way it was before the most-recent edit or cursor movement.
Undo performs action by single back-editing actions, i.e. sometimes you have to make several undoes to restore the previous editor state.  It is especially true for some group edit functions (especially true for Motif 1.1 versions).

There are restrictions on what and how many operations can be undone.
Undo will insert characters that have been deleted, delete any characters that have been inserted and move the cursor back to a position prior to the edit action that changed the text.

To reverse the effect of the most recent Undo command use:
	 Redo 

_________
See also:
  Alternate edit shortcut keys 
  Pop-up menu 

~0000200001
	Alternate edit shortcut keys

The following alternate shortcut keys for the most common edit operations are supported:

  Edit|Undo	-  Alt+BackSpace
  Edit|Redo	-  Shift+Alt+BackSpace
  Edit|Cut  	-  Shift+Del
  Edit|Copy	-  Ctrl+Ins
  Edit|Paste	-  Shift+Ins

Note:
Both sets of shortcut keys for Clipboard operations can be used from within any text area, including those in dialogs.  Their scope of action is wider than the Edit|Cut/Copy/Paste commands, which are limited to the main text area(s).
~0000200002
	Pop-up menu

AsWedit supports the most common editing actions in a separate quick editing pop-up menu.  It includes the following commands:

	Undo

	Cut
	Copy
	Paste

	Edit Tag...	(only in HTML mode)
	Delete Tag	(only in HTML mode)
	Replace...	(only in HTML mode)

	Open...
	Save

	Exit

Undo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Edit Tag and _DeleteTag (if available) perform the same actions as appropriate commands in the Edit menu.
Open, Save and Exit perform the same actions as appropriate commands in the File menu.

To activate the pop-up menu press the right mouse button (when inside the main area).  Then to select the command:
  - drag the mouse to the command you want to choose;
    or
  - release the right button, then use any of the following methods to select the command you want:
	click the command,
	or
	use the up and down arrow keys to go to the command, then press Enter to select it,
	or
	press the underlined letter of the command you want to select.


~0000002001
	Edit|Redo	(Shift+Ctrl+Z)

The Edit|Redo command reverses the effect of the most recent  Undo  command.

The Redo command only has an effect immediately after an Undo command or after another Redo command.  A series of Redo commands reverses the effects of a series of Undo commands.

_________
See also:
  Alternate edit shortcut keys 

~0000002002
	Edit|Cut	(Ctrl+X)

The Edit|Cut command removes the  selected text  from your document and places the text in the Clipboard.

To cut text to the Clipboard:
1.  Select the contents you want to remove.
2.  Choose Edit|Cut, or press Ctrl+X.
    The contents will be placed in the Clipboard.

You can then paste that text into the same or any other document with the Edit| Paste   command.

The text remains in the  Clipboard  so you can paste it many times.

_________
See also:
  Alternate edit shortcut keys 
  Pop-up menu 
~0000002003
	Edit|Copy	(Ctrl+C)

The Edit|Copy command leaves the  selected text  intact and places an exact copy of it in the Clipboard.

To copy text to the Clipboard:
1.  Select the contents you want to copy.
2.  Choose Edit|Copy, or press Ctrl+C.
    The contents will be placed in the Clipboard.

You can then paste that text into the same or any other document with the Edit| Paste  command.

The text remains in the  Clipboard  so you can paste it many times.

_________
See also:
  Alternate edit shortcut keys 
  Pop-up menu 
~0000002004
	Edit|Paste	(Ctrl+V)

The Edit|Paste command inserts the text from the  Clipboard  into the current text widget at the cursor position.  This command is unavailable if the Clipboard is empty.

To paste text from the Clipboard:
1.  Place the insertion point where you want to insert the Clipboard contents.
2.  Choose Edit|Paste, or press Ctrl+V.

_________
See also:
 Edit| Cut  command
 Edit| Copy  command
  Alternate edit shortcut keys 
  Pop-up menu 
~0000002005
	Edit|Clear

The Clear command removes the selected text but does not put it into the  Clipboard .

This means you cannot paste the text as you could if you had chosen Edit| Cut  or Edit| Copy .

~0000002006
	Edit|Select All

The Select All command selects all the text in the active edit window.

To deselect either:
  - move the cursor, or
  - click anywhere in the edit window, or
  - press Ctrl+\.

~0000002010
	Text selection

You can select (highlight) text either with keyboard or with a mouse.

From the keyboard simply:

    -	Press Shift key while pressing any key that moves the cursor (arrows etc.)
	To select the whole text press Shift+Ctrl+/ (to de-select all press Shift+Ctrl+\).

With a mouse:

    -   Drag the mouse pointer over the desired text while holding down the left mouse button.  If you need to continue the selection past a window's edge, just drag off the side and the text will automatically scroll.

    -   In addition to the click-and-drag technique for text selection the multiple click technique is supported:
a double-click selects a word, triple-clicking selects the current line, and quadruple-clicking selects all the edited text.
You can extend the above technique to select multiple objects (words or lines) when you drag the mouse after the last button press (note: do not release the button before the drag operation).  To select a number of words click once and press, then drag the mouse.  To select a number of lines double click and press, then drag the mouse.

    -   To extend or reduce a selection, hold Shift key and click.


Once you have selected text, the Cut and Copy commands in the  Edit menu  become available, as well as most of the commands in the  Tools menu .

~0000002011
	Clipboard

For the user Clipboard is a temporary storage area for cut or copied text.  You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into any asWedit file.

Note that with keyboard shortcuts for Cut/Copy/Paste  Clipboard functionality is extended to all text areas in the program (including dialogs).

~0000000030
	Search menu  (Alt+S)

The Search menu provides commands to search for text, replace text, go to a specific line, use bookmarks and match delimiters.

Each of the Search menu commands is listed below:

	 Find... 

	 Find Next 

	 Change... 

	 Go to Line... 

	 Bookmark  > 

	 Match delimiter   > 

~0000003000
	Search|Find... (Ctrl+F)

The Search|Find command displays the  Find  dialog box, where you type in the text you want to search for.
In the dialog box there are several options that affect the search.

You can also activate this command using Ctrl+F key shortcut.

~0000003001
	Search|Find Next (Ctrl+L)

The Find Next command repeats the last Search| Find  command or searches for the current selection.

You can also activate this command using a Ctrl+L shortcut key.

All settings made in the Find dialog box remain in effect when you choose Find Next.

To search quickly for another occurrence of a text, highlight it and press Ctrl+L (do NOT include a new line, otherwise the highlighted text is not treated as an item to search for).

~0000003002
	Search|Change... (Ctrl+H)

The Change command brings up the  Change  dialog box, where you type in the text you want to search for and text you want to replace it with.

You can also activate this command using Ctrl+H shortcut key.

~0000003003
	Search|Go to Line...

The Go to Line number command brings up the  Go to Line  prompt dialog, where you type in the line you want to go to.

AsWedit displays the current line number and column number in the Status Line located just below the edit window.

~0000003004
	Search|Bookmark

The Bookmark command displays another menu that consists of two entries: Set and Go to.  They allow you to use up to ten bookmarks in each asWedit window.
Use one of two entries in the menu:


	 Set 	- to set a bookmark

	 Go to 	- to go to a bookmark


Note:  Bookmarks preserve their positions during editing but there are situations that this doesn't make sense.  Then the active bookmarks will be set to point to the text beginning (for example when you delete the whole text).


~0000003005
	Search|Match delimiter

The Match delimiter command displays another menu that consists of two entries: Forward and Backward.  These entries are used to search for the matching delimiter (for example [, }, " etc.).

The following pairs are supported: {}, (), [], <>, "", ``, //, '', \\ .


To search for the matching delimiter:

1. position the cursor just before the delimiter (for example {, ], or "),
2. use one of the two entries in the menu:

	Forward	- to match forward

	Backward	- to match backward

    - or -

    use Alt+[ shortcut key to match forward,

    and Alt+] shortcut key to match backward.


Note that "backward" and "forward" make sense only for delimiters for which the pair direction is not implied (delimiters like: ", ', ,`, /, \).

For pair delimiters for which the direction of the matching is implied by the current character, you can use either of the commands.  For example you can use either Alt+[ or Alt+] shortcut key to find the matching bracket for "["  (the same goes to any of the following characters: {}, (), [], <>).

Note also that the resource "*selectDelimitedText" controls if the text delimited by the pair of characters is automatically selected.

~0000300400
	Set Bookmark

To set a bookmark, position the cursor at a required point and use the Search|Bookmark|Set menu item.  Then select one of ten (1,2,3, ..., 9,0) bookmarks available.  Alternatively you can use following shortcut keys:
 To set Bookmark	Use
 ____________________________________
    1		Shift+Ctrl+1
    2		Shift+Ctrl+2
    3		Shift+Ctrl+3
	...
    9		Shift+Ctrl+9
    0		Shift+Ctrl+0

To go to an already set bookmark use Search|Bookmark|Go to|# or use the following shortcut key: Ctrl+#  (where # denotes the bookmark number).

~0000300401
	Go to Bookmark

To go to a bookmark use the Search|Bookmark|Go to menu.  Then select the required bookmark number.  Alternatively you can use following shortcut keys:
 To go to Bookmark	Use
 ____________________________________
    1		Ctrl+1
    2		Ctrl+2
    3		Ctrl+3
	...
    9		Ctrl+9
    0		Ctrl+0

Note that the required bookmark must be already set.  In the menu Search|Bookmark|Go to  only bookmarks already set are available (the others are greyed out).

~0000300000
	Find dialog box

You use the Find dialog box to find a string in your text file.
This dialog contains Text to Find: input box, Options check boxes and Direction radio buttons.

The Text to Find: input box is where you enter the string to search for.

Options govern the kind of strings that asWedit searches for:
  Case sensitive   - check this box if you want to differentiate uppercase from lowercase;
  Whole words only - check this box to search for words only (that is, the string must have punctuation or space characters on both sides).

Direction specifies which way you want to search, starting from the current cursor position:
  Forward  or
  Backward.

Once you've entered the search string in the input box, you can choose one of the buttons in the dialog action area:
 Select		To
 __________________________________________
  Find Next	-  search for a next occurrence of the string,
  Close	-  close the Find dialog (pop it down),
  Help	-  call the help.

Note: pressing Enter in the Text to Find: input box activates the default button in the action area, i.e. the one marked with an additional outline.

The Find dialog stays on the screen after a search is completed so you can easily find a next occurrence of the string searched for.  If you want to close the dialog use the Close button.

_________
See Also:
  Change dialog box 

~0000300200
	Change dialog box

The Change dialog box, where you type in the text you want to search for and text you want to replace it with, is almost identical to the  Find  dialog box.

The Change dialog box contains Text to Find: input box, Change To: input box, Options check boxes and Direction radio buttons.

The Text to Find: input box is where you enter the string to search for.

The Change To: input box is where you enter the string into which found the found string would be changed to.

Options govern the kind of strings that asWedit searches for:
  Case sensitive   - check this box if you want to differentiate uppercase from lowercase;
  Whole words only - check this box to search for words only (that is, the string must have punctuation or space characters on both sides).

Direction specifies which way you want to search, starting from the current cursor position:
  Forward  or
  Backward.

Once you've entered the search string and the replacement string in the input boxes, you can choose one of the buttons in the dialog action area:
 Choose			To
 ________________________________________________
  Find & Verify	-  begin a search for a next occurrences of the search string,
  Change All	-  search for all occurrences of the search string and change them all to the string entered in the Change To: input box,
  Close	-  close the Change dialog (pop it down),
  Help	-  call up help.

If the Find & Verify button has been selected and the text found, the  Change Prompt  question dialog pops-up.  You then have to verify if the text found is to be changed, skipped or the whole operation cancelled/stopped.

When you use Change All option and you've started the search from within the file and you reach either the end of the file (forward search direction) or beginning of the file  (backward search direction), you are prompted with  Search  question dialog.
You can then decide to continue the search operation or not.  If you've decided to continue, when the search arrives back at the starting position the   Change All   information dialog shows the number of items changed.

The Change dialog stays on the screen after a search is completed so you can easily start a new change operation.  If you want to close the dialog use the Close button.

~0030020001
	Change Prompt question dialog

You've just found text to change.  You have to decide now to change this occurrence, Skip it or Cancel (stop) the whole operation.

~0030020002
	Search question dialog

You had started the search from within the file and you've just reached either the end of the file (forward search direction) or beginning of the file  (backward search direction).

You have to decide now either to continue the change operation or not.

~0030020003
	Change All information dialog

The Change All action has just been completed.  The dialog shows the number of items changed.

Close the dialog using mouse or just press Enter key or Spacebar.
~0000300300
	Go to Line prompt dialog

Go to Line prompt dialog comes up when you choose the Search|Go to Line menu command.

You have to type in a line number you want to go to (position the insertion cursor at).  Then press Enter key or activate the OK button.

If you've entered a line number that does not exist, asWedit prompts you with the Error! dialog.  This dialog shows also the existing range of line numbers.  When you dismiss this error dialog you return to the Go to Line prompt dialog to respecify the line number.

Note that asWedit displays the current line number and column number in the status line located just below the edit window.

~0000000040
	View menu  (Alt+V)

The View menu is used to:

     Toolbar >  	-  sub-menu to switch on/off toolbars

     Split window 	-  split into two edit windows

     Wrap words 	-  switch on/off the word wrapping

     Status Line 	-  switch on/off the status line


In the HTML mode the following entries are also available:

     SGML Context 	-  switch on/off display of the HTML context on the status line

     Color Tags 	-  switch on/off coloring of HTML tags

     Hide Tags 	-  hide/show HTML tags

     Browser >  	-  select the preferred browser(s)

     Preview 	-  preview the HTML using the selected browser(s)

~0000004000
	View|Toolbar

The View|Toolbar sub-menu is used to select which toolbar you want turn on or off.
You can select any of the supported toolbars:

     Main 

     HTML 

     User 

     Extra 

     Super 

     Hyper 

Note some of the toolbars are only available in the commercial version of the program.

~0000400000
	View|Toolbar|Toolbar '#'

This command is used to turn on/off the chosen toolbar at the top of the asWedit window.

Note that the toolbar entries may be shown as icons or text buttons.  You can also customize its content (see the Options menu).

~0000004003
	View|Status Line

The View|Status Line command is used to turn on/off the status line at the bottom of the asWedit window.

Switch the status line off for large files, unless you need the permanent line/column display.
When the status line is off, the algorithm for calculating line and column numbers is turned off as well.  This might result in a significant performance improvement during editing of large files.  This is especially recommended when a large amount of text scrolling is involved.

_________
See Also:
 Description of  Status Line 

~0000004001
	View|Split window

The View|Split window command is used to split the workspace into two edit panes (or vice versa, to close one of them).  The two edit windows show the same file.  Any changes made in one of them are immediately shown in the other.  In this way you are offered two views of the same file, that is often very useful for moving, copying and comparing inside one file.

You can change the relative sizes of the two windows by dragging, up or down, a sash.  This small, rectangular button is located on a line separating the two windows.

Note also that you can use different font size in each pane (change at run-time using the Options|Font size menu).

~0000004002
	View|Wrap words

The View|Wrap words command is used to turn on or off the word wrapping in the current edit window.  You might easily recognized if the current window is in the wrap mode by lack of the horizontal scrollbar (its presence means that the window is in a non-wrap mode).

Note: the Wrap words menu entry might not be available as default on your system.  If that is the case you are most probably running Motif 1.1 for which this is our default (in Motif 1.1 the wrap algorithm is *very* slow).
You might request the run-time change of the wrap mode by specifying the command line switch "-wrapmenu".  If the speed in the wrap mode is satisfactory for you just save the user preferences using Options|Save preferences command and the wrap menu option will always be available.

~0000004004
	View|SGML Context

The View|SGML Context command is used to turn on/off display of the HTML context on the status line at the bottom of the asWedit window.

Note that the status line must be visible to show the HTML context.
The context is displayed in the parent - child order. You can reverse the order by defining the following resource in your X resources customization file:

*useRevContextView:	True

If you don't need the context just switch it off.

~0000000050
	Tools menu  (Alt+T)

The Tools menu provides additional tools for text processing.  It includes the following:

     Spell 		-  check spelling

     Sort 		-  sorting

     Format >  		-  margins formatting and indentation

     Change Case to >  	-  character case changing

     Filters >  		-  User definable filters

     Commands >  	-  User definable commands

     HTML >  	-  Extra tools for HTML modes


Note that the following commands are unavailable if no text is selected in the edit window:
  Spell,  Sort, Format,  Change Case to and Filters.

Remember that you can always undo the action if it does not produce what you wanted.

_________
See Also:
  Text selection 

~0000005000
	Tools|Spell

The Tools|Spell command is used to run the spell checking program for the selected text or the whole document (when no text is selected).

Any word not found in the spell dictionary is displayed in the "Misspelled words" text dialog.


Notes:
The tool assumes that the external spell checker used returns the list of misspelled words on the UNIX standard output.
To use a non-standard spell checker redefine the "spellCmd" in the AsWedit application defaults file.  For example if your system have an interactive spell command installed (called ispell) redefine the command as follow:
*spellCmd:	(cat; echo) | ispell -l

_________
See Also:
  Tools menu 
  Filter customization  if you want to understand or change "spellExt"

~0000005001
	Tools|Sort

The Tools|Sort command is used to sort the selected text alphabetically (unless redefined).  The program automatically extends the selected text to include whole lines.


Notes:
The command is unavailable if no text is selected in the edit area.
To use a non-standard sort (or sort options) redefine the "sortCmd" in the AsWedit application defaults file.
_________
See Also:
  Tools menu 
  Filter customization  if you want to understand or change "sortExt"

~0000005002
	Tools|Format

The Tools|Format command is used to format the selected text in a following way:

     Move Left... 		-  move it left

     Move Right... 	-  move it right

     Indent with... 	-  indent it with a specified text

     Reformat... 		-  fill the text between left and right margins

     Expand tabs 		-  expand the Tab characters

     Unexpand 		-  unexpand spaces to Tab characters


~0000500200
	Tools|Format|Move Left

This command displays   Move Left   dialog box, where you enter the number of characters you want to move the selection by to the left.

~0050020000
	Move Left dialog box

You use the Move Left dialog box to move the selected text to the left by some spaces.  Enter the number of spaces you want to move the text by to the left, then press Enter key or OK button.

Note that before processing the selection is automatically extended to the whole line(s).


~0000500201
	Tools|Format|Move Right

This command displays   Move Right   dialog box, where you enter the number of characters you want to move the selection by to the right.


~0050020100
	Move Right dialog box

You use the Move Right dialog box to move the selected text to the right by some spaces.  Enter the number of spaces you want to move the text by to the right, then press Enter key or OK button.

Note that before processing the selection is automatically extended to the whole line(s).


~0000500202
	Tools|Format|Indent with

This command displays   Indent with   dialog box, where you enter the string you want to indent the selected text with.


~0050020200
	Indent with dialog box

You use the Indent with dialog box to indent the selected text with a specified string.  Enter the string you want to indent the selection with, then press Enter key or OK button.

Note that before processing the selection is automatically extended to whole lines.


~0000500203
	Tools|Format|Reformat

This command displays   Reformat   dialog box, where you enter margins you want the text to be re-formatted to.

~0050020300
	Reformat dialog box

You use the Reformat dialog box to reformat the selected text with new margins (fill area between margins).

Specify the right margin of the new text layout.  You might also specify a new left margin.  If you don't specify it (leave it blank) the left margin will not be changed.
Then press Enter key or OK button.

Note that before processing the selection is automatically extended to the whole line(s).

~0000500204
	Tools|Format|Expand tabs

This command is used to expand all tab characters in the selected text into spaces.  The current tabstops value is used (default 8).

To replace spaces with Tab characters use Tools|Format| Unexpand .

_________
See Also:
  Tools menu 

~0000500205
	Tools|Format|Unexpand

This command is used to replace spaces in the selected text with Tab characters (when possible).

Note that tab stops will occur every eight columns (unless pr command is used, see below).

By default, only leading spaces and tabs are reconverted to tabs.  If you would like to insert tabs wherever their presence compresses the resultant text (by replacing two or more characters) redefine the "*unexpandCmd" as:
"*unexpandCmd:	unexpand -a "
(note that on SGI the default is "pr -t" because unexpand command is unavailable).

For systems that have 'pr' command you can use the following definition to allow inserting tabs with the current tab interval and wherever is possible:
"*unexpandCmd:		pr -t -i%d"

The above customization should be done in your private AsWedit application defaults file.


To expand tab characters to spaces use Tools|Format| Expand tabs .

_________
See Also:
  Tools menu 



~0000005003
	Tools|Change Case to

The Tools|Change Case to command is used to change the case of characters in the selected text.  The following options are available:


    Upper	-  Change text to uppercase

    Lower	-  Change text to lowercase

    Title	-  Capitalize the first letter of each word

    Toggle	-  Change all uppercase text to lowercase and all lowercase text to uppercase


~0000005004
	Tools|Filters

The Tools|Filters commands are used to process a selected text:

     New Filter... 		-  Use user specified filter

     Word count 		-  Count the lines, words and bytes

     Compress blank lines 	-  Replace multiple blank lines with one

     Delete blank lines   	-  Delete blank lines

     Double Space 		-  Double space the text

     Delete Extra spaces   	-  Delete extra blanks

     Latin 1 --> Entitities 	- Convert Latin 1 characters to HTML entities

     Entitities --> Latin 1 	- Convert HTML entities to Latin 1 characters

     HTML --> Text 	- Strip out all HTML mark-up

More commands might be available for customized versions of the program.

~0000500400
	Tools|Filters|New Filter

This command displays   New Filter   dialog box, where you enter your filter command and choose where its output should go.

~0050040000
	New Filter dialog box

You use the New Filter dialog box to specify your own filter to process the text selected in the edit area.
Any system command or user program reading from standard input and writing to standard output can be used.

Enter filter name (and parameters if needed) in the text box.  Choose where the filter output will go by selecting one of the buttons in the Direct output to: box.  Note that selecting Current window means that the current selection will be replaced with the filter output.  Then press Enter or activate OK button.

If the filter takes substantial amount of time to finish, you will get a Wait! dialog.  Using this dialog you can stop this long process, if needed.


Notes:
Most of the UNIX filters operate on complete lines, so DO include in the selected text the final line feed.

~0000500401
	Tools|Filters|Word count

This command calls Unix wc filter for the current selection.  Number of lines, words and bytes for the selected text is shown in a text dialog.


~0000500402
	Tools|Filters|Compress blank lines

This command is used to replace multiple blank lines with a single one for the current selection.  Note that a line consisting of only space and tab characters is treated as a blank one.
~0000500403
	Tools|Filters|Delete blank lines

This command is used to delete all blank lines for the current selection.  Note that a line consisting of only space and tab characters is treated as a blank one.
~0000500404
	Tools|Filters|Double Space

This command is used to double space the current selection (insert extra empty line after each line).
~0000500405
	Tools|Filters|Delete Extra spaces

This command is used to delete extra spaces in the current selection (i.e. replace multiple space and tab characters with a single space).

~0000500406
	Tools|Filters|Latin 1 --> Entitities

This command is used to convert 8-bit Latin 1 characters in the current selection to their HTML entities.  The set of characters might be easily extended or replaced with another one (see the AsWedit resource file).

Use this command when you have a text already written and you want to convert your native Latin 1 characters into their entities.  You can reduce the list of entities used to that of your native language (that would speed up the filters).

Note:
For SunOS 4 the set of entitites in the AsWedit file does NOT include the following:
	'ÿ' (&yuml;), 'Ü' (&Uuml;)
For IRIX 4 and Linux it does not include: 'ÿ' (&yuml;) 
This is because of the bugs in these operating system.
_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500407
	Tools|Filters|Entitities --> Latin 1

This command is used to Latin 1 entities in the current selection to the corresponding 8-bit characters.  The set of entitites might be easily extended or replaced with another one (see the AsWedit resource file).

Use this command when you have an HTML text and you want to convert all Latin 1 entities to the corresponding 8-bit characters.  You can reduce the list of entities used to that of your native language (that would speed up the filters).

Notes:
This filter only converts entities that end with the ';' character (the HTML standard specifies that this trailing semicolon is optional IF followed by white space).

For SunOS 4 the set of entitites in the AsWedit file does NOT include the following:
	'ÿ' (&yuml;), 'Ü' (&Uuml;)
For IRIX 4 and Linux it does not include: 'ÿ' (&yuml;)
This is because of the bugs in these operating system.

_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500408
	Tools|Filters|HTML --> Text

This command is used to strip all HTML mark-up either from the selected text of from the whole document.  The output will replace the source.  This command might be useful to generate a plain text version of the HTML file.
Note the definition of the command shows how the HTML stripping can be implemented as the last phase in the filter processing.
_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500409
	Tools|Filters|User defined 9

This is a user defined filter command.
_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500410
	Tools|Filters|User defined A

This is a user defined filter command.

_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500411
	Tools|Filters|User defined B

This is a user defined filter command.

_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500412
	Tools|Filters|User defined C

This is a user defined filter command.

_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500413
	Tools|Filters|User defined D

This is a user defined filter command.

_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500414
	Tools|Filters|User defined E

This is a user defined filter command.

_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500415
	Tools|Filters|User defined F

This is a user defined filter command.

_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500416
	Tools|Filters|User defined G

This is a user defined filter command.

_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500417
	Tools|Filters|User defined H

This is a user defined filter command.

_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500418
	Tools|Filters|User defined I

This is a user defined filter command.

_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500419
	Tools|Filters|User defined J

This is a user defined filter command.

_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 
~0000500420
	Tools|Filters|User defined K

This is a user defined filter command.

_________
See Also:
  Filter customization 

~0050041000
	Filter customization


Note: this is an advanced topic! Read it when you want to extend asWedit functionality  by adding user defined filters or commands.


In asWedit filters are implemented using two generic resources:
	filter
	fllterExt

(for example there are: filter1, filterExt1).

To customize a user defined command or filter redefine its' generic resources.

The 'filter' resource specifies the filter to be invoked (for example wc).

The 'filterExt', if specified, gives extra description how asWedit is processing filter's output etc.
It consists of following fields (order is important):

  short name		Description

  outputDepot		where the filter's output is going
  outDialogTitle	title of the dialog where output will be shown in
  otherDialogsTitle	title of other dialogs (errors/messages)
  noOutDialog		type of dialog when no output is received
  noOutMsg		message to be shown when no output is received
  extendTo		flag for automatic selection extension, that takes place before processing
  extraDo		flag for additional post-processing of the output


All fields with their default values and possible predefined values, where relevant, are listed below:

(N)  short name		Default value	Possible values (if limited)

(1)  outputDepot	TO_CURRENT	TO_NONE, TO_STDOUT, TO_STDERR,
					TO_CURRENT, TO_NEW, TO_TEXT_DIALOG
(2)  outDialogTitle
(3)  otherDialogsTitle
(4)  noOutDialogType	TO_NONE		TO_NONE, DIALOG_ERROR, DIALOG_INFORMATION,
					DIALOG_MESSAGE, DIALOG_WARNING

(5)  noOutMsg
(6)  extendTo		EXTEND_TO_LINES*	NO_EXTEND, EXTEND_TO_LEFT_LF,
					EXTEND_TO_RIGHT_LF, EXTEND_TO_LINES,
					EXTEND_TO_WHOLE_FILE, USE_WHOLE_FILE,
					USE_FILE_OR_SELECTION

(7)  extraDo		NO_EXTRA	NO_EXTRA, SKIP_HTML_TAGS


Notes:
Fields (2), (3) and (5) may contain any text and do not have default values.
* extendTo default value for commands is NO_EXTEND (no need for selection extension).

As a separator in the filterExt specification either comma "," or the following escape sequence is used: "\," (i.e. backslash followed immediately by comma).

Below there are examples how the above specification is used in asWedit:

Example 1: Double Space
*filter4:			sed G

Note that 'filterExt4' is not specified (i.e. all default values are used).

Example 2: Word count
*filter1:	echo '     lines     words     bytes:' ; wc
*filterExt1:	TO_TEXT_DIALOG\,Word count\, \, \, \, NO_EXTEND


Example 3: Spell

*spellCmd:	(cat; echo) | spell
*spellExt:	TO_TEXT_DIALOG,\ Misspelled words:\, Spell \, DIALOG_INFORMATION ,\ Spelled correctly!\,USE_FILE_OR_SELECTION\,SKIP_HTML_TAGS


NOTES
_____

(1) Double quote characters in the filter or command definition MUST be escaped using a backslash character (X resources requirement). In other words if you want to pass a double quote character '"' to the filter (or command) you have to replace it with '\"' sequence !
For example the following would work when entered via the Tools|Filter|New Filter:
	awk '{print "<A HREF=\"/cgi-bin/man.cgi?section=1&topic="$1"\">"$1"</A>"}'

but to have it defined via X resources, let's say filter9, you have to escape each double quote as follow:

  AsWedit*filter9:  awk '{print \"<A HREF=\\"/cgi-bin/man.cgi?section=1&topic=\"$1\"\\">\"$1\"</A>\"}'


(2) The maximum number of user defined filters (commands) is 10 and the suffix of the 10th filter (command) is 'A'.

~0000005005
	Tools|Commands

The Tools|Commands is used to start following commands:

     New Command...     	-  User specified command

     Current directory 	-  pwd

     Date 			-  date

     Host name 		-  hostname

More commands might be available for customized versions of the program.

~0000500500
	Tools|Commands|New Command...

This command displays   New Command   dialog box, where you enter your command and choose where its' output should go.

~0050050000
	New Command dialog box

You use the New Command dialog box to specify your own command.  By a command we mean any system command or a user program that does NOT need any input.

Enter command name (and parameters if needed) in the text box.  Choose where the command output will go by selecting one of the buttons in the Direct output to: box.  Note that selecting Current window means that the current selection, if present, will be replaced with the command output.  Then press Enter or activate OK button.

If the command takes substantial amount of time to finish you will get a Wait! dialog.  Using this dialog you can stop this long process, if needed.

~0000500501
	Tools|Commands|Current directory

This command calls Unix 'pwd' command.  The full name of the current directory will be inserted at the current cursor location (note that if there is a text selected the command will replace it).
~0000500502
	Tools|Commands|Date

This command calls Unix 'date' command.  The current date will be inserted at the current cursor location (note that if there is a text selected the command will replace it).
~0000500503
	Tools|Commands|Host name

This command calls Unix 'hostname' command.  The name of the computer the program is running on will be inserted at the current cursor location (note that if there is a text selected the command will replace it).

~0000500504
	Tools|Commands|User defined 4

This is a user defined command.
_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500505
	Tools|Commands|User defined 5

This is a user defined command.
_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500506
	Tools|Commands|User defined 6

This is a user defined command.
_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500507
	Tools|Commands|User defined 7

This is a user defined command.
_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500508
	Tools|Commands|User defined 8

This is a user defined command.
_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500509
	Tools|Commands|User defined 9

This is a user defined command.
_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500510
	Tools|Commands|User defined A

This is a user defined command.

_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500511
	Tools|Commands|User defined B

This is a user defined command.

_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500512
	Tools|Commands|User defined C

This is a user defined command.

_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500513
	Tools|Commands|User defined D

This is a user defined command.

_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500514
	Tools|Commands|User defined E

This is a user defined command.

_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500515
	Tools|Commands|User defined F

This is a user defined command.

_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500516
	Tools|Commands|User defined G

This is a user defined command.

_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500517
	Tools|Commands|User defined H

This is a user defined command.

_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500518
	Tools|Commands|User defined I

This is a user defined command.

_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500519
	Tools|Commands|User defined J

This is a user defined command.

_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500520
	Tools|Commands|User defined K

This is a user defined command.

_________
See Also:
  Command customization 
~0000500555
	Command customization

Note: this is an advanced topic! Read it when you want to extend asWedit functionality  by adding user defined commands.


To customize a user defined command redefine its' two generic resources:
	cmd
	cmdExt

They are practically identical to filter resources with the exceptions related to selections.
The selected text is not needed to perform the command, and if it does exist it is not extended (as default).  Note that if the selection does exist before the command start it will be replaced by the command output.

To find all the details about how to customize commands or filters see:

	 Filter customization 

~0000005006
	Tools|HTML

The Tools|HTML offers the following additional tools for HTML authoring:

     Make Table of Contents... 

     Report Tags... 

~0000500600
	Tools|HTML|Make Table of Contents

This command displays   Make Table of Contents   dialog box, where you decide what kind of ToC you want to create and where it should go.

~0050060000
	Make Table of Contents dialog box

Use the this dialog box to specify what table of contents (ToC) you want to create and where to put it in.

To create a ToC for the current document do:
  1. Select entries for the ToC in the 'Based on:' box
     (for example headers H1 and H2).
  2. Turn on appropriate toggles in the 'Use <OL> for:' box
     (if you want to use a numbered list instead of the default
     unordered one).
  3. Decide where to direct the ToC (you ca choose either
     the current window, a new one or a text dialog).
  4. Select OK.

If a ToC element does not include an embeded HTML anchor the program will automatically insert one and use it in the ToC's hyperlink.

The program is intelligent enough to recognize that a previous ToC already exists in the file (if generated by asWedit).  In such case the previous ToC is highlighted and a following question is shown:
	Replace existing table of contents ?
This gives you an easy way of updating the ToC when the file contents changes.  Note that any HTML mark-up existing in the entries used for the ToC is stripped off.

Relative addressing and a multi-file ToC
________________________________________

Two kinds of addressing are used in the ToC hyperlinks dependent on whether the TITLE was included as the entry:
  - relative internal (#id), when the TITLE was NOT specified,
  - relative with the file name included (file#id), otherwise.
The latter is useful when you want to generate a multi-file ToC.  In such case a possible strategy is to create a ToC for each document based on Title and other elements and direct it to a text dialog.  Then use Cut and Paste technique to obtain the main ToC.  Note that you can use the Clipboard on the text dialog as well but you have to use the keyboard shortcuts there.

Customizing ToC creation
________________________

You can customize the creation of ToC by redefining the standard ToC header and footer used.  They are defined in the AsWedit resource file as:
*tocHeader:	<H1 ALIGN=center>Table of Contents</H1>\n
*tocFooter:	\n

Note that when you request a new window for the ToC a full HTML structure is created.  You can customize it as well, look for the following resources: tocDocTitle, tocNewToTitle, tocNewAfterTitle, tocNewClose in the AsWedit file.

~0000500601
	Tools|HTML|Report Tags

This command displays   Report Tags   dialog box, which you can use as a general HTML tag reporting tool (something like an intelligent "grep" utility).

~0050060100
	Report Tags dialog box

Use the this dialog box as a general HTML tag reporting tool.

To obtain a list of some specific HTML elements/attributes in the current document select appropriate toggle(s) in the 'Show:' area.  The result is immediately shown in the top 'Output:' text area.
This allows a quick interrogation or checking of the current document.

To allow more flexibility of the output you can filter the report through any external program(s), which you specify in the 'Filter through:' text field.  For example, you could sort the output and show only the uniq entries by using the following filter:
	sort | uniq

After modifying the filter to see the new output activate the 'Apply' button.

As the output window is a text area you can copy and paste any part of it (note you can also use the Clipboard functionality via keyboard, for example Ctrl+C would copy any selected text into the Clipboard).

You can use this dialog in many ways, ranging from a quick way of finding some hyperlink attributes to content control.


~0000000060
	Options menu  (Alt+O)

The Options menu provides options for changing behavior of asWedit.  It includes the following:

     HTML mode 	(not available in text-only mode)

     Icons in toolbars 

     Customize toolbar >  

     Autoindent 

     Insert mode 

     Tab stops... 

     Font size >  

     Save preferences 

Starting from version 2.0 you can also set some useful HTML project options using:

     Project options... 


Note that if in your language there are different codesets for national characters and appropriate translation tables are defined in the AsWedit resource file, you might have another entry in this menu called:

     Code set >  


~0000006003
	Options|Autoindent

The Options|Autoindent command is used to turn on/off automatic indentation.  When on, pressing Enter on a indented line inserts a new line with the same indentation.  To insert a new line without preserving the indentation press Ctrl+Enter.

When Autoindent is off the meaning of Enter and Ctrl+Enter is reversed:
Enter inserts a simple new line,
Ctrl+Enter inserts a new line with preserving the indentation of the previous one.

~0000006004
	Options|Insert mode  (Ins)

The Options|Insert mode command is used to turn on/off the insert mode of editing.  When on, all characters are inserted in the cursor position.  Mode off: characters replace (overtype) previous ones.
Usually to switch between these modes you use a following shortcut: Ins.

Note that this mode is *only* available on platforms supporting Motif 1.2 or higher.  Additionally the cursor changes its shape to a box style in overtype mode only for Motif versions 1.2.3 or higher.

~0000006005
	Options|Tab stops

This command displays   Tab stops   dialog box, where you enter a new value for the tabstops interval.

~0000600500
	Tab stops dialog box

You use the Tab stops dialog box to specify a new value for the tabstops interval (the default being 8).  Enter a new value in the text box, then to set the new value press Enter key or activate OK button.

Note that maximum tabstops value is 32.

~0000006006
	Options|Font size

The Options|Font size command pulls down another menu that consists of a list of fonts that you can select.  Selecting a font causes that the current edit window (pane) will use this font.  You can independently set font for each of the two supported edit windows (to show both of them use View|Split window command).  The following font entries are supported:
    Default	-  selects a font that was used when asWedit was started
    Small
    Medium
    Large
    Huge

The actual fonts (sizes etc.) depend what was configured in the asWedit resource files.  For details about different resource files see Customization part of the help.

Note that you cannot permanently save the different font size choices to be used when you start the program again (it is related to the X customization and font overriding mechanism).

~0000006008
	Options|Project options...

The Options|Project options command displays the   Project options   dialog box, where you enter the name of your project base directory and the names of your HTTP and FTP servers.

~0000600800
	Project options dialog

Use this dialog to define your basic HTML project data. They include:
  Project base:	the name of an existing directory on your system,
  HTTP server:	the Internet name of your HTTP server,
  FTP server:	the Internet name of your FTP server,
  Your E-mail:	your E-mail address (to be used with "mailto:").

asWedit will use the first parameter to create a relative paths to other files referenced from inside your document (when requested).  Define the project base to take advantage of relative links (to get the full local preview functionality you should also define appropriately the documents BASE tag, something like: <BASE HREF="file:/path/file"> ).

The next two are used as prefixes in the Browse URL dialog when appropriate protocol is selected (to create absolute addresses).

The last is your (or another person) E-mail address that you want to use for the "mailto:" hyperlinks.

To make the changes permanent save the preferences using the Options|Save preferences command.

Site installations note:
________________________

For site installations the system administrator should pre-define the names of the HTTP and FTP servers in the system-wide AsWedit resource file (so each user would have initial values already defined).  The names of appropriate resources are: 'httpServer' and 'ftpServer' (see AsWedit file).

~0000006009
	Options|Code set

Sorry, this menu and its' help information are not available in the free release!


~0000000080
	Help Menu

The Help menu provides access to the asWedit on-line help and to the information about the program.
The following Help menu commands are available:

  On Context 	-  context-sensitive help (click for help)

  On Keys 	-  help about important keys

  Index 	-  index of help available

  On Help 	-  information on how to use the help

  About... 	-  general information about asWedit

If you want to follow any of the topics above simply select it (either by mouse and double click or by cursor and Enter key).

Two extra Help entries exist for HTML users (not available when asWedit has been started in the text-only mode):

  On HTML 	-  help about HTML

  On Tag 	-  help about currently selected HTML tag (or their index if none is selected)


IMPORTANT: If you haven't read and accepted the license yet do it now please:

  License 

~0000008000
	Help|On Context

Choose the Help|On Context to turn your cursor to a question mark, then position the cursor over any area in the ASWedit window for context-sensitive help.

~0000008001
	Help|On Keys

Choose the Help|On Keys to learn about asWedit shortcut keys.

For on-line information on how to use Help, press F1, choose Help button  or choose Help|On Help menu command.


 Key	  	Function
_________________________________________________
 F1		Calls up Help for the current object
 Shift+F1	Calls up context-sensitive Help
 F10		Quick method to toggle to the menu bar
 Ctrl+N		Opens a new window with default name
 Ctrl+O		Lets you open a file
 Ctrl+P		Lets you print the file or its' part
 Ctrl+S		Saves current file
 Ctrl+W		Switches HTML mode on (or off)



 Key	Takes you to the
________________________________________
 Alt+E	Edit menu
 Alt+F	File menu
 Alt+H	Help menu
 Alt+L	HTML menu (HTML mode)
 Alt+a	Layout menu (HTML mode)
 Alt+M	Markup menu (HTML mode)
 Alt+O	Options menu
 Alt+S	Search menu
 Alt+T	Tools menu
 Alt+V	View menu

~0000008002
	Help Index

     ASWEDIT Menus 

     Customization 

     Editing 

     Keyboard 

     Requirements 

     Screen Regions 

     Users' Q & A 

     HTML - HyperText Markup Language 

     What's new ? 

For on-line information on how to use Help, press F1, choose Help button  or choose Help|On Help menu command.

~0000008003
	Welcome to On-line Help for asWedit ver. 3.0

You can learn about asWedit editor through the on-line hypertext Help system.  What you're reading right now is a 'Help topic'.

Most Help topics have link items ('Help keywords') that lead to other Help topics.
These links are shown in color and are underlined.  When you position the cursor inside a link it becomes highlighted.

To go to the Help topic:
1. Move the cursor to a word or phrase underlined and shown in color.  You can move using mouse or keyboard.  Now the word (phrase) becomes highlighted.
2. To follow the link you can:
	double click the left mouse button
	- or -
	press Enter key
	- or -
	activate the Follow button in the action area 
	(by mouse or keyboard).


Try it now; choose one of these Help keywords to get started:

	 About On-line Help 	 How to Use Help 

	 ASWEDIT Menus 		 The Editor 

While in the help pressing F1 (Help key) brings up what you're  reading now.
To close the Help window activate the Close button in the action area or press Escape key when the main help window has the focus.

If the current help topic is longer than one page, use standard method of scrolling.
~0000008004
	Help|About

When you choose the About command from the Help menu, an information dialog appears, showing asWedit copyright and version details.

To close the box:
	Press Escape key, or
	activate Close button by pressing Enter or clicking it with the mouse.
~0000008007
	asWedit - END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
	____________________________________

	FREE EDUCATIONAL AND EVALUATION USE


THIS IS A LEGAL DOCUMENT TO WHICH YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, DO NOT USE THE SOFTWARE.

By using or copying this Software, Licensee agrees to abide by the copyright law and all other applicable laws, and the terms of this license.


asWedit Hypertext Mark-up Language (HTML) document editor (hereafter, Software) is copyrighted by AdvaSoft Ltd (hereafter, AS) and ownership remains with AS.


GRANT.  AS grants you (hereafter, Licensee) a non-exclusive license to use the Software free of charge provided that:
(a) you are a student, faculty member or staff member of an educational institution or an employee of a non-profit charitable organization and you use the Software for non-commercial purposes only;
-or-
(b) your use of the Software is for the purpose of evaluating whether to purchase a commercial version of the Software.  The evaluation period is limited to 60 days.
Government agencies are not considered charitable non-profit organizations for purposes of this license agreement.
If you do not fit within the description above, a license fee is due to AS and no license is granted herein.

RESTRICTED USE.  You may not copy the Software, except for backup or archival purposes.  Any such copy made by you shall be subject to this Agreement and shall contain all of AS's notices regarding copyrights, trademarks and other proprietary rights as contained in the Software originally provided to you.  You may not lend, rent, lease or otherwise transfer the Software.  The Software is protected by the copyright laws and copyright treaties.

TITLE.  Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the Software and Documentation shall remain with AS.  This Agreement does not include the right to sublicense the Software and is personal to you and therefore may not be assigned (by operation of law or otherwise) or transferred without the prior written consent of AS.  You acknowledge that the Software in source code form remains a confidential trade secret of AS and therefore you agree not to attempt to decipher, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer the Software or allow others to do so, except to the extent applicable laws specifically prohibit such restriction.  You further agree not to modify or create derivative works of the Software.

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.  ADVASOFT LTD MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS ABOUT THE SUITABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE FOR ANY PURPOSE.  IT IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.  IN NO EVENT SHALL ADVASOFT LTD BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

TERMINATION.  AS shall have the right to terminate this license immediately by written notice upon Licensee's breach of, or non-compliance with, any of its terms.  Licensee may be held legally responsible for any copyright infringement that is caused or encouraged by Licensee's failure to abide by the terms of this license.

COMMERCIAL VERSION.  If you wish to purchase ASWedit - the commercial version of asWedit - please contact AdvaSoft directly on the Internet at http://www.advasoft.com or see the ORDERING details below.


AdvaSoft Ltd
30 Hatch Road
London SW16 4PN
England

___________________________________________________

		Ordering information
		____________________

Information about ASWedit - the commercial version of asWedit - is available on the AdvaSoft Web site:
	<URL:http://www.advasoft.com>

Commercial information about ASWedit can also be requested by sending E-mail to:
	info@advasoft.com

ASWedit is a fully supported product that offers some extra functionality and free upgrades for a period of one year.

Educational institutions and non-profit charitable organizations can purchase the commercial version with 30% discount.

To check the current prices and place an order please use the printable order form available at:
	<URL:http://www.advasoft.com/order.html>

or contact AdvaSoft directly:

Fax: 	+44 181-251 0011
E-mail:	sales@advasoft.com

AdvaSoft Ltd
30 Hatch Road
London SW16 4PN
England


~0000800300
	About On-line Help

With Help, you can:
 - Press F1 (Help key) to get information quickly.
 - View Help information while working in your application.
   For example, you can follow step-by-step instructions in the Help window while you perform a task in the program.

On-line Help provides information about:
    -	menu commands and dialog box items
    -	command-line options
    -	the asWedit editor functions
    -	asWedit customization options
    -	... and more ...

_________
See also:
  Welcome to On-line Help 
  How to Use Help 


Any queries or recommendations related to asWedit can be send by E-mail to:

	as@advasoft.com

~0000800301
	How to Use Help

    To read all of this topic, scroll down.

You can use the on-line Help system from the Help menu or via the help key.

Wherever you are in the asWedit, you can press F1 (Help key) to see a Help topic about the currently active menu command or dialog-box.  This is called context-sensitive Help.

AsWedit context-sensitive Help comes up in a dialog-style Help window as shown, schematically, below :

 __________________________________
 |          asWedit - Help
 __________________________________
 |
 |
 |  Help  topic
 |  ...
 |  ...       .   .     .            <-- help
 |                                       text
 |  ...  |Help keyword| ...
 |
 |
 |
 __________________________________
 |
 | Follow  Back  Index  Close  Help  <-- action
 |                                       	area
 __________________________________


Select Help action buttons as follow:

 Action button	Do this
 _______________________________
 Follow	Follow the hypertext link currently selected.
 Back  	Go to the previous Help topic.
 Index	Go to the Help index.
 Close   	Close the Help window (pop it down).
 Help   	Get help about the help system.


Navigating through a Help topic:

    -  you can press the Ctrl key and the right or left arrow keys to move the cursor to a Help keyword (or use any other movement keys).  Help keywords are shown in color and are underlined.  Then press Enter.

    -  if you're using a mouse, double click the Help keyword you're interested in.

    -  alternatively you can position the cursor inside the Help keyword and activate the Follow button in the action area.

Note for keyboard users:
 To move keyboard focus from the action area (the row of buttons) to the help text window use Tab key, in the other direction use Shift+Tab key.

Choose one of these Help keywords to find out how to:

	 Go to the Help Index 

	 Go to a previous Help topic 

Choose one of these keywords to find out more about the Help menu:

	 On Keys 

	 Index 

	 On Help 

	 About... 

To close the Help window select Close button in the action area.

~0000800302
	ASWEDIT Menus

AsWedit editor is a menu driven program and the menu bar at the top of its window is a gateway to all commands and dialogs.

To go to the menu bar:
    -	Click anywhere on it, or
    -	Press F10, or
    -   Press Alt key together with any underlined letter in the menu bar.

You can choose any of these pull-down menus on the menu bar:

	 File 	 Edit 	 Search 	 View 

	 Tools 	 Options 	 Help 

In the HTML mode the following entries are also available:

	 Layout 	 Markup 	 HTML 

If you need detailed instructions on using the menu bar, go to the Help topic
	  How to Use Menus .

For information about menu shortcut keys, go to the Help topic:
	 Shortcut keys 
~0000800303
	The Editor

asWedit is a comprehensive and easy to use HTML and text editor for X Window System and Motif.
It offers three independent modes: a plain text editing mode and two context-sensitive, validating modes for authoring HyperText Mark-up Language documents as used on the Internet and intranets. The two HTML modes are standard and experimental.

By switching on the Options|HTML mode option (Ctrl+W) or just by loading an HTML file the editor becomes an HTML editor with built in intelligence.

	The main features:

HTML features
_____________
  * context-sensitive HTML 3.2x extended and HTML 3.2x experimental modes;
    only tags valid in the current context are available
  * full support for all HTML tags and attributes based on the HTML 3.2 
    specification by W3C but modified and extended by us with the widely 
    used extensions (including Frames)
  * support for the full table model as in RFC 1942, but corrected to
    support the current practice (like color cells, width on cells etc.)
  * creation of correct HTML documents (according to the extended DTD's)
  o support for different styles of editing: assistive tagging, cut and
    paste, by hand and parse
  * new, very fast parser 
    (100 times faster on big documents)
  * display of current HTML context
  * commands for finding and selecting the parent and child SGML elements
  o attribute editors
  * graphical options menus for some attributes, like align
  * command to replace the current container element with another
    one (e.g. H1 --> H2)
  * separate target command
  o dialogs for selecting relative and absolute URL's
  o special link dialog allowing creation of hyperlinks and the
    destination anchors in one step
  * auto insert of image width and height (GIF, JPEG & PNG)
  * customizable colors for different HTML tags
  o text to table and to list converters
  o table of contents generator
  o HTML tag flexible report tool
  o ready to use and test Form examples
  * customizable dialog for selecting and customizing of colors
  o spell that skips HTML tags
  o rich set of entities, including Latin 1, greek and user-defined ones
  * keyboard shortcuts for many HTML tags
  o user definable, mode dependent, key bindings
  * automatic hex-encoding of typed special characters in URL's
  o filters to convert between Latin 1 characters and their
    entities (extendible)
  o support for unlimited number of templates
  * comprehensive context-sensitive, hypertext help with topics
    on a selected tag and edited attribute (version related)
  * on-line hints when importing and correcting legacy HTML documents
  * auto correction of invalid HTML documents
  o preview mode that uses Netscape Navigator, NCSA Mosaic, Arena or Lynx
    (interprocess communication is used for Netscape and Mosaic)
  * new 10 times faster preview mode for Netscape Navigator

General features
________________
  * international release (versions for 10 languages)
  o modern graphical user interface (GUI)
  o multiple editing windows
  * user customizable pop-up menus for mouse-oriented editing and 
    features' quick access
  * user customizable toolbars with fly-by hints for icons
  * nice insensitive icons
  * many keyboard shortcuts
  o split window functionality
  * comprehensive context sensitive and click-on hypertext on-line help
    (now the hyperlinks are in color)
  o multiple undo and redo of edit actions
  o all standard editing features like: text Cut, Copy and Paste,
    bookmarks, pair matching, search and replace, etc.
  o commands to change case of letters, spell and sort
  o formatting commands (move, indent, re-format etc.)
  * auto positioning of dialogs under the pointer (less mouse movements)
  o user customizable filters and commands
  o customization via the standard X11/Motif resources method
  o easy localization to left-to-right languages (8-bit characters)
  * special no HTML mode for quick start-up and plain text editing
    (startup time was reduced by 40% in all modes)
    

(*) - means a completely new or dramatically improved feature in ver. 3.0

The asWedit window consists of a workspace with scrollbars (Edit Area), a Status Line at the bottom, the menu bar at the top and toolbars below the menu bar.

Read-only files:
AsWedit switches itself into read-only mode when the file opened is marked as read-only or a user specifically requested view only mode in the file open box.  The user cannot change anything in such mode and the file is shown on a slightly lighter background (to give a visual hint to a user).

HTML files:
If you open a new file that has one of the following extensions: '.html', '.html3', '.htm' or '.htm3' then asWedit parses the file and if there are no HTML mark-up errors, switches the HTML mode on.  If there are HTML mark-up errors (legacy documents), it shows every error with its description.  If possible it suggests to correct the error.  Note however that some errors, especially related to invalid nesting, has to be corrected manually.

_________
See also:
  Edit Area 
  Emacs bindings 
  About On-line Help 
~0080030210
	How to Use Menus

There are three basic ways to select a menu command:

Mouse:	Click the name of the menu you want to pull down, then click the menu command you want to choose.
F10:	Press F10 key, then use the arrow keys to go to the menu you want and use them again to select a command.  Press Enter to choose the selected command.
Alt:	Press Alt key and the underlined letter of the menu you want (such as Alt+F for the File menu), use the arrow keys to select a command, then press Enter to choose the command.

You can also press the underlined letter of a menu name or command instead of using the arrow keys.
Additionally you can mix those techniques together.

Menu commands may be followed by either an ellipsis mark (...), an arrow, or an acceleration key.
Their description is shown in the following table.

  Mark	Name		What the Menu Command Does
 __________________________________________________
  ...	Ellipsis	Brings up a dialog box

   ->	Arrow		Displays another menu

   Ctrl+S	Acceleration	Initiates some action when
 (etc.)	key		you choose this command or
			press the specified key(s)


Note: if a menu entry is not available it is greyed out and cannot be selected.

~0080030100
	Go to the Help Index

You can go to the Help Index by selecting Index button in the Help menu.
Alternatively, if the help window is already displayed, simply select the Index button in the help window action area.

~0080030101
	Go to a previous Help topic

You can Go to a previous Help topic (i.e. the topic that you read before the current one) by selecting the  Back  button in the action area of the Help window.
In this way you can backtrack through the Help topics you have viewed.


~0000800201
	Customization

There are two levels of customization:
  a personal selectable at run-time and
  a general done via X-resources.

The first one deals with the basic preferences that are accessible via toggle buttons in the pull-down menus and the current content of the toolbar.  Their state is saved using the Options|Save preferences command in the file ".asWedit-prefs" located in the users' Home directory.

The second one is much more general and is done usually just once (if at all).
You can change many of the visible aspects of asWedit, for example colors and fonts being used to suit your personal needs.
These changes can be made in files in your home directory called ".Xdefaults" and "AsWedit".

AsWedit may be customized as well for all users.  It is done by changing the file /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/AsWedit (default system configuration).  Please remember that your personal entries in ".Xdefaults" and "AsWedit" files overrides them.

Listed below is a more detailed description of the origin of resource database used for asWedit.

Because there are different categories for which asWedit may be customized, there are multiple files from which the resource database is constructed.  These files are then merged in a specific sequence into the resource database.  In this process entries from one file may be overridden by entries from another.

The four main sources for the resource database are:
 - /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/AsWedit   -  the application-specific resource file, that contains all the resource specifications not coded into the program (normally it should not be changed by the user; Note: the app defaults directory might be different on your computer).
 - $HOME/AsWedit     -  user-specific resource file, that contains customizations a user has made himself or herself.
 - $HOME/.Xdefaults -  display specific (every X program can access them on its display connection).
 - $HOME/.Xdefaults-<hostname>  -  host specific resource file.

Note: resource specifications can also be included directly or indirectly in the command line invoking a program (you can treat that as a last stage of getting the program resources).

Most of the customization resources you might ever need are in the first few parts of the supplied AsWedit file.

_________
See also:
  Widget tree 
  Command-line options 
  Filter customization 
  Localization 

~0080020101
	Command-line options

You can call asWedit with the "-help" command-line option to get the usage message in your local language.  If a command-line option is not recognized the program stops and the syntax message is printed as well.

The English syntax message is shown below.

Usage:  asWedit [options] [filename(s)]
where available options include:

  -bg      <COLOR>	sets background (page) color for all elements
  -fg      <COLOR>	sets foreground (text) color
  -bgtags  <COLOR>	sets one background color for all HTML tags
  -fgtags  <COLOR>	sets one foreground color for all HTML tags
  -fn  <FONT>		sets one font list for the whole program
  -fnm <FONT>		sets font list for menu items and dialogs
  -fnt <FONT>		sets font list for the edit text area
  -helpdir  <DIR>      	sets directory for the asWedit help file (asWedit.hlp)
  -tab <N>    		sets the tabstops to interval of N characters
  +<N>         		after opening the file go to line <N>
  -emacs       		turns on Emacs mode (alternate shortcuts set is used)
  -/+ai        		turns on/off autoindent
  -/+status		turns on/off status line
  -/+wrapmenu 		turns on/off the wrap menu
  -/+wrap      		turns on/off auto wraparound (*slow* before Motif 1.2)
  -/+v         		turns on/off view only mode
  -version              shows the version number and build date
  ..... 	and all standard X-Window options including:
  -display  <HOST:SCREEN>    	sets the display where the window will appear
  -geometry <WIDTHxHEIGHT+X+Y>	sets window size and position (in pixels)
  -iconic      		starts the program up iconified
  -xrm  <RESOURCE>	sets additional X resource specification
  =====>        '3-in-1' switches:
  -html         	allows 2 modes: HTML 3.2x and text; (default)
  -htmlx        	allows 2 modes: HTML 3.2x experimental and text
  -nohtml        	allows text-only mode (no HTML extensions)


~0080020102 Customization/Filter customization -> Filter customization
~0080020103 Customization/Localization --> Localization

~0000008050
	Localization

Many aspects of localization depend on the particular operating system, Motif implementation, and user environment in which the application runs.  The following must all cooperate for correct localization to occur:
  - the operating systems' locale mechanism, if any
  - the Motif implementation
  - the application itself
  - the user's system administrator
  - the user's language environment.

If you use X Window System Release 5 (or later) and Motif 1.2 (or later) you have the right setup to run asWedit in other languages.  On systems with X11R4/Motif 1.1 it is vendor dependent (some vendors built in the necessary extensions).

_________
See also:
  Establishing the language environment 
  Character composition 
  Finding X Resource files 

~0000805000
	Establishing the language environment

The actual language environment in which an application operates is specified by the application user, often by setting an environment variable (LANG on POSIX-based systems) or by setting the xnlLanguage resource.

Choosing a locale (POSIX)
From the command line set the environment variable LANG.  For example, when you type
in the Korn and Bourne shells:
	LANG=fr; export LANG

or in the C shell:
	setenv LANG fr

you set the locale of whatever window you enter it in to French.  That window will remain in French until you explicitly change locales again.  When you start asWedit from this window you will get asWedit in French (assuming that you've installed the French version).

Note that on SunOS 4.x to set support for French (German, and so on) you have to:
	set LANG to C, and
	LC_CTYPE to iso_8859_1.


~0000805001
	Character composition

There are many characters used in non-English languages that are not part of the ASCII character set.  If you have a national keyboard you are lucky because you can enter them directly.  If you're using an American keyboard you'll have to type those characters by composing them.
To compose a character, you usually need a special key - compose key, then you enter the appropriate key sequence for the character you want to type.  For instance to produce the character 'ø', you might press the Compose key, the the slash '/', then 'o'.  Not every keyboard has a Compose key, however.  If doesn't and you need one, you can remap a key you're not using to be the Compose key.  To do that use xmodmap(1) command.  For instance, to remap F12 function key to be the Compose key, enter this command:
	xmodmap -e "keysym F12 = Multi_key"

You can, of course, replace the "F12" with the name of any other key.  For more detailed information, see the xmodmap(1) man page.

~0000805002
	Finding X Resource files

Note that users should rarely if ever need to modify the system wide application defaults files (appdefs).

The default French and German appdefs for X-based applications are located in the
	/usr/lib/X11/fr/app-defaults  and
	/usr/lib/X11/de/app-defaults  directories, respectively.

If you're having trouble finding appdefs on your system, try looking at the environment variables XAPPLRESDIR, XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, and XFILESEARCHPATH.  They specify where to look for application-specific X resource files.



~0080020100
	asWedit widget tree

Sorry, asWedit widget tree has become to big and is not shown in the help any more.

Its size and complexity was actually causing more support questions than it was solving.
Instead of that the AsWedit resource file is divided now into parts and is well commented.

The class and application names for the program are:
    AsWedit	asWedit

Note that a special class name 'AsWedit_em' is used for the Emacs version of the program.


~0000000027
	Editing Index

Back up
	 backing up a document 
Cancelling
	 Cancelling before, during, or after an action 
 Clipboard 
	 copying text to 
	 cutting text to 
	 pasting text from 
Command
	 choosing and carrying out 
Compose key
	 Character composition 
Copying
	 Copying a document 
	 Copying text 
		 using Clipboard 
		 using Primary selection 
		 using Secondary selection 
Creating a document (see New document creating)
Cutting
	 text to Clipboard 
Cursor (see Insertion point)
Deleting text
	 deletion keys 
	 replacing text when you type 
Dialog_box
	 choosing a button or selecting an option 
	 inserting response in text box 
	 moving 
	 moving around in 
 Exiting asWedit 
Go to
	 Go to Line number 
Help
	 How to Use Help 
Highlighting (see Selecting)
Insertion point
	 Moving in dialog boxes 
	 moving within text 
Language environment
	 establishing 
Load file box
	 Selecting a file 
 Localization 
Match delimiter (see Searching for the matching delimiter)
Moving through a document (see Scrolling)
Moving text
	 between X-Windows applications 
	 within a file or between files 
New document
	 creating 
Opening
	 document 
Option (see Dialog_box)
Pasting
	 text from Clipboard 
	text from another X application (see Copying text)

Parenthesis matching (see Searching for the matching delimiter)
Printing
	 document 
Renaming
	 document 
Redoing
	 undo action 
Repeating
	 previous search 
Replacing
	 text: searching and replacing 
	 text: when you type 
Saving
	 backup copy 
	 document 
Scrolling
	 with keys 
	 with mouse 
Searching
	 for the matching delimiter 
	 for selection 
	 for text 
Selecting
	in dialog box (see Dialog Box)
	 text with keys 
	 text with mouse 
Travel keys (see Insertion point)
Undoing
	 Cancelling before, during, or after an action 


~0000000077
	Keyboard

 Deletion Keys 

 File Handling Keys 

 Function Keys 

 Insertion Keys 

Movement Keys
	 Moving and sizing windows 

	 Moving in dialog boxes 

	 Moving the insertion point within text 

Selection Keys
	 Selecting Text 

~0000007700
Deletion Keys

Press Ctrl+Z to undo your last deletion.

  Press	To delete
 ___________________________

 BackSpace	Character to the left of insertion point

 Del	Character to the right of insertion point or selected text

 Ctrl+Del	Text to the right of insertion point up to end of a line

 Ctrl+X	Selected text and send it to the Clipboard

~0000007701
File Handling Keys

  Press	To
 ____________________________

 Ctrl+O	Choose  File|Open 

 Ctrl+S	Choose  File|Save 

~0000007702
Function Keys

 Press	To
 ___________________________

 F1	Get help on the currently selected command, open dialog box, or message

 F7	Run the spell checking program for the selected text

 F10	Toggle to the menu bar

 Alt+F4	Close application or dialog window

~0000007703
Insertion Keys

 Press		To insert
 _________________________________

 Ctrl+V	Clipboard contents

When autoindent is turned on:
 Enter		New line and indent

 Ctrl+Enter		New line

When autoindent is turned off:
 Enter		New line

 Ctrl+Enter  	New line and indent


Note:
Overtype mode in not supported before Motif 1.2.
~0000007704
   Movement Keys: Moving and sizing windows

 Press	To
 _________________________________

 Alt+F5   Restore application window to previous size.

 Alt+F7   Move application window or dialog box; use the direction keys to move the window, then press Enter to set the position.

 Alt+F8   Size application window; use the direction keys to size the window, then press Enter to set the size.

 Alt+F9   Shrink application window to an icon.

 Alt+F10  Enlarge application window to maximum size.

Note:
You can also pull down the window menu using Alt+Spacebar or Shift+Escape and select the appropriate menu option.
In dialog windows the entries Alt+F5, Alt+F10 do not exist.

~0000007705
   Movement Keys: Moving in dialog boxes

 Press		To
 _________________________________

 Tab		Move to next option

 Shift+Tab	Move to previous option

 Esc		Close dialog box without carrying out a command

 Enter		Execute highlighted option

 Alt+F7		Move dialog box; use the direction keys to move the dialog box, then press Enter to set the position

~0000007706
   Movement Keys: Moving the insertion point within text

 Press		 To move
 __________________________________

 Direction keys	 One character or one line

 Ctrl+'<-'  	 One word left
 Ctrl+'->'  	 One word right
 Ctrl+'up key' 	 One paragraph up
 Ctrl+'down key' One paragraph down

 Home		 To beginning of line
 End		 To end of line
 Ctrl+Home	 To document beginning
 Ctrl+End	 To end of document
 PgUp		 Up one window
 PgDn		 Down one window
 Ctrl+PgUp	 To document beginning
 Ctrl+PgDn	 To end of document


_________
See also:
  Emacs bindings 

~0000770600
	Emacs bindings

To enable Emacs bindings start asWedit with "-emacs" command switch. Note that the class name for such instance of asWedit is: AsWedit_em and that "asWedit_em.hlp" help file is used (what you read now comes from "asWedit.hlp"!).

~0000007707
   Selection Keys: Selecting Text

 Press			To select
 __________________________________

 Shift+direction keys	Characters or lines

 Shift+Home		To beginning of line

 Shift+End		To end of line

 Ctrl+Shift+Home	To beginning of document

 Ctrl+Shift+End		To end of document


Note: engaging the Caps Lock does not substitute for holding down the Shift key.
_________
See also:
  Emacs bindings 

~0000800204
	Requirements

AsWedit runs on most workstations supporting X Window System and Motif.  To run remotely you need X-Server supporting X-Windows.  Note that a proper international support is available only since X-Windows Release 5 and Motif 1.2.

The main platforms asWedit works on include:
	IBM RS/6000 running AIX 3.2.5
	DEC Alpha running Digital Unix/OSF1 V3.x	
	Hewlett-Packard HP9000 series 700/800 running HP-UX 9.x
	SGI running IRIX 5.x
	PC/i386 running Linux 1.2.x, 2.x
	PC/i386 running SCO and SCO OpenServer 5
	Sun Sparc running SunOS 5.4 (=Solaris 2.4)
	Sun Sparc running SunOS 5.3 (=Solaris 2.3)
	Sun Sparc running SunOS 4.x
	DEC station running Ultrix 4.4

~0000800205
	Screen Regions

Specific for mwm (Motif Window Manager):

   Icon 

   Maximize Button 

   Minimize Button 

   Resize Border Handles 

   Title Area 

   Title Bar 

   Window Menu Button 


AsWedit specific:

   Edit Area 

   Menu bar 

   Scroll bars 

   Status Line 

~0080020500
	Icon

Icons are small graphic representations of windows.  A window can be minimized (iconified) using the minimize button on the window frame.  Icons provide a way to reduce clutter on the screen.

Pressing mouse left button when the pointer is over an icon causes the icon's window menu to pop up.  Releasing the button (press + release without moving mouse = click) causes the menu to stay posted.  The menu contains the following selections:

	Icon Window Menu

Selection Accelerator	Description
______________________________________________________

Restore	   Alt+F5	Opens the associated window

Move	   Alt+F7	Allows the icon to be moved with keys

Size	   Alt+F8	Inactive (not an option for icons)

Minimize   Alt+F9	Inactive (not an option for icons)

Maximize   Alt+F10	Opens the associated window to full screen size

Lower	   Alt+F3	Moves icon to bottom of icon stack

Close 	   Alt+F4	Causes client to terminate


Note that pressing middle button over an icon also causes the icon's window menu to pop up.  To make a menu selection, drag the pointer over the menu and release middle button when the desired item is highlighted.

Double-clicking left button on an icon normalizes the icon into its' associated window (in general, double-clicking a mouse button is a quick way to perform a function).

~0080020501
	Maximize Button

To make the window fill the screen  (or enlarge to the largest size allowed by the configuration files), click left button on the maximize button (the frame box with a large square in it).

~0080020502
	Minimize Button

To turn the window into an icon, click left button on the minimize button (the frame box with a small square in it).

~0080020503
	Resize Border Handles

To change the size of a window, move the pointer over a resize border handle (the cursor changes), press left button, and drag the window to a new size.  When the button is released, the window is resized.  While dragging is being performed, a rubber-band outline is displayed to indicate the new window size.

~0080020504
	Title Area

In addition to displaying the "asWedit" name with a name of currently opened file, the title area is used to move the window.
To move the window, place the pointer over the title area, press left button and drag the window to a new location.  A wide frame is moved during the drag to indicate the new location.  When the button is released, the window is moved to the new location.

~0080020505
	Title Bar

Located along the top of a window.
Drag the title bar to move the window.  Dialog boxes with title bars can also be moved in this way.
The title bar includes the title area, the minimize button, the maximize button, and the window menu button.

~0080020506
	Window Menu Button

The Window Menu Button is the frame box with horizontal bar in it.  To pull down the window menu, press left button.  While pressing, drag the pointer on the menu to your selection, then release the button when your selection is highlighted.  Alternatively, you can click left button to pull down the menu and keep it posted; then position the pointer and select.

	Default Window Menu

Selection Accelerator	Description
______________________________________________________

Restore	   Alt+F5	Restores the window to its' size
			before minimizing or maximizing

Move	   Alt+F7	Allows the window to be moved
			with keys or mouse

Size	   Alt+F8	Allows the window to be resized

Minimize   Alt+F9	Turns the window into an icon

Maximize   Alt+F10	Makes the window fill the screen

Lower	   Alt+F3	Moves window to bottom of window stack

Close 	   Alt+F4	Causes program to quit (or close the top window)

~0080020507
Edit Area

The main part of the asWedit window is taken by an editable workspace.  Motif Text widget is used as a base for the workspace.
It allows text to be edited, inserted, and selected.  The user can cut, copy and paste text using Clipboard, primary transfer, or secondary transfer.
Since Motif 1.2 text can also be dragged and dropped.

The user interface implemented is based on the "point and click" model.

The insertion cursor, displayed as an I-beam, shows where input is inserted.  Clicking the left button moves the insertion cursor to a new position, so newly typed text may be inserted at arbitrary locations.
The editor is in text-insertion mode, as default.  Overwrite mode is supported only with Motif 1.2 or higher.

~0080020508 0000800302 Screen Regions/Menu Bar -->	ASWEDIT Menus

~0080020509
Scroll bars

To scroll text with the mouse use scroll bars.  They are located at the right and bottom edges of the Edit Area.
The size of the scroll slider inside the scroll bar represents how much of the document being edited is visible; it's position indicate your location in the document (vertically or horizontally).  You can use the mouse to scroll to other parts of the document.

Using vertical scroll bar
Part		Mouse action
__________________________________

Top Arrow	Click to scroll up one line
Above Slider	Click to scroll up one full window
Slider		Drag to move to an appropriate location in the document
Below Slider	Click to scroll down one full window
Bottom Arrow	Click to scroll down one line

Using horizontal scroll bar
Use the horizontal scroll bar to move left and right as you use the vertical scroll bar to move up and down.
Note:
The horizontal scrollbar does not exist when you use asWedit in the "wrap word" mode.

Scrolling with keys
When you use keys to move the insertion point to text outside the window, the document scrolls automatically, both vertically and horizontally.
Note that holding down the Ctrl key while pressing any movement key extends the scope of action it performs.  For example, '<-' moves one character left, Ctrl+'<-' moves one word left.

~0080020510
Status Line

The line at the bottom of the asWedit window that shows status information.  It consists of: one character wide edit status field and line and column display area.

The edit status field shows either:
    -  nothing (space) when you start editing or no changes were made
    -  * (star) when changes were made to the edited text and they are not saved yet
    -  R (letter R) when the file is opened for view only (read-only mode); this mode might be selected by the user during loading of a file or might be set automatically for files that are read-only for the user.

The line and column display area shows information about the insertion point position.

Status information example:
Example		Meaning
*		Changes have been made and not saved yet
Line:: 12	Line number of the insertion point
Col::  33	Column number of the insertion point, spaces and tabs included

You can toggle the status line on or off using Status Line entry in the View menu.


~0000008056
	Users' Q & A

Listed below are some frequent users' questions and answers about asWedit divided into different subjects.

**Please**  read them and associated information before contacting the supporting person or the author of the program.  For customization questions see the AsWedit resource file also.

	 Program startup 

	 Files 

	 Editing 

	 HTML Editing 

	 Customization 

	 Localization 

	 Not supported systems 

~0000805600
	Users' Q & A - Program startup

[Q] On a program startup I get a lot of warnings like this:
	Warning: translation table syntax error: Unknown keysym name: osfActivate
	...
What is wrong??

[A] Probably, the key symbols database can't be accessed.
Check the environment variable XKEYSYMDB by typing:
	echo $XKEYSYMDB

If it is not set up or points to a wrong file correct it.  Below you can find a sequence for a SOLARIS standard configuration.  Type:

For Bourne/Korn shell:
	XKEYSYMDB=/usr/openwin/lib/XKeysymDB; export XKEYSYMDB

For C shell:
	setenv XKEYSYMDB /usr/openwin/lib/XKeysymDB

... and start asWedit again.

Note if you don't have XKeysymDB on your system ,or the above method doesn't work, get a copy of XKeysymDB and put it into /usr/lib/X11 directory.


[Q] During a startup program I get a warning about incompatible (old)  application defaults file.  Why ?
[A] An old application defaults file was loaded.  Those files are (or may be) incompatible with the current release of asWedit and some functionality might be lost (in some cases the program might even refuse to work properly!).  You *MUST* correct it!  Read the next question if you don't know how.  Alternatively for testing you could set up the XFILESEARCHPATH as './%N' and run the program from inside the directory where the AsWedit resource file resides.  For example for Korn shell you could start the program as follow:
	XFILESEARCHPATH=./%N asWedit


[Q] My localized version in XYZ language doesn't start up.  Why ?
[A] Appropriate application defaults file was not found.  Check the current settings for the LANG variable.  Run the following command to see what asWedit resources are loaded on startup:
	appres AsWedit asWedit
If you're having trouble finding appdefs on your system, try looking at the environment variables XAPPLRESDIR, XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, and XFILESEARCHPATH.  They specify where the X programs are looking for their resource files.


[Q] What is wrong ? I always get the following warning on the startup:
	Warning: locale not supported by C library, locale unchanged
[A] The program is internationalized and you should have your language environment set up.  On most system it means defining the LANG environment variable.  Do the following:
For Bourne/Korn shell:
	LANG=C; export LANG

For C shell:
	setenv LANG C

... and start asWedit again (you might replace C with your locale name, like en, de, fr etc.).

If your system has the necessary language support files for X in a non-standard place you might have to define the XNLSPATH to point there.  For example to run the SCO version on a localized Unixware system do the following:
	XNLSPATH=/usr/X/lib/locale;    export XNLSPATH
Note that for SunOS to be able to copy 8-bit characters you should do the following:
	setenv LANG C
	setenv LC_CTYPE iso_8859_1

I you run Linux check also the question below.
If you need more information about lozalization issues read the following asWedit help topic:
	Help Index|Customization|Localization
If you need system-dependent information check "man setlocale", "man lang" etc.


[Q] What is wrong, the program dies on a startup after issuing the following messages:
	Warning: locale not supported by C library, locale unchanged
	Warning: locale not supported by Xlib, locale set to C
	Warning: X locale modifiers not supported, using default

    (or the program dies when I try to copy or paste anything).

[A] This problem was happening for the previous asWedit releases on Linux. Now on Linux the program is linked with X11R6 and Motif 2.0 (ELF) so it will not happen. If it ever happens on your non-Linux platform you might find the answer below helpful.
    On all platforms except Linux the program is linked against Motif 1.2 which in turn requires X11R5 libraries and some setup files for native language support (nls).  Your system might be build around X11R6 but have the X11R5 libraries as well.  What is missing is the 'nls' directory that is required and should reside in the following directory:
	/usr/X386/lib/X11/nls
(or similar; the above is for the Linux)
    In the old Linux distribution (version 2.5) the X11R5 'nls.tar' file was included so just create the above directory.  If you choose not to create the directory there (or simply you cannot), then you must set the $XNLSPATH environment variable to point to the directory where you did install 'nls' files.


[Q] Upon startup, I get a large number of messages that say
	Warning: Cannot allocate colormap entry for "xxxxx"
    where xxxxx is a specific color. What's wrong ?
[A] Are you using Netscape Navigator (Netscape) or other graphics programs that require a lot of colors ?
    Netscape can be quite demanding on colors (especially if you view colorful pages ...). 
    The possible solutions are:
    1. Start asWedit before Netscape.
    2. Start Netscape and tell it to use a private colormap, i.e. start it as:
	netscape -install
       After this *all* other programs still can use the default colormap.  Note that you might see unpleasant colormap flashing when switching between applications using different colormaps.
    3. Limit the number of colors Netscape will allocate from the default colormap using '-ncols' command option when Netscape is started (note that value 0 tells Netscape to allocate as many colors it can get!).
       To see all possible command options start Netscape with the "-help" flag (the same goes for asWedit).

Try the above solutions and choose the best one for your setup. 
BTW, the default colors for asWedit HTML color tags have been chosen for displays using Gamma correction (on our displays we use Gamma between 1.4 and 1.7).


[Q] I got used to Emacs bindings in other programs.  Is there a way to implement them ?
[A] Because of many clashes between the popular shortcut keys and the Emacs keys they are not supported directly.
    However, you can run asWedit in a special Emacs mode by specifying "-emacs" command line option.  Note that an alternate resource file is necessary (AsWedit_em), the class name for such asWedit is AsWedit_em and alternate help file "asWedit_em.hlp" is needed.
To obtain them download the file "emacs-mode-asWedit-3.0.tar.Z".


[Q] The program crashes my xnews server (OpenWindows) even that I have the version 4.1.4 ?
[A] It is a bug in the server shipped with SunOS.  The "out of the box" installation of OpenWindows has this bug, but there is a patch on the installation CD that fixes the bug (note that this patch is not installed by default, it is recommended).


[Q] My Sun locked up as soon as I used the right-hand mouse button.  What's wrong ?
[A] It is a bug in the old OpenWindows X server (pre-X11R5).  If you can't get a patch for that or upgrade then switch off the pop-up menu.  To do that start the program as:
	asWedit -xrm "*popupEnabled: False"
    If you always display on that server (display) then put the above definition inside the system-wide AsWedit file (or inside your private AsWedit file, or inside .Xdefaults etc.).  You will lose the functionality of the pop-up menu but you get the program running.

~0000805601
	Users' Q & A - Files

[Q] I don't see any files in the File selection box.  Why ?
[A] Most probably you specified the filter part improperly, i.e. without the trailing '\' or the directory part.  For a detail description how to select a file see:
	 Selecting a file 


[Q] Accelerators (shortcuts for menu items) don't seem to work.  They were a while ago.  What's happened ?
[A] Check the status of the Caps Lock and Num Lock.  Neither of them should be engaged.


[Q] [HTML related] Why Netscape (or other program) cannot find the file /var/tmp/xyzabcx.html ?
[A] AsWedit communicates with Netscape Navigator using X Window System properties.  This type of remote Netscape control is available since Netscape version 1.1.  The implementation of this communication up until asWedit version 2.5 might have been slow in case many windows were opened on a desktop. In version 3.0 it was redesigned and now is about 10 times faster (on redisplay).

    In asWedit the default time after a temp file is deleted is 30 sec.  The built-in default looks like this:
	*unlinkDelay: 30000
    (the time is given in ms).

    To rectify your problem modify the default (put the definition inside the AsWedit or .Xdefaults file).  First try something like this:
	asWedit -xrm "*unlinkDelay: 60000"

    If the above does not solve your problem check if you are running asWedit and Netscape on the SAME computer (or at least on computers that share the tmp area) !.


[Q] On my Solaris 2.4 system when I use File|Close on the second (or third etc.) window the program crashes. Is it a bug in asWedit ?
[A] This is a known problem related to the changes done internally by SUN in the way how they allocate memory inside Motif.
    Most probably you should install the following patch:
	Patch-ID# 102226-17	(or later)
	Motif 2.4: libXm RunTime Kit Jumbo Patch

    To check if you have it use the following command:
	showrev -p

    The details of the problem are as follow: 
    Because of some bugs in Solaris we cannot compile a single version of the program that would work properly on both older and newer releases of the 2.4 system. If we compile the program with the "malloc" library it works on older systems but the program crashes when an empty X paste operation is attempted (asWedit 1.1.1 was compiled like this). If we compile the program without "malloc" library (as in asWedit 2.0, 2.5, 3.0) all is fine on newer systems, but on older ones the Closing of the second window might cause a crash  :-(  .
    If you cannot get the above patch just copy the libXm library from the 2.4 system where asWedit works OK.  If it is not possible, then the only solution is to downnload the asWedit version for Solaris 2.3 which is statically linked with Motif (and will work for you).

~0000805602
	Users' Q & A - Editing

[Q] Why can't I change anything in my file ?
[A] The file is read-only or was opened for view only.  This is the case if the status line shows a letter R and the edit window background is slightly lighter than usual.


[Q] Why columns in my file don't line up ?
[A] You are most probably using a proportional font.  Use a fixed font instead (see the original asWedit application defaults file).


[Q] I can't undo an action I did a while ago.  Why ?
[A] There is a limit on number of edit actions that can be undone.
    [HTML mode] In HTML mode some undo actions are not allowed by the internal checking algorithms.  You might rectify this by switching to the text mode and doing the undo sequence.


[Q] How can I disable creating backup files ?
[A] Define the backupFileSuffix as an empty string.  The definition should look like this:
	*backupFileSuffix:
    and should be placed in your AsWedit defaults file (or in the system wide AsWedit application defaults file if you are the system administrator).


[Q] I don't want to edit HTML files.  Can I use asWedit ?
[A] Yes, but to reduce the startup time (unnecessary menus are not created) start the program like this:
	asWedit -nohtml


[Q] Is it possible to force the program to break lines on a specific row length, say on 72nd character ? 
[A] Hard wrapping is not implemented.  The soft wrapping used in asWedit in wrap mode has the advantage of text flowing across the lines, even when you delete something in the previous (soft) line.  It is a common implementation in most modern wordprocessors.  If you want to reformat the text to fit into specific margins you should:
    mark the lines (or at least part of them) and then
    use the Tools|Format|Reformat command and specify left and/or right margins.  If you want to reformat only the right margin you should leave the left margin unspecified.
     

[Q] The program crashes when I try to use the tear-off menus. Is it a bug ?
[A] Most probably you are using a Linux version where it is a known problem of the underlying Motif library.  As the default version for Linux is built with the tear-off functionality switched off you must either be using a generic AsWedit resource file or you have turned it on.  You have to disable it: look in your AsWedit file for 'Linux' and follow instructions or alternatively, define the following in your .Xdefaults file:
	AsWedit*menuBar*tearOffModel:	XmTEAR_OFF_DISABLED

~0000805603
	Users' Q & A - HTML Editing

[Q] How can I preview my pages locally with all the referenced images in it ?
[A] Use relative addressing in your document and define the <BASE> element to point to your document (for example: <BASE HREF="file:/path/file"> ).  The program will suggest you such a base address if you use our HTML project base variable. NOTE that the value of the HREF attribute MUST be an absolute URI.  When you publish your document you might simply comment it out or even delete, or replace the "file:/" prefix with "http://your.server.address" etc.
    Please note that the BASE element must be defined in the context of <HEAD>.


[Q] In versions before 2.5 the HTML 3 was the default asWedit mode.  In version 2.5 - it was HTML 2. Now the default mode is just called HTML.  Why ?
[A] Because that's what is being used in practice. [Long answer follows]
    The original HTML 3 draft proposal has expired. Many proposed elements have not been implemented in browsers at all, some of the parts, like maths are being completely rewritten. In the meantime the HTML 2 standarization process is far behind the current practice.
    Because of that we have decided to extend the proposed HTML 3.2 mode by some widely used HTML extensions. We have alsio disabled all of the 3.0 maths and so on as they were not implemented in the mainstream user agents.  
The mode we got reflects the current practice as of Autumn 1996 and we just call it extended HTML (although it could be called HTML '96). We hope that our HTML extended mode is all you need.


[Q] Can the program 'learn' the unknown tags for good ?
[A] To define permanently some 'unknown' tags uncomment and edit the 'learnTagNames' resource in the AsWedit resource file.  It is recommended that you put the declaration in your private AsWedit or .Xdefaults file.  Remember that the tag names MUST be specified in lower case letters and separated by commas.


[Q] I cannot delete an HTML tag using the 'Alt+Del' shortcut, although I can when I use the menu command Edit|Delete Tag.  What's wrong ?
[A] Most probably you are using Sun's X server or any other X server that has keymaps different from the most common setup.  Try using the Meta key (i.e.  the Diamond key).
    On Sun's keyboards you have both Alt and Meta keys, and the Meta key is used as the Mod1 modifier (run xmodmap to see your keyboard mappings).  You might redefine the following resources so the user will see the proper key modifier symbol:
	*menuBar*DeleteTag.acceleratorText:	Meta+Del
    (note however that when you display the program on an X server that uses Alt as Mod1 you must use Alt+Del).


[Q] Why the on-line help is not available in HTML format ? Is there any printed documentation available ?
[A] There are disadvantages of help in the HTML format.  The current HTML standard is, in our opinion, not very well suited for context-sensitive help systems of a reasonable size and complexity.  It is not easy to construct one help file, allow full context sensitivity and show only what is required.  The simple transformation of the help into separate HTML files, linked together, would give more than 650 files (topics) and would need around 1500 cross-references :-(.
    Printed documentation is available in the commercial version only.


[Q] Can I edit HTML 3 files?
[A] It depends what it means.  Many programs say they support HTML 3 when what they mean is support for a very limited subset of the, now expired, HTML 3 draft. Much widely supported is HTML 3.2 as propopsed by W3C in the middle of 1996.
    Most probably our standard HTML mode will be all you need.  This mode is based on HTML 3.2 and has been extended by us to support most of the new features implemented in Netscape Navigator 3.0 in summer 1996.  If however it is not enough, then start asWedit in its experimental mode. Start it as follow:
	asWedit -htmlx

    The program will use HTML 3.2x experimental declarations and the context-sensitive help will be based on it.


[Q] What standard of HTML the 'html' standard mode is based on?
[A] This version is based on the HTML 3.2 proposal by W3C (DTD draft of 21 Aug 1996). This DTD has been extended by us to support extensions available in Netscape Navigator 3.0.
    [See also the answer about HTML 2 extensions below]

    NOTE:
    In the DTD we use we have changed the definition '% HTML.Deprecated "INCLUDE"' to '% HTML.Deprecated "IGNORE"'.  It deprecates the following elements LISTING, PLAINTEXT & XMP which were prosed to be obsolete in HTML 3.0.


[Q] What standard of HTML 3.2 this program is based on?
[A] There is no standard yet. This version is based on the draft proposal published by W3C, originally in May 1996.  Specifically, the HTML elements and relations are based on the following DTD draft:


	W3C Document Type Definition for the HyperText Markup Language
	This version is code named Wilbur, and also as "HTML 3.2".

	Draft: Tuesday August 21st 1996
	
	Author: Dave Raggett <dsr@w3.org>


[Q] What extensions are supported by asWedit extended HTML 3.2x and experimental HTML 3.2x modes ?
[A] In version 3.0 we have added support for many widely used HTML extensions in both modes.
    The following extensions are supported both modes:

    o Netscape specific elements, including Frames

    o Additional attributes for IMG

    o Face attribute for FONT

    o Background color for table and table elements (table, tr, td and th)

    o Netscape Navigator's 3 new elements: MULTICOL, SPACER and NOSCRIPT

    o SPAN element, as proposed to be used with styles

Additionally in the Experimental mode (called using "-htmlx" option) the following has been implemented:

    o New basic attributes (%attrs) and basic justification definition (%just) text markup

    o The full, slightly corrected, table model as proposed in RFC 1942


[Q] Are all the Netscape extensions supported in version 3.0 ?
[A] Nearly all.  The only element we do not support is: BLINK.  However, you can easily add it to the 'learnTagNames' definition (if you really need it).  See a question about unknown tags above. Also the content description of the SCRIPT tag does not allow some of the "tricks" used by some JavaScript authors (it follows the HTML 3.2 declaration).


[Q] I can't find a math entity &xyz;.  It is one of the basic mathematical symbols.  What's up ?
[A] The maths part is not finished in the current HTML 3 draft yet.  You could expect the support for some of your common mathematical symbols like '&sum;' and '&inf;' in the next draft (which is very much delayed as the whole maths part is being completely rewritten).


[Q] I was told that a new HTML 'X' standard (draft) will be published soon.  Will this program be updated to reflect the new document ?
[A] We will do our best to get a new asWedit version ready as soon as possible.  How quickly it will depend on the number, character and stability of the changes.


[Q] Can I customize how the tags are entered.  I would like them to be lower/upper case, followed by a line feed, etc.  I would also like to define some entities.
[A] See the 'HTML related resources' part in the AsWedit file.  Most of the things you would ever need are there.


[Q] Some elements are inserted with line feeds before or after.  Can I change it ?
[A] Yes you can.  Which opening tags are inserted with line feeds is controlled by two resources:
	'lfBeforeOtags' and 'lfAfterOtags'.
    For the closing marks these resources are:
	'lfBeforeCtags' and 'lfAfterCtags'.
    The resources contain lists of tags with appropriate behavior.
    Modify appropriately these resources using standard tag names (lower case) and separate them with a comma as in the following example (see AsWedit resource file for details):
	*lfAfterOtags:  body,html,head,p,ul,ol,dl,pre,address,hr


~0000805604
	Users' Q & A - Customization

[Q] I'd like to customize asWedit X resources (like colors) but there are many ways to customize X/Motif programs and I'm getting lost.  Is there a recommended route for asWedit ?
[A] All the different customization techniques might be applied to asWedit and for many users it is too much. We think that the best is to follow the following:

  Single user (English version):

    (1)  Do NOT install the AsWedit resources (they are built-in).
    (2a) Create yourself a private AsWedit resource file in your home directory (or a directory included in XUSERFILESEARCHPATH specification, if used).  Put in this file ONLY the resources that you want to change (copy them from the global AsWedit file). Modify the resources.
    (2b) Instead of putting your resources in your private AsWedit file you can put them in your .Xdefaults file.  However, in this case you HAVE to prepend them with the program's class name: 'AsWedit'.  For example the following would define printers available for the program:
	AsWedit*printerList:  lp ,lp -d hp ,lp -d hp2

  Single user (localized version(s)):

    (0)  Install the localized AsWedit resource file in the language dependent area.
    (1-2) Follow the steps (1) & (2) above.

  Site installation:

    (0)  Install the AsWedit resource file.  Follow the "Site installations note" in this file and modify some other resources if necessary (you might like to keep the original to know what was changed).
	Tell the users about steps (1) & (2) above (if needed).


[Q] Occasionally I'd like to have just one color for all HTML tags.  Can I do it ?
[A] Yes, start the program as follow (choose colors you like):
	asWedit -btags grey90 -fgtags grey20

    To make it permanent define the following resources in your .Xdefaults file:
	AsWedit.BackgroundTags: grey90
	AsWedit.ForegroundTags: grey20


[Q] I use both color and monochrome screens.  Can I define different colors for each screen ?
[A] There are different ways of doing this. The easiest is to insert the following in your .Xdefaults file and use the xrdb client to load your resources:
	AsWedit.BackgroundTags:		white
	AsWedit.ForegroundTags:		black


[Q] I can change any color in the program by customizing AsWedit resource file apart from the colors used by tollbar icons.  Is there a way of modifying their colors as well ?
[A] Yes, you can change the tollbar icons' colors as well.  For details see:
	 Modifying icons' colors 


[Q] I know the program well by now and I don't need the tooltips any more. Can I switch them off ?
[A] Yes, you can.  You can also define different delays used for their display.
    To switch them off put the following resource in your .Xdefaults file:
	AsWedit.HintDelay:	0

    To change how quickly they are displayed put the following resources instead and modify the delays given in msec:
	AsWedit*hintInitialDelay:	1000
	AsWedit*hintDelay:		200


[Q] When I turn on/off one of the toolbar the program does not redisplay the new layout properly.  What's wrong ? It does not happen on my other system ?
[A] It is a bug in the underlying Motif libraries or/and in a window manager on some systems.  The only workaround now is to simply resize slightly the main window when this happens.  If that does not help modify your configuration so all the toolbars are visible when the program starts (then if you want just turn some of them off).


[Q] How can I customize the pop-up menus ?
[A] Currently pop-up menus customization can only be done via X resources. You have to modify the following AsWedit resources (their default values are shown below):
   *editorPopupContents: Undo,Spacer,Cut,Copy,Paste,Spacer,EditTag,DeleteTag,ReplaceTag,Spacer,Open,Save,Spacer,Exit
   *statLinePopupContents: Go_to,Spacer,Refresh,ShowContext

The easiest way to get the names you need on these lists is to play with the toolbar run-time customization and check the .asWedit-prefs file in your home directory. You can even setup one of your toolbars as you would like the pop-up to be, save the preferences and get the whole list for the right hand side of your pop-up contents definition. Put those definitions in your private AsWedit resource file or in your .Xdefaults file (in the latter case prepend the resources with the AsWedit class name).


[Q] I never use the extended (non-standard) entities. Can I switch the related menus off in the Markup|Entities menu ?
[A] You can define the number of entities sub-menus in the Markup|Entities menu. This is used primarily to switch off the rarely used entities: proposed, Greek, spacing and dots. To disallow all the sub-menus mentioned above put the following resource in your .Xdefaults file:
	AsWedit*entitiesMenuLimit:	3

Note using the value of 5 above would allow you to see the separator and the proposed sub-menu, value 6 - proposed + Greek, and so on. Note that you will always see the standard set (i.e. values below 3 are mapped to 3).


[Q] I have just upgraded from the version 1.1.x.  Some of my user defined commands and/or filters are not available any more or have changed their positions.
    What's wrong ?
[A] In the version 2.0 we have changed the numbering schemes for all user customizable items.  Now they are numbered starting from 1 as opposed to 0 in the previous versions.
    To rectify your problem simply re-index your customized command and/or filter declarations (for example rename cmd4 to cmd5, cdm3 to cmd4,...., cmd0 to cmd1).


~0000805605
	Users' Q & A - Localization

[Q] Why my native language XYZ is not supported ?
[A] Because I don't know it :-)  and nobody contributed the translations yet.


[Q] I really would like to get a version for my native language.  Can I help ?
[A] YES, you can! If you are ready to spend some time translating special localization files, contact Andrzej at:
	as@advasoft.com

    NOTES
    (1) The most complete localizations are: Czech, Danish, German, Spanish and Polish. If you think that something should be changed please let us know (see the E-mail address above).
    (2) Most of the work has already been done also for the following languages: Dutch, French, Portuguese and Swedish (HTML related translations are still needed!).
    (3) asWedit supports only the left to right languages with single-byte character sets.


[Q] Who was helping localizing asWedit to all these different languages ?
[A] This is a question I have a pleasure to answer! So I take the opportunity to give them the full credit THEY DESERVE!

		ACKNOWLEDGMENT
		______________

I wish to express my gratitude to all who have helped me in localizing asWedit to different languages.

I would like particularly acknowledge the following people for their contributions (in alphabetic order):

    Maria Lúcia Machado Duarte
    Anna Eriksson
    Roman Hlavac		<Roman.Hlavac@sasprg.cz>
    Ivo Liska		<Lisak@iris.vszbr.cz>
    Javier Macías-Guarasa	<macias@die.upm.es>
    Jacob Nordfalk		<nordfalk@fys.ku.dk>
    Sira Elena Palazuelos-Cagigas	<sira@die.upm.es>
    Frank Richter		<Frank.Richter@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
    Rémi Saïas
    Thomas Sippel-Dau 	<vulture@ic.ac.uk>
    Grzesiek Staniak		<gstaniak@golem.umcs.lublin.pl>
    Ineke Visser


Andrzej Stochniol <as@advasoft.com> 
London, England, October 1996


~0000805606
	Users' Q & A - Not supported systems

[Q] Will asWedit be supported on my Solaris x86/Unixware/FreeBSD/NetBSD/XYZ platform ?  Can I help ?
[A] Unfortunately, we do not have such a system in house.
    Note that the source code is NOT available to third parties and we will reject any kind offers to recompile the program (sorry).
    We might accept a donation of a full development system to port the program to your platform. If you are in a position to consider this option please send E-mail to Andrzej at:
	as@advasoft.com

~0000002701
To cancel before, during, or after an action

Before
   In a dialog box that has a Cancel button press Esc key or click Cancel.
   In a dialog box that has a Close button, an action is carried out as soon as you choose an option.  Esc key will not reverse these actions.

During
   Press Esc key.
   If the process does not stop, press Esc again.
Note: Some operations cannot be interrupted once started.

After
   To cancel the most recent editing
   Choose Edit| Undo  or press Ctrl+Z.
Note: you can undo more than one editing operation, simply repeat the action above.

~0000002703
To copy text to the Clipboard

1.   Select  the contents you want to remove.
2.  Choose Edit|Copy or press Ctrl+C.
	The contents will be placed on the Clipboard.

You can then paste that text into any other document with the Edit| Paste  command.

The text remains in the  Clipboard  so you can paste it many times.

_________
See also:
  Copying text 
  Alternate edit shortcut keys 
  Pop-up menu 

~0000002704
To cut text to the Clipboard

1.   Select  the contents you want to remove.
2.  Choose Edit|Cut or press Ctrl+X.
	The contents will be placed on the Clipboard.

You can then choose Edit| Paste  to paste that text into any other document (or somewhere else in the same document).

The text remains in the  Clipboard  so you can paste it many times.

_________
See also:
  Copying text 
  Alternate edit shortcut keys 
  Pop-up menu 

~0000002705
To paste text from the  Clipboard 

1.  Place the insertion point where you want to insert the Clipboard contents.
2.  Choose Edit|Paste or press Ctrl+V.


_________
See also:
 Edit| Cut  command
 Edit| Copy  command
  Copying text 
  Alternate edit shortcut keys 
  Pop-up menu 

~0000002706
   To choose and carry out a command

  With keys
1. Hold down the Alt key and press the underlined letter in the menu name.
   - or - Press F10 to go to the menu bar, then use the direction keys to select the menu you want, then press Enter.
2. Press the underlined letter in the command name.
   - or -
   Use the direction keys to select the command you want, then press Enter.

  With mouse
1. Point to the menu name.
2. Click the left mouse button.
3. Point to the command name.
4. Click the left mouse button.

If a command name is followed by an ellipsis (...), a dialog box will appear.  Choose the options you want, then press Enter or click OK to carry out the command.
_________
See also:
  Cancelling before, during, or after an action 
  Choosing a button or selecting an option in a dialog box 

~0000002708
To copy a document

0. If you've just made some changes save them using File|Save.
1. Choose File|Save As.
2. In front of the file name, type the path name for the directory where you want to copy the document.
   - or -
   Type a different file name if you want a copy of the document in the same directory.
3. Choose OK.
_________
See also:
  Making a backup copy of a document 

~0000002709
Copying text

Three different methods of text copying are supported by asWedit:

   Clipboard     Primary selection    Secondary selection 


The use of different technique depends on personal preferences.  Our recommendations are as follows:

Clipboard - general usage; use as a longer-term storage; method widely accepted in the word-processing;

Primary selection   - general method of transferring data between different X-Windows applications (for example, this is used to transfer data from/to xterm);

Secondary selection - a quick method, but limited to Motif applications; it is most useful for copying text at the point where you are currently typing.

~0000002710
To copy text using Clipboard:

1. Select the text you want to copy.
2. Choose Edit|Copy or press Ctrl+C.
3. If copying between documents, move the insertion point to the second document.
4. Place the insertion point where you want to insert the copy (either using mouse or the direction keys).
5. Choose Edit|Paste or press Ctrl+V.

Note: The text remains in the Clipboard so you can paste it many times.
If you want to copy text between two documents using Clipboard, first open both documents using asWedit.

_________
See also:
  Copying text using Primary selection 
  Copying text using Secondary selection 
  Alternate edit shortcut keys 
  Pop-up menu 

~0000002711
To copy text using Primary selection:

1. Select the text you want to copy (it may be in ANY application supporting primary selections).
2. Place the insertion point where you want to insert the copy (either using left button or the direction keys).
3. Click the middle button.

Note: 	An important constraint is that only one window may "own" a selection property at one time.  This means that once the user makes another primary selection, the original selection is lost.
	The primary selection is very often used to copy text between different X-Windows applications.

_________
See also:
  Copying text using Clipboard 
  Copying text using Secondary selection 

~0000002712
To copy text using Secondary selection:

1. Place the insertion point where the copied text WILL go (either using left button or the direction keys).
2. Go to the text that needs to be copied and mark it by pressing and dragging the mouse middle button (the text should be now underlined).
3. Release the middle button.  The marked text is immediately stuffed where the insertion cursor was placed before.

Note: Unlike primary selections, which may be retrieved many times, secondary selections are immediate and can only be stuffed once (at the time the selection is made).
Whereas primary selections are supported, secondary selections are generally not.  In fact only certain X-Windows programs support them.

_________
See also:
  Copying text using Clipboard 
  Copying text using Primary selection 

~0000002743
    To find the matching delimiter

Position the cursor just before the delimiter (for example {, ], or ").  Then:

  press Alt+[ to match forward,

  or

  press Alt+] to match backward.


The following pairs are supported: {}, (), [], <>, "", ``, //, '', \\ .


You can also use the Search|Match delimiter menu.

_________
See also:
 Search| Match delimiter  menu


~0000002715
To replace text when you type
   You can replace existing characters one by one as you type only for Motif 1.2 or later.
   To do that switch to overtype mode by pressing Ins key (for Motif 1.2.3, or later, the cursor will change to the box shape).  Then just type.
   To switch back to insert mode press Ins key.

To delete text when you start typing
1.	Select text.
2.	Start typing.


~0000002716
   To choose a button or select an option in a dialog box

With keys
  Press (once or more) Tab or Shift+Tab key to go to the option requested, then press Enter or Spacebar.
  For the default button (usually OK), press Enter.
  For Cancel or Close, press Esc key.

With mouse
  Point to the button or option and click the left mouse button.

_________
See also:
  Moving around in a dialog box 

~0000002717
   To insert a response in a text box

1.  If the text box's border is not highlighted select the box by either:
	pointing it by mouse and clicking the left mouse button
	- or -
	pressing (once or more) Tab or Shift+Tab key to move focus to the box requested.
2.  Type your response.

    You can then edit your response the same way as in document text.

~0000002718
   To move a window or dialog box

   With keys
1.	If the borders aren't visible, restore the window to display them.
2.	Press Alt, Spacebar, M.
3.	Press the direction keys to position the outline of the window.
4.	Press Enter to move the window.
   With mouse
z	Drag the window or dialog box title bar.
	Note: Only some dialog boxes have title bars.
- or -
1.	Choose Window Menu|Move.
2.	Press a direction key.
3.	Use the mouse to move the outline of the window or dialog box.
4.	Click the left mouse button to anchor the window or dialog box in the new location.
_________
See also:
  Sizing a window 

~0000002719
   To move around in a dialog box
   With keys
	Press Tab to move through the buttons and options one by one (pressing Shift+Tab moves you backward).
   With mouse
	Point to the button or option and click the left mouse button.
_________
See also:
  Moving a window or dialog box 

~0000002720
   To exit asWedit

	Choose File|Exit


Note: If you've modified a file without saving it, asWedit prompts you to do so before exiting.
      See the  File not Saved !  warning dialog.

_________
See also:
  Pop-up menu 

~0000002726
Selecting a file

You select a file using a special file selection dialog.  Its' detailed description follows.

The file selection dialog displays the file system hierarchy so that you can select a file or directory for.

The dialog provides the ability for you to specify a  Filter  to indicate which files from a directory you are interested in.  This filter is generally given as a regular expression using UNIX meta-characters (e.g. "*" matches all files, while "*.c" matches all files that end in ".c").

The dialog is broken down into three main components:
 - the directory mask identifies the directory to use and a filter or pattern-matching string;
 - the  Directories  and  Files  list boxes break down the mask into two lists (a list of directories and a list of files within the selected item from the directory list);
 - the Selection text box identifies a file to use when the OK button is activated.

The Filter button acts on the directory and pattern specified in the Filter text box.  For example, consider the following filter text:
	/home/demo/*
Since directories are delimited by the "/" character, the very last segment ("*") is the "pattern" and is treated as a filter for the directory preceding it ("/home/demo").  When you select the Filter button or press Enter key in the filter's text box, the directory part of the filter is searched and all the directories within that directory are displayed in the Directories list.  The pattern part is then used to find all matching files within the directory; the result is listed in the Files list.
Note: Only files are placed in the Files list; directories are excluded since they are listed separately.

The above seems straightforward, but it can become VERY confusing for some users.  For example, consider the following filter text:
	/home/demo
This path name appears to be a common directory path, but in fact, the directory is "/home" and the pattern is "demo".  If searched, the Directories list will contain all the directories in "/home" and the Files part won't contain anything because "demo" is a directory - not a pattern that will match any other files.
This is one of the MOST common mistake made by users!

Therefore, you should remember to use the last "/" in the filter's path name to separate the directory part from the pattern part.

Note about file selection box for loading (opening) a file:
The file selection box for loading a file has one extra toggle button embedded in a frame located just below the Directories and Files lists.  It is called Open for view only and you should toggle it on when you would like to view only the specified file (as opposed to changing it).


~0000002728
   To move text between applications

Most X-Windows and Motif text applications support only "copy and paste" functionality (including primary and secondary selections).
To move text between applications an extra "cut and paste" functionality must be build in.  This is usually done with Edit menu.  If both applications use the standard Motif Cut/Paste procedures you can easily move text between them.  To move text:

1.	Start both applications, and open the applicable files in each.
2.	Select the text you want to move.
3.	Choose Edit|Cut.
4.	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the text.
5.	Choose Edit|Paste.
- or -
1.	If you run one application at a time, start the application for the file containing the text you want to move, then open that file.
2.	Select the text you want to move.
3.	Choose Edit|Cut.
4.	Close the application.
5.	Start the application for the file where you want to move the text, then open that file.
6.	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the text.
7.	Choose Edit|Paste.
_________
See also:
  Cutting text to the Clipboard 
  Moving text within a document or between documents 
  Pasting text from the Clipboard 

~0000002729
   To move text within a document or between documents

If you want to move text between two documents, first open both documents.

   With command
1.	Select the text you want to move.
2.	Choose Edit|Cut.
3.	Place the insertion point where you want to move the text.
4.	Choose Edit|Paste.

   With keys
1.	Select the text you want to move.
2.	Press Ctrl+X.
3.	Place the insertion point where you want to move the text.
4.	Press Ctrl+V.

_________
See also:
  Copying text 
  Moving text between applications 
  Alternate edit shortcut keys 
  Pop-up menu 

~0000002730
   To create a new document

1. Choose File|New.
2. Type the text for the new document.
3. Choose File|Save or File|Save As.
4. Type name of a new document in the Save As dialog, then choose OK.

~0000002731
   To open a document
1.	Choose File|Open or press Ctrl+O.
2.	Type or select the name of the document you want to open.
	If the document is not listed in the current directory, either type the directory name in front of the document name, or select the directory in the Directories box.
3.	Choose OK (or just press Enter).

_________
See also:
  Pop-up menu 
~0000002733
   To print a document

   Choose File|Print.
_________
See also:
 File| Print 

~0000002734
   To rename a document
1.	Choose File|Save As.
2.	Type a new name for the document.
3.	Choose OK.
	You now have a copy of the document with the new name.
4.	If you want, delete the document with the old name.
_________
See also:
  Copying a document 
  Making a backup copy of a document 

~0000002735
Redoing an undo action

To redo undo operation select Edit| Redo .  Alternatively use Shift+Ctrl+Z shortcut key.

~0000002736
Repeating previous search

To repeat previous search use Search| Find Next  command.

Alternatively use Ctrl+L shortcut key (when in the edit window).

~0000002737
To search and replace text

1.	Choose Search|Change.
2.	Type the text you want to search for (change) in the Text to Find: box.
3.	Type the replacement text in the Change To: box.
	- or -
	If you want to remove the Text to Find: text from the document, leave the Change To: box blank.
4.	Options.  If you want to limit the search, turn on Case sensitive and/or Whole words only.
5.	Direction.  You can select either Forward or Backward search.
6.	Choose one of the buttons in the action area:
	Find & Verify button - If you want to confirm each change before it's done.  Each time you will be prompted to change or skip the text found, or cancel the search altogether.
	- or -
	Change All button - If you want to make all the changes (the number of changes will be displayed afterwards in a pop-up dialog).

_________
See also:
  Searching for text 

~0000002739
Backup copy of a document when saving

As default asWedit creates a backup copy whenever a file with a specified name already exists (a default suffix .bak is used).
This can be however changed (overridden) by setting the "*backupFileSuffix" resource.  Different/local language suffix may be chosen or the backup copy option might be completely turned off (by specifying no suffix).

_________
See also:
  Copying a document 

~0000002740
To save a document

     Choose File|Save or press Ctrl+S shortcut key.

_________
See also:
  Making a backup copy of a document 
  Renaming a document 
  Pop-up menu 

~0000002745
   To search for text
1.	Choose Search|Find.
2.	Type the text you want to find in the Text to Find: box.
3.	Options.  If you want to limit the search, turn on Case sensitive and/or Whole words only.
5.	Direction.  You can select either Forward or Backward search.
6.	Choose Find Next button to find the nearest occurrence of the text.

_________
See also:
  Searching and replacing text 

~0000002747
   To select text with the mouse

Any text
1.	Point to the beginning of the text you want to select and click the left mouse button.
2.	Hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse pointer to the end of the text you want to select.
	- or -
	Point to the end of the text you want to select, then hold down Shift and click the left mouse button.

A word or line
1.	Place the insertion point in the word or line.
2.	For a word, double-click left mouse button.
	For a line, triple-click left mouse button.

_________
See also:
  Selecting text with Keys 

~0000002744
    To search for selection
    (another occurrence of a selected text)

1. Select in the edit window what you want to search for
   (remember double-click selects a word).
2. Press Ctrl+L or choose Search|Find Next command.

All settings made in the Find dialog box remain in effect when you choose Find Next.

Note: do NOT include a new line in the selection, otherwise the highlighted text is not treated as an item to search for.
_________
See also:
  Find dialog box 

~1800000000
	      List of menu commands


~0000000396
	Entering taget

Use this command to define a target in your document.
This target can be used then as the destination of hypertext links.

Note that you will only have to define one attribute for the more general hyperlink element <A>.
For more information look under the hyperlink element <A>.

~0000000196
	Entering taget

Use this command to define a target in your document.
This target can be used then as the destination of hypertext links.

Note that you will only have to define one attribute for the more general hyperlink element <A>.
For more information look under the hyperlink element <A>.

~0000700000
	Layout|Standard command

Use this command to start editing a new HTML document.  It inserts a user definable HTML document template.  In the default setup it inserts (at least) the following text:

<HTML>
<HEAD>
 <TITLE></TITLE>
</HEAD>

<BODY>

</BODY>
</HTML>

and positions the editing cursor just after the <title>.  This allows you to enter the title of the document immediately.

You can modify the template by changing two resources in your private AsWedit resource file (or your .Xdefaults file).
The two resources are:
  for the HTML "standard" mode:
	'html2StdTemplOpen' and 'html2StdTemplClose'.
  for the HTMLX experimental mode:
	'html3StdTemplOpen' and 'html3StdTemplClose'.

Their default definitions are as follow:
  for HTML mode:
*html2StdTemplOpen:	<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//AdvaSoft//DTD HTML 3.2 extended 961018//EN">\n<HTML>\n<HEAD>\n <TITLE>
*html2StdTemplClose:	</TITLE>\n</HEAD>\n\n<BODY>\n\n</BODY>\n</HTML>\n
  for HTMLX mode:
*html3StdTemplOpen:	<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//AdvaSoft//DTD HTML 3.2 experimental 961018//EN">\n<HTML>\n<HEAD>\n <TITLE>
*html3StdTemplClose:	</TITLE>\n</HEAD>\n\n<BODY>\n\n</BODY>\n</HTML>\n

NOTE: the names are prefixed with html2 and html3 for asWedit backwards compatibility reasons. They do not relate any more to the old HTML 2 and HTML 3 modes (as supported up to version 2.5).


~0000650077
Overview of Character-Level Elements

Character level elements are used to specify either the structural meaning or the physical appearance of marked text without causing a paragraph break.  Like most other elements, character level elements include both start and end tags.  Only the characters between the tags are effected.  For example:

  This is <EM>emphasized</EM> text.

Highlighting elements are allowed within the content of other highlighting elements, but implementations are not required to render these nested highlighting elements distinctly from non-nested elements.
For example, implementations may render the following two cases identically:

  plain <B>bold <I>italic</I></B>
  plain <B>bold </B><I>italic</I>

Some character highlighting styles are more explicit than others about how they should be physically represented.  Designate the information type rather than the character format wherever possible, unless for example, it is necessary to refer to the text as in "The italic parts are mandatory".

~0075000100
	Forms|Examples|Text entry

This command inserts a user-customizable HTML Form example.  

To see more about the Form examples see the following help topic:
	HTML|Forms|Examples .

~0075000101
	Forms|Examples|Text entries

This command inserts a user-customizable HTML Form example.  

To see more about the Form examples see the following help topic:
	HTML|Forms|Examples .

~0075000102
	Forms|Examples|Text and checkboxes

This command inserts a user-customizable HTML Form example.  

To see more about the Form examples see the following help topic:
	HTML|Forms|Examples .

~0075000103
	Forms|Examples|Defaults changing

This command inserts a user-customizable HTML Form example.  

To see more about the Form examples see the following help topic:
	HTML|Forms|Examples .

~0075000104
	Forms|Examples|Using radio buttons

This command inserts a user-customizable HTML Form example.  

To see more about the Form examples see the following help topic:
	HTML|Forms|Examples .

~0075000105
	Forms|Examples|Questionnaire

This command inserts a user-customizable HTML Form example.  

To see more about the Form examples see the following help topic:
	HTML|Forms|Examples .

~0075000106
	Forms|Examples|Comments

This command inserts a user-customizable HTML Form example.  

To see more about the Form examples see the following help topic:
	HTML|Forms|Examples .

~0075000107
	Forms|Examples|Registration

This command inserts a user-customizable HTML Form example.  

To see more about the Form examples see the following help topic:
	HTML|Forms|Examples .

~0075000108
	Forms|Examples|Form 9

This command inserts a user-customizable HTML Form example.  

To see more about the Form examples see the following help topic:
	HTML|Forms|Examples .

~0075000109
	Forms|Examples|Form A

This command inserts a user-customizable HTML Form example.  

To see more about the Form examples see the following help topic:
	HTML|Forms|Examples .

~0075000110
	Forms|Examples|Form B

Sorry, this menu and its' help information are not available in the free release!

~0075000111
	Forms|Examples|Form C

Sorry, this menu and its' help information are not available in the free release!

~0075000112
	Forms|Examples|Form D

Sorry, this menu and its' help information are not available in the free release!

~0075000113
	Forms|Examples|Form E

Sorry, this menu and its' help information are not available in the free release!

~0075000114
	Forms|Examples|Form F

Sorry, this menu and its' help information are not available in the free release!

~0075000115
	Forms|Examples|Form G

Sorry, this menu and its' help information are not available in the free release!

~0075000116
	Forms|Examples|Form H

Sorry, this menu and its' help information are not available in the free release!

~0075000117
	Forms|Examples|Form I

Sorry, this menu and its' help information are not available in the free release!

~0075000118
	Forms|Examples|Form J

Sorry, this menu and its' help information are not available in the free release!

~0075000119
	Forms|Examples|Form K

Sorry, this menu and its' help information are not available in the free release!

~0000002007
	Edit|Edit Tag...	(Enter)

The Edit|Edit Tag command opens up the  Attribute editor   dialog box, where you can edit attributes for the current HTML tag.
Note that you can only edit the opening tags.  If the tag does not have any editable attributes the request is ignored.


If the tag is unknown to the asWedit (for example because of some proprietary extensions) the  Unknown tag editor   dialog box will be shown instead.

To delete a tag use:
	 Delete Tag 

To change a container tag, for example H1 to H2, use:
	 Replace 

~0000002062
	Select file for URL dialog box

This dialog comes comes up when you choose the Browse button for selecting URL for the HTML attribute.
Use this dialog to choose the name of an existing file.  The actual attribute value depends on the state of the 'URL type to use:' option list.  The choices are as follow:

  Relative 	relative file name based on your project base
  http://...	prefix of your HTTP server is added
  ftp://...	prefix of your FTP server is added
  file:/...	file name on your local computer

The project base directory and the addresses of your servers should be already defined using the  Project options  dialog (to save your preferences use the Options|Save preferences command).


To choose a file for URL:
1.  Choose the addressing scheme (relative is recommended)
2.  Type or select the name of the file you want to use.  If the file is not listed in the current directory, either type the directory name in front of the document name, or select the directory in the Directories box.
3.  Choose OK.

For a detail description how to select a file see:
	 Selecting a file 

If you need to insert other types of URL's you have to type them according to the allowed specification.
For more information about URL's see:
	 Uniform Resource Locators 

~0000002063
	Select a Link dialog box

This dialog comes comes up when you choose the Select... button for selecting an hyperlink target.
Use this dialog to hyperlink to one of the existing anchors or to an element belonging to a chosen type (like H2 header).

To choose a destination link:
1.  Choose the destination object type (for example H2 headers)
2.  Select the object you want to link to from the list shown
3.  Choose OK (you can also double click on the list item).

The dialog contains a set of toggles.  Selecting any of them will display appropriate element entries.  For example, select H1 to display all target names for H1 headers, together with the content of H1 (but without any HTML formatting).  If the H1 element does not contain an embeded anchor (i.e. <A NAME=...> element) then the link destination will be shown as "--h1--".
Once such entry is selected a unique name will be generated and appropriate entry inside the H1 element inserted.  This allows you to make a hyperlink to this H1 header without the hassle of manual anchor entering.

Apart from different headers you can select Targets, any HREF's and other elements to be shown on the generated list.

Note that you can modify the automatically generated target name and use your own one (they must be unique though).

You can also enter any URL for the link manually in the "Link To:" box. 
For more information about URL's see:
	 Uniform Resource Locators 


~0000206300
	Uniform Resource Locators (URL)

Uniform Resource Locators (URL) or Uniform Resource Identifiers (URI) let you specify how to reach a resource on Internet.  They consist of four basic parts (some of them are optional):

	AAAA://BBB.BBB.BBB/CCC/CCC/CCC?DDD

In the most popular cases it comes to:

	METHOD://SEVER[:port]/FILE[#anchor]


A detailed description of all parts follow.


AAAA: 	The access method.
__________________________

This specifies the mechanism to be used by the browser to communicate with the resource.  Mechanism codes must be registered to be widely recognized.  An X500 mechanism, as well as WHOIS, and Network Database mechanisms are under study.  Currently recognized mechanisms include the following (the widely used first):

http: 	HyperText Transfer Protocol
This is the most commonly used access method.  It requires a program running on the destination computer that understands and responds to this protocol.  The file retrieved might be an HTML file, a graphic file, a sound file, an animation sequence file, a file to be executed by the server (e.g. cgi-bin files), or other file.  Whether the file retrieved can be handled depends on the browser.  If no path or file is given, it will request the server's default file, which is usually "index.html".  If no file is requested and the default is not found, a list of file in that directory will be shown.

file: 	Local File Access
This method causes the browser to load a file from the locally accessible file system.  This is commonly used to preview Web pages being developed on a computer that has a browser, but does not have a server or the files are not in the server area.

ftp: 	File Transport Protocol
This method uses normal Internet FTP to retrieve a file.  Most browsers will ask for a location/name on the local file system to store the file.  Some browsers will simply display a file that is text.

mailto: 	E-Mail Form
The argument following the access code is the destination E-mail address.  If the browser understands this access code, the browser will automatically generate an input FORM for entering the E-mail message.  It may also accept additional arguments for default "Subject:" etc. 

https: 	HyperText Transfer Protocol
This is a variation on the standard access method designed to provide some level of security of transmission.

news: 	USENET News
The argument following the access code is the group or article name. To access net news use the NNTPSERVER environment variable.

telnet:	TELNET
The arguments following the access code are the login arguments to the telnet session as user[:password]@host.

gopher: 	Gopher protocol

afs: 	AFS File Access

cid: 	Content identifiers for MIME body part

finger: 	Used to access a finger server.

mid: 	Message identifiers for electronic mail

nntp: 	Local Network News Transport Protocol

prospero:	Prospero Link

wais: 	Wide Area Information Servers

x-exec:	Executable Program


//BBB.BBB.BBB	The Internet node
_________________________________

This specifies the node on the Internet where the file is located.  It may be any recognizable machine name or an IP address.  If not included, it defaults to the computer on which the browser is running, which is appropriate for access method "file:".  The node may optionally be followed by a colon and the port number.  Most browsers default to port 80, which is also what most servers use to reply to the browser.  For access method ftp: the node name may take the form
	//user[:password]@host . 
Without a user name, the user anonymous is used.


/CCC/CCC/CCC 	The file path
_____________________________

This is the full path name of the file to be retrieved, including the directories, subdirectories, and filename.  A server can specify the "root" of the directory system recognized by an access type as some subordinate directory.  This restricts access to files subordinate to that directory.


?DDD 	Arguments
_________________

Depending upon the access method, and the file accessed, characters can follow the file name, separated by some pre-defined special character (e.g. "#", "?", "&", etc.).  This information can then be used by the access method as additional arguments for the access.  In the case of access method http: where the file is an executable cgi-bin program registered with the server, the arguments are passed to the program.  For an HTML document, "#" identifies the fragment name internal to an HTML document and identified by the A element with the NAME attribute where presentation will begin.



More information can be found at many places on the Web, for example a "BNF for specific URL schemes" is available at:
    http://www.w3.org/hypertext/WWW/Addressing/URL/5_BNF.html


~0000002064
	Choose a Color dialog box

This dialog comes comes up when you choose the Colors... button for selecting a color specification.
Use this dialog to choose a color from the user-definable list.

To choose a color:
1.  Select the color from the list available
2.  Choose OK (you can also double click on the list item).


Color values
____________

Most browsers that support color definition require to specify the color in hexadecimal RGB (red - green - blue) format, for example '#FFFF00'.
First two hexadecimal 'digits' after the hash character '#' specify amount of red (0 to 255), the second two the amount of green, and the last two the amount of blue (hexadecimal digits are: 0,1,..,9,A,B,...,F).  The example color is in fact yellow.

Together with the color specification we allow to add (on the color list) its name or description.  Only the hexadecimal part will be actually used as the attribute value.
You can define your own list of colors via the program's resources.  The resource to change is called: 'pickColorList'.  For example, putting the following line in your .Xdefaults file will define a new set of colors for the program:

AsWedit*pickColorList: #FFFFFF   White,#000000   Black, #FF0000    Red,#00FF00   Green,#0000FF   Blue,#DB9370   My Tan

Note that the definition must be supplied as a single line.
The color values and their names can usually be find in the following system text file:
  /usr/lib/X11/rgb.txt

~0000200700
	Attribute editor dialog box

Use this dialog box to edit all possible attributes of the current HTML element.

Editing
_______

Edit the attributes as required, then select the OK button.
If there are more attributes than shown select the additional More ... button (the More ... button will then be replaced by a Less ... button which has an opposite functionality).
You might cancel all your changes by selecting the Cancel button.

If you require any HTML help about the attribute **being** edited just press the Help key (F1).  Alternatively, use the right mouse button to pop-up a special help menu for the dialog.


Required and Optional attributes
________________________________

All the required HTML attributes (i.e. the ones you have to specify) are always shown at the top of the dialog.  The text boxes for the required attributes are shown with a different background to give a visual cue about their importance.  Note that the attribute editor would not allow you to not specify them.

Text and option attributes
__________________________

Generally, an attribute is either specified as a text (without enclosing quotes) or is selected from a pre-defined list of allowed options.
Note that if the list of options have a default value it is shown as the first element on the list and is embraced in brackets.
Text attributes are further divided into general text, numbers, ID's and ID references (and some other classes).  Except for the general text some restrictions what characters can be entered are enforced.
For the number attributes only 5 digit long numbers are allowed.
The ID's and their references are SGML name tokens and therefore for each case only a sequence of letters, digits, periods or hyphens is allowed (in the future the user will also be restricted to use as a reference only an already defined ID).


~0000200701
	Unknown tag editor dialog box

Use this dialog box to edit name and attributes of an unknown/unsupported HTML element.  It is added to support proprietary HTML extensions or new elements.  Specify the full tag definition but without the enclosing <> characters.  Be careful to type all information right and be sure that the element can be entered in the current HTML context.

Notes:
This dialog is used also to edit the SGML pseudo tag <!DOCTYPE ...>.
First time you insert a specific unknown tag the HTML mode would be automatically turned off (with a warning).  Turn it on (by selecting the Options|HTML mode command, or press Ctrl+W) and then instruct the program to "Learn" the unknown tag found.  From now on in all windows this tag will be a valid tag (and it stays valid for the rest of the program run).
If you edit an already existing tag modify only its attributes, do NOT change its name (if you do, you HAVE to parse the document afterwards, i.e. press Ctrl+W, Ctrl+W).

To define permanently some 'unknown' tags modify the 'learnTagNames' resource in your private AsWedit or .Xdefaults file.  For example you could use the following declaration to allow <CENTER> and <FONT> tags:
  *learnTagNames: center, font
(NOTE that you have to specify the tags in lower case letters!)

~0000002008
	Edit|Delete Tag

The Edit|Delete Tag command removes the currently underlined HTML tag from your document.  If the tag being deleted is opening tag that has a closing mark, than the closing mark will be deleted as well.

To delete an HTML tag:
1.  Position the cursor inside a tag (it should be underlined now).
2.  Choose Edit|Delete Tag, or press Alt+Del (on Sun's keyboard press Meta+Del).


Note that if you delete a tag without which your document does not comply with the HTML standard you get an error message and the HTML mode will be switched off (you are the master, so we allow you to do what you want; you can always use undo and switch the HTML mode again).


Deleting normal text and HTML tags

To delete some text and several HTML tags  select the text  and press the Del key (note the text must be self contained in the HTML sense; if it is not the text will NOT be deleted).


To edit tag attributes use:
	 Edit Tag 

To change a container tag, for example H1 to H2, use:
	 Replace 

~0000002009
	Edit|Replace...	(Alt+Enter)

The Edit|Replace command opens up the  Replace <%s> tag with...   dialog box, where you can select the tag you want to replace the current tag with (actually both opening and closing tags will be changed).
Note that you can only replace container elements (both tags compulsory). 

To replace a container element with another one (for example H1 with H2):
1.  Position the cursor inside an opening or closing tag of an element (it should be underlined now).
2.  Choose Edit|Replace, or press Alt+Enter.


To edit tag attributes use:
	 Edit Tag 

To delete a tag use:
	 Delete Tag 

~0000200900
        Replace <%s> tag with... dialog box

Use this dialog box to change the current container element to another one. For example change H1 to H2, and so on.
To change the element type just select the element (tag) you require and activate OK button (alternatively, double click your selection).

NOTES
Ccurrently no changes are done for the attributes. This allow experimentation with different elements but in some cases you might find that the attributes are not valid any more (for example some attributes when changing from UL to OL list).  If you want to be sure about the attributes then after changing the element type, activate the attribute editor on the opening tag (i.e. use Edit|Edit Tag command).

~0000004008
	View|Preview	(F5)

The View|Preview command causes the current HTML document to be previewed using the selected browser(s).  If possible the preview uses the previous instance of the browser (depends on the browser client).

~0000004007
	View|Browser

The View|Browser sub-menu is used to select which browser(s) is/are used in previewing the edited HTML document.  The following browsers are supported:

     Netscape 

     Mosaic 

     Arena 

     Lynx 


Note: it is assumed that all programs are already available on the system being used.

~0000400700
	Previewing HTML using Netscape Navigator version 1.1 (or higher)


AsWedit communicates with Netscape Navigator from Netscape Communications Corporation using X Window System properties.  This type of remote control of Netscape Navigator is available since Netscape version 1.1.

Initial setup:

  1. Start Netscape Navigator (version 1.1 or higher).
  2. In the asWedit select Netscape as one of the browsers to use (View|Browsers|Netscape option).  This is only necessary if not done before.


To preview the current document select the:
  View| Preview  command.


Notes:
(1) If there is more than one Netscape window, the first found will be used to display the document. It will be used for all subsequent redisplays (new for version 3.0). 

(2) If you want to have 2 or more Netscape windows to redisplay different asWedit editing sessions you can achieve this by iconinzing the already used Netscape window and having another one shown. Then in the other asWedit window, ask for preview (from now on the two asWedit edit windows will use their separate Netscape windows). 

(3) In theory you can run Netscape on a different computer than you run asWedit.  What is necessary is that they use the same X server (or simply the same display) and they share the 'tmp' area (i.e. area where asWedit writes the temporary HTML files).  

(4) In 3.0 we have internally implemented communication with Netscape Navigator resulting in 10 times faster redisplays (compared with version 2.5) and allowing us the permanent connection with a Netscape window. You can restore the 2.5 specification that uses the "netscapeCmd" resource by defining the "*useOldNetscapeCmd" resource to True. The OLD resource that defines how Netscape is called in such case is given below, so it might be changed if necessary (NOTE that this approach is 10 times slower on redisplays):
	*netscapeCmd:	netscape -remote 'openFile(%s)' &

In the above you could select a window to control with the "-id" switch (the argument is an X window id).

    If you need more details about Netscape's remote features read the following document on the Internet:
	<URL:http://home.netscape.com/newsref/std/x-remote.html>

_________
See also:
 View| Browser 


Acknowledgment
--------------
The implementation of communication with Netscape Navigator is broadly based on a remote control code from Netscape. See the Copyright of the original code below:

   Copyright © 1996 Netscape Communications Corporation, all rights reserved.
   Created: Jamie Zawinski <jwz@netscape.com>, 24-Dec-94.
  
   Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its
   documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
   the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
   copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
   documentation.  No representations are made about the suitability of this
   software for any purpose.  It is provided "as is" without express or
   implied warranty.


~0000400701
	Previewing HTML using Mosaic (version 2.5 or higher)

AsWedit communicates with NCSA Mosaic using NCSA Mosaic Client Common Interface (CCI).  Mosaic supports CCI since version 2.5.

Initial setup:

  1. Start Mosaic and select the File|CCI command.  Set the CCI port to "2500", select the radio button "Accept requests" and select the "OK" button.
  2. In the asWedit select Mosaic as one of the browsers to use (View|Browsers|Mosaic option).  This is only necessary if not done before.

To preview the current document select the:
  View| Preview  command.


Notes:
(1) Both programs, i.e. asWedit and Mosaic, must run on the same computer (host).

(2) In the current Mosaic version there is no way to instruct Mosaic to listen for data on a pre-defined port (so you have to perform the step 1 manually).

(3) As default asWedit sends the data to the Mosaic on CCI port: 2500.  You might change it if necessary, for example you might start asWedit with:

	asWedit -xrm "*mosaicCciPort: 3123"

Alternatively define your preferred port in your private AsWedit resource file (or .Xdefaults file).  Insert something similar to the following:
  *mosaicCciPort:	3123

where 3123 is the CCI port number that you should specify in the Mosaic CCI dialog box.  As a port number you might select any number between 1024 and 65535.
Note that you might have to use the above declaration if somebody else has already 'taken out' the default '2500' CCI port (for example your colleague is running asWedit and previewing in Mosaic on the same computer).

_________
See also:
 View| Browser 

~0000400702
	Previewing HTML using Arena

Currently the Arena browser does not support any interprocess communication.  Therefore each Preview action starts a new Arena process.

To preview the current document select the:
  View| Preview  command.


Notes:
The resource that defines how Arena is called is given below, so it might be changed if necessary:
  *arenaCmd:	 arena %s &

(note the trailing '&' character).

_________
See also:
 View| Browser 

~0000400703
	Previewing HTML using Lynx

Currently the Lynx browser does not support any interprocess communication.  Therefore each Preview action starts a new Lynx process.

To preview the current document select the:
  View| Preview  command.


Notes:
The resource that defines how Lynx is called is given below, so it might be changed if necessary:
  *lynxCmd:	 xterm -e lynx %s &

(note the trailing '&' character).

_________
See also:
 View| Browser 

~0000004005
	View|Color Tags	(Shift+F5)

The View|Color Tags command switches on (or off) coloring of HTML tags.

All the HTML tags are displayed using colors defined via program's resources.


Customizing the colors
______________________

There are 20 different tag groups and each of them can have its own foreground and background colors.
The color resources have following names: background1, foreground1, background2, foreground2, ... , backgroundK, foregroundK.

As default all the foreground colors are the same and are defined using the following class resource:
  *ForegroundTags: grey20
(which you can change of course).

The background colors are all different (see the AsWedit resource file).

The individual colors are mapped onto individual tag names via color tag groups, called: color1Tags, color2Tags, ... , colorKTags.  For example all the tags belonging to the group 7:
  *color7Tags:    html,banner,doctype
are displayed using foreground7 and background7 colors.

You are free to move tags between different color groups (or add them) and you can customize all the colors to suit your personal preferences.
The preferred way of doing this is to put the new definitions in your personal AsWedit resource file (or alternatively in your .Xdefaults file, but in such case you should prepend all the resources with the program's class name: AsWedit ).

~0000004006
	View|Hide Tags

The View|Hide Tags command switches on (or off) displaying of HTML tags.

The Hide Tags mode is NOT designed to be used permanently as it might be confusing.  For example, you might position the cursor in the middle of hidden text which you cannot change.
However, this mode might be quite useful for a quick view of the document without all the HTML marking (but including the comments).

Note:
If you lose the cursor because of the hidden text you might restore its visibility by selecting any non-hidden text.


~0000006000
	HTML mode

This is the main entry point into the HTML mode (or out of it).
When in a text mode (no Layout, Markup and HTML menus) select this command to parse the current HTML document and switch the HTML mode on.  If there are no HTML mark-up errors the HTML mode is silently switched on (three extra entries in the menu bar become visible).
If there are HTML mark-up errors (legacy documents), the program shows every error with its description.  If possible it suggests to correct the error.  Note however that some errors, especially related to invalid nesting, has to be corrected manually (and then the text parsed again).

The following error dialogs might be shown for different errors found:
	 HTML error 
	 Missing character error 
	 Unsupported tag found 


Notes:
During parsing the element attributes are checked for syntax errors only.
If you open a new file that has one of the following extensions: '.html', '.html3', '.htm' or '.htm3' then asWedit automatically tries to switch the HTML mode on (i.e. the document is parsed and so on).

If the HTML mode option is not available at all it means that you have started the program somehow in the text-only mode (you might force the program to use the HTML extensions starting it as:	asWedit -usehtml  ).

~0000600000
	HTML error

There might be many HTML mark-up errors that could cause this kind of error dialog.  You can either accept the suggestion to delete the tag to allow the program to continue or cancel the parsing.  In the second case correct the mark-up error by hand and parse the document again by selecting the Options|HTML mode command. 

Alternatively, if a button "Do All" is available, you can allow the program do continue in automatic correction mode. In such a mode the program assumes that you accept the default, suggested by the program, action. This relieves you from selecting the default action many times. Note however, that the program cannot correct some HTML markup errors and a hand correction might be needed.
If the correction takes a little while (big files) you can interrupt the automatic correction by selecting the "Stop" button on the progress dialog.


~0000600001
	Missing character error

When you get this message the program suggests you to add the missing character.  You can either accept the suggestion and allow the program to continue or cancel the parsing.  In the second case correct the mark-up error by hand and parse the document again by selecting the Options|HTML mode command.

Alternatively, if a button "Do All" is available, you can allow the program do continue in automatic correction mode. In such a mode the program assumes that you accept the default, suggested by the program, action. This relieves you from selecting the default action many times. Note however, that the program cannot correct some HTML markup errors and a hand correction might be needed.
If the correction takes a little while (big files) you can interrupt the automatic correction by selecting the "Stop" button on the progress dialog.

~0000600002
	Unsupported tag found

An unknown to asWedit element has just been found.

You can decide to:
  delete the element
  -or-
  tell the program to accept the element (Learn it)
  -or-
  cancel the parsing (use it when the tag name is misspelled, then correct the name and parse the document again by selecting the Options|HTML mode command).


Notes:
If you instruct the program to "Learn" an unsupported tag then it becomes a valid tag in all windows (and it stays valid for the rest of the program run, i.e. you cannot instruct the program to forget the tag learned).
Here 'unknown element' means an element that is not defined in the HTML DTD being used.  For example a proprietary HTML extension.

If you really want to use verbatim the text found, for example a following C language statement:
   #include <stdio.h>
you have to replace all occurences of the '<' character with its '&lt;' entity, and the '>' character with its '&gt;' entity (in this case you might like to encompass the C program using the <CODE> element).
The old <XMP> element used in the early versions of HTML for the cases as above is not supported by asWedit as it is deprecated in HTML 2 and is proposed to be totally obsolete in future (actually all the three old elements XMP, LISTING and PLAINTEXT are incompatible with SGML and are either deprecated or obsoleted).

To define permanently some 'unknown'tags modify the 'learnTagNames' resource in your private AsWedit or .Xdefaults file.  For example you could use the following declaration to allow <CENTER> and <FONT> tags:
  *learnTagNames: center, font
(NOTE that you have to specify the tags in lower case letters!)

~0000600003
	Missing tag error

Some elements require closing tags.  You should insert the closing tag to make the document valid.

Alternatively you could Cancel the parsing process and delete manually the offending (or unnecessary) opening tag.

Alternatively, if a button "Do All" is available, you can allow the program to continue in automatic correction mode. In such a mode the program assumes that you accept the default, suggested by the program, action. This relieves you from selecting the default action many times. Note however, that the program cannot correct some HTML markup errors and a hand correction might be needed.
If the correction takes a little while (big files) you can interrupt the automatic correction by selecting the "Stop" button on the progress dialog.

~0000600004
	Replace reference dialog

In HTML 3.0 short references have been introduced for some commonly used Maths elements.  For example  { and } are used as shorthand for <BOX> and </BOX> respectively.
AsWedit (and most browsers) does NOT support shortref tags.  To allow context sensitive assistive tagging for maths elements asWedit will automatically convert the shortrefs found into their full names.

You can decide to:
  replace the current short reference
  -or-
  replace all the short references
  -or-
  cancel the parsing (the HTML mode will not be available though)

~0000006001
	Icons in toolbars

This command is used to switch between showing the toolbar buttons as icons or as text buttons.

~0000006002
	Options|Customize toolbar

The Options|Customize toolbar sub-menu is used to select which toolbar you want to customize.
You can select any of the supported toolbars:

     Main 

     HTML 

     User 

     Extra 

     Super 

     Hyper 

Note some of the toolbars are only available in the commercial version of the program (version 2.0 or higher).

~0000006052
	Options|Customize toolbar|Toolbar xyz

This command opens up the  Customize toolbar   dialog box, that you use together with the pull-down menus to customize which commands are available directly from the chosen toolbar.

~0000605200
	Customize toolbar dialog box

Use this special mode and dialog to customize the program's toolbar.

You can add to the toolbar any command from the pull-down menus.  To logically group toolbar entries add a spacer (separator).
Add to the toolbar commands that you use most often.

To customize a toolbar select first Options|Customize toolbar.  Then:


  To		Do
 _________________________________________________

 add a command	Choose the command from the pull-down menus
 add a spacer	Choose the dialog's Spacer button
 delete entry	Click the entry on the toolbar
 cancel all	Choose the dialog's Cancel button
 end custom.	Choose the dialog's OK button


Notes:
You *have to* end the toolbar customization before you can continue editing.
To save the current toolbar content in your personal preferences file use the Options|Save preferences command.

_________
See also:
  Modifying icons' colors 

~0060520000
	Modifying icons' colors (advanced topic)

The colors of icons in the toolbar are not defined as general resources in the AsWedit application file.  We recognize however, that the people color preferences are quite different and there is a special mechanism built into the program that allows overriding of the toolbar colors.

The icons are divided into two color groups:
	- general
	- HTML specific.

Each icon uses maximum of eight colors, seven of them can be re-defined, while the transparent background is inherited from the toolbar.

The icons in the first group use colors that might be overridden by defining following resources:
	AS_white
	AS_black
	AS_gold
	AS_blue
	AS_red
	AS_green
	AS_shadow

The HTML-related icons use colors that might be overridden by defining following resources:
	ASW_white
	ASW_black
	ASW_gold
	ASW_blue
	ASW_red
	ASW_green
	ASW_shadow

Example:
  To replace all the "blue" entries in the HTML icons with a "nicer" color (you are the judge) start asWedit as:
	asWedit -xrm "*ASW_blue: #3300aa"


Notes:
 You can use color names in the definitions as well (be sure that they are properly spelled).
 The definitions might be included in one of AsWedit resource files (system-wide or private) or in your .Xdefaults file (you include there what is between the quotes in the above example).
 Selecting a nice (for you) set of colors might take quite a while (if you are especially proud of them, send them to the author :-) ).

~0000006007
	Save preferences

Use the Save preferences command to save your personal preferences that can be changed during run-time (for example toolbar contents etc.).
The preferences are stored in a file called ".asWedit-prefs" in your $HOME directory.

~0000700200
	Layout|List|Convert text to...

This command displays   Convert text to HTML list   dialog box, where you enter options for converting the selected text into an HTML list.

~0070020000
	Convert text to HTML list dialog box

Use the Convert text to HTML list dialog box to create an HTML list out of the selected text.

(1) In the 'List to create:' box decide what kind of HTML list you want to create.  You can choose:
	Unordered
	Ordered
	Glossary

(2) In the 'Separate text at:' box select the type of separator character that divides your data.  This character will be used to divide the data into separate list entries.  The choices are:
	Line feeds
	Paragraphs
	Tabs

(3) Then select the Convert button.

Glossary list note
____________________

As the definition list contains two kind of elements two separators are needed.  The last entry from the 'Separate text at:' box is always used as the secondary separator.  In other words such characters will be replaced with the <DD> tag.  As a consequence, for the definition list you can only use one of the other separators as the primary one.

User-defined separator
______________________

The last separator entry can be re-defined to be any character.  To do that you should modify the following resource:
  '*listUserSeparator' .  
For example to use a vertical bar as a separator you could add the following resources to your .Xdefaults file (note that we also define the user-visible label):

AsWedit*listUserSeparator:		|
AsWedit*userListSep.labelString:	Vertical bar

Note that you can also put the customization options in your private AsWedit resource file (in such case you might skip the leading program's class name, i.e. the AsWedit prefix).

For the names of other resources you might like to customize see the AsWedit resource file.

~0000750201
	HTML|Tables|Convert text to...

This command displays   Convert text to HTML table   dialog box, where you enter options for converting the selected text into an HTML table.

~0075020100
	Convert text to HTML table dialog box

Use the Convert text to HTML table dialog box to create an HTML table out of the selected text.

(1) In the 'Create:' box decide which of the following HTML table elements you want to create:
	Caption (1st line)
	Column headers
	Row headers

(2) In the 'Separate text at:' box select the type of separator character that divides your data.  This character will be used to divide the data into separate cells.  The choices are:
	Tabs
	Commas
	Semicolons

(3) Then select the Convert button.

Customization
_____________

The last separator above can be re-defined to be any character.  To do that you should modify the following resource:
  '*tableUserSeparator' .  For example to use a vertical bar as a separator you could add the following resources to your .Xdefaults file (note that we also define the user-visible label):

AsWedit*tableUserSeparator:	|
AsWedit*userSep.labelString:	Vertical bar


You can also re-define initial states for all toggles in the dialog.  For example to set on the 'Column headers' toggle you could add the following resource to your .Xdefaults file:

AsWedit*colHeaders.set:	True

For the names of other resources see the AsWedit resource file.  Note that you can also put the customization options in your private AsWedit resource file (in such case you might skip the leading program's class name, i.e. the AsWedit prefix).

~0000008005
	HTML - HyperText Markup Language

The HTML language represents hypertext data, for use as part of the World Wide Web.

This program allows you to create in an easy way HTML documents that conform to our HTML 3.2 extended specifications.  
Two specifications are used for the two modes supported:

	HTML "standard" mode  -  based on the HTML 3.2 (code named Wilbur) draft proposal by W3C; this has been extended by us with the widely used Netscape extensions.

	HTMLX experimental mode  -  based on the above mode, extended with a full table model as proposed in RFC 1942, and corrected by us to support the current practice (like color cells, width on cells etc.); this mode also includes a wider set of basic attributes useful for internationalization (I18N) and other experiments.

We strongly suggest to use the HTML "standard" mode as many of the experimental elements are not widely supported yet.

HTML 2.0 and 3.2 are defined using the general SGML meta-language.  For details select:
	  HTML and SGML  .

If you need introduction to HTML read:
	 Understanding HTML Elements 

	 Structure of HTML Documents 
and
	 Understanding Hyperlinks 


otherwise you might like to read the  Quick start  section.

Note:
The appropriate HTML version is selected on the program startup (the default being HTML "standard"; use '-htmlx' option to run in our experimental mode).
~0000800500
	HTML and SGML

HTML is an application conforming to International Standard ISO 8879 -- Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML).  SGML is a system for defining structured document types, and markup languages to represent instances of those document types.  The SGML declaration for HTML is given in SGML Declaration for HTML.  It is implicit among WWW implementations.

HTML element types, element relationships and attributes are defined in the document type declaration (DTD).  The appropriate HTML DTD provides a definitive specification of the allowed syntax for HTML documents (either 2.0 or 3.2).

Note: HTML refers here to the document type as well as the markup language for representing instances of that document type.

~0000800501
	Understanding HTML Elements

In HTML documents, tags define the start and end of headings, paragraphs, lists, character highlighting and links.  Most HTML elements are identified in a document as a start tag, which gives the element name and attributes, followed by the content, followed by the end tag.  Start tags are delimited by < and >, and end tags are delimited by </ and >.  For example:

  <H1>This is a Heading</H1>
  <P>This is a paragraph.

Some elements appear as just a start tag.  For example, to create a line break, you use <BR>.  Additionally, the end tags of some other elements (e.g. P, LI, DT, DD) can be omitted as the position of the end tag is clearly implied by the context.

The content of an element is a sequence of characters and nested elements.  Some elements, such as anchors, cannot be nested.  Anchors and character highlighting may be put inside other constructs.  The content model for a tag defines the syntax permitted for the content.

Note: The SGML declaration for HTML specifies SHORTTAG YES, which means that there are other valid syntaxes for tags, such as NET tags, <EM/.../; empty start tags, <>; and empty end tags, </>.  Until support for these idioms is widely deployed, their use is strongly discouraged and this program does NOT support them.



Names
The element name immediately follows the tag open delimiter.  An element name consist of a letter followed by up to 72 letters, digits, periods, or hyphens.  Names are not case sensitive.  For example, H1 is equivalent to h1.

Attributes
In a start tag, white space and attributes are allowed between the element name and the closing delimiter.  An attribute typically consists of an attribute name, an equal sign, and a value (although some attributes may be just a value).  White space is allowed around the equal sign.

The value of the attribute may be either:
  A string literal, delimited by single quotes or double quotes
  A name token (a sequence of letters, digits, periods, or hyphens)

In this example, a is the element name, href is the attribute name, and http://host/dir/file.html is the attribute value:

  <A HREF="http://host/dir/file.html">

Some implementations consider any occurrence of the > character to signal the end of a tag (so to be compatible with them this program does the same).  For compatibility with such implementations, when > appears in an attribute value, you may want to represent it with an entity or numeric character reference, such as:

  <IMG SRC="eq1.ps" alt="a &gt; b">
or
  <IMG SRC="eq1.ps" alt="a &#62; b">

To put quotes inside of quotes, you can use single quotes if the outer quotes are double or vice versa, as in:

  <IMG SRC="image.ps" alt="First 'real' example">


Alternatively, you use the character representation &quot; as in:

  <IMG SRC="image.ps" alt="First &quot;real&quot; example">

The length of an attribute value (after replacing entity and numeric character references) is limited to 1024 characters.  This number is defined by the LITLEN parameter in the SGML declaration for HTML 3.2.

Note: Some implementations allow any character except space or > in a name token.  Attributes values must be quoted only if they don't satisfy the syntax for a name token.

Attributes with a declared value of NAME (e.g. ISMAP, COMPACT) may be written using a minimized syntax.  The markup:

  <UL COMPACT="compact">

can be written as:

  <UL COMPACT>

Note: Unless you use the minimized syntax, some implementations won't understand.


Undefined Tag and Attribute Names

It is an accepted networking principle to be conservative in that which one produces, and liberal in that which one accepts.  HTML parsers should be liberal except when verifying code.  HTML generators should generate strictly conforming HTML (we try :-).  It is suggested that where ever practical, parsers should at least flag the presence of markup errors, as this will help to avoid bad markup being produced inadvertently.

The behavior of WWW applications reading HTML documents and discovering tag or attribute names which they do not understand should be to behave as though, in the case of a tag, the whole tag had not been there but its content had, or in the case of an attribute, that the attribute had not been present.


Special Characters

The characters between the tags represent text in the ISO-Latin-1 character set, which is a superset of ASCII.  Because certain characters will be interpreted as markup, they should be represented by markup -- entity or numeric character references, for instance the character "&" must be represented by the entity  &amp; .

Comments

To include comments in an HTML document that will be ignored by the parser, surround them with <!-- and -->.  After the comment delimiter, all text up to the next occurrence of --> is ignored.  Hence comments cannot be nested.  White space is allowed between the closing -- and >, but not between the opening <! and --.

For example:

  <HEAD>
  <TITLE>HTML Guide: Recommended Usage</TITLE>
  <!-- Id: Text.html,v 1.6 1994/04/25 17:33:48 connolly Exp -->
  </HEAD>

Note: Some historical implementations incorrectly consider a > sign to terminate a comment.

~0000800502
	The Structure of HTML Documents

In HTML documents, tags define the start and end of headings, paragraphs, lists, character highlighting and links etc.
Most HTML elements are identified in a document as a start tag, which gives the element name and attributes, followed by the content, followed by the end tag.  Start tags are delimited by < and >, while end tags are delimited by </ and >.  For example:

  <title>This is a Title</title>
  <h1>This is a Heading</h1>
  <P>This is a paragraph.

Every HTML document as a minimum must have a title.

To identify the document as being HTML 2.0, it is recommended that documents start with the prologue:

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN">

As the HTML 3.0 draft has expired in 1995 and because the IETF does not officially own an HTML 3.0 DTD there is no valid recommendation for HTML 3.0 documents at the moment (October 1996).  

The newer specification called HTML 3.2 has been derived from HTML 2, not the expired HTML 3.0 proposal and it was first documented in May 1996.  To identify the document as HTML 3.2 you could use a following identifier:

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2 Draft 19960821//EN">

As we have extended the above DTD with most of the currently used other elements asWedit in its "standard" mode uses the following identifier:

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//AdvaSoft//DTD HTML 3.2 extended 961018//EN">

When absent, a prologue is implied by the MIME content type for HTML 2.0 together with the associated version parameter.

Document Structure

HTML 3.2 documents formally have the following structure:

  <HTML>
    <HEAD> head elements ...
    <BODY> body elements ...
  </HTML>

In most cases, the HTML, HEAD and BODY tags can be safely omitted.

The permitted syntax of HTML 3.0 compliant documents is specified by the document type definition (DTD).
This includes the content model for each element, defining what markup is permitted within each element.  The DTD uses SGML entities in content models to express regular features of HTML 3.0, for example '%body.content' defines what markup is permitted within the BODY element.  A number of other elements also share this content model, e.g. BQ, DIV, FORM, TH and TD.


~0000800503
	Understanding Hyperlinks

In addition to general purpose elements such as paragraphs and lists, HTML documents can express hyperlinks.  A hyperlink is a relationship between two resources, called the source and the destination of the hyperlink.  Each resource has a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI).

An HTML user agent allows navigating a collection of these resources.  In the following interactions, the URI of the source document is called the base URI.  [this part is based on the HTML 2.0 standard]

	 Accessing Resources 

	 Traversing Hyperlinks 

	 Fragment Identifiers 

	 Queries and Indexes 

	 Image Maps 

~0080050300
	Accessing Resources

Each of the following markup constructs is the source of a hyperlink; these hyperlinks are references to resources to be processed in conjunction with the source documents:

   *  IMG elements
   *  INPUT elements with the SRC attribute present
   *  LINK element

To access the destination of a hyperlink, the base URI of the source document is combined with the value of the HREF or SRC attribute of the hyperlink element.  The user agent disregards any fragment identifer, and uses the resulting URI to access the destination resource.  For example, if a document identified as
`http://host/x/y.html' contains:

	<img src="../icons/abc.gif">

then the user agent must use the URI 
`http://host/icons/abc.gif' to access the resource linked from the IMG element.

~0080050301
	Traversing Hyperlinks

An A element with the HREF attribute present is an anchor; that is, the source of a hyperlink that is an option to navigate to another resource.  The LINK element may also be an anchor.

In addition to the base URI, the state of an HTML user agent includes a list of the anchors in the document.  The user can traverse a hyperlink by choosing an anchor.  The user agent then accesses the destination document as above and presents it.

~0080050302
	Fragment Identifiers

If the value of the HREF attribute of an anchor element contains a `#' character, then the characters after the `#' are a fragment identifier, not a part of the destination URI.  As a degenerate case, `HREF="#fragment"' refers to an anchor in the same document: the source and destination URIs are the same.

After accessing the destination resource, the navigation state (the scrollbar, for example) may be modified by a fragment identifer in the hyperlink source markup.  The meaning of fragment identifiers depends on the media type of the destination resource.  For `text/html' resources, it instructs the user agent to locate the A element with a NAME attribute whose value is the same as the fragment identifier.  The matching is case sensitive.

For example, if a user agent was processing the above document and the user indicated the following anchor:

   See: <a href="app1.html#bannanas">appendix 1</a> for more detail on bannanas.

then the user agent URI must access the resource `http://host/x/app1.html'.
Assuming the resource is represented using the `text/html' media type, the user agent must locate the anchor named `bannanas' and begin navigation there.

The base URI for navigating the destination document may be different from the URI used to access it.  For example, it may be replaced by by a BASE tag in the destination document or by an HTTP redirection transaction.

~0080050303
	Queries and Indexes

The ISINDEX element represents a set of hyperlinks.  The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent.  The user agent computes the destination URI by appending `?' and the keywords to the base URI.  The keywords are escaped joined by `+'.  For example, if a document contains:

   <BASE HREF="http://host/index">
   <ISINDEX>

and the user provides the keywords `apple' and `berry', then the user agent must access the resource `http://host/index?apple+berry'.

FORM elements with `METHOD=GET' also represent sets of hyperlinks.  See section Query Forms: `METHOD=GET' for details [in the HTML 2.0 standard].

~0080050304
	Image Maps

The ISMAP attribute in combination with the A and IMG elements, represents a set of hyperlinks.  The user can choose from the set by choosing a pixel of the image.  The user agent computes the destination URI by appending `?' and the coordinates of the pixel to the URI given in the A element.  For example, if a document contains:

   <head><title>ImageMap Example</title>
	<BASE HREF="http://host/index">
   </head>
   <body>
	<p> Choose any of these icons:<br>
	<a href="/cgi-bin/imagemap"><img ismap src="icons.gif"></a>
   </body>

and the user chooses the upper-leftmost pixel, then chosen hyperlink is the one with the URI
`http://host/cgi-bin/image?0,0'.

~0000800504
	Quick start - HTML editing

To quickly start your first HTML document:

  Open a New window (or use the current one if empty)
  Turn on the HTML mode (Options|HTML mode)
  Insert a standard document structure (Layout|Standard)
  Type in the title of your document
  Move to the <Body> part and start typing.

  Note that only elements that are valid in the current context are available.  All of the commands are accessible from pull-down menus, and the most common you can find on the pop-up menu and on the toolbar (which you can customize).

  When you want to preview your document you can do it from inside asWedit using any of the supported browsers.  First select the browser (or more than one) you would like to use in the View|Browser menu.  Then select the View|Preview command whenever you want to preview your document.  Note that to use inter-process capabilities of Netscape 1.1 and Mosaic 2.5 you have to start them first; for Mosaic 2.5 specify CCI port as 2500 - for more details pull-down the appropriate menu and press the F1 (Help) key.

~0000800208
	What's new ?

The version 3.0 released on 22 October 1996 introduces the following:

  1. User interface
  -----------------

  o auto positioning of dialogs under the pointer 
    (less mouse movements)

  o many keyboard shortcuts

  o the two main pop-up menus are now user customizable
    (see editorPopupContents and statLinePopupContents
    in the resource file)

  o nice insensitive icons

  o fly-by hints available also for insensitive icons 

  o reduced startup time (by 40%)

  o hyperlinks in the help system in color and underlined

  o select all command

  o new default set of toolbar icons

  o International Release (versions for 10 languages).
    Localized resource files are available for the following
    languages: English (default), Czech, Danish, Dutch,
    French, German, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish.
    Commands and messages are localized for each language
    but the on-line help is available only in English.
    Some localizations are incomplete though, especially
    in the HTML modes.



  2. HTML support
  ---------------

  o new, very fast parser
    (100 times faster on big documents)

  o display of current HTML context on the status line

  o commands for finding and selecting the parent and child SGML
    elements (Search|Parent, Search|Child)

  o command to replace the current container element with another
    one (e.g. H1 --> H2)

  o new 10 times faster preview mode for Netscape Navigator

  o new default colors for different HTML tags

  o separate target command

  o auto insert of image width and height (GIF, JPEG & PNG)

  o customizable dialog for selecting and customizing of colors
 
  o keyboard shortcuts for many HTML tags

  o automatic hex-encoding of typed special characters in URL's
    (user definable)

  o the graphical options menus for some attributes, like align,
    are now available also in the "free" version

  o auto correction of invalid HTML documents

  o new command line options for setting the "current practice" and 
    experimental HTML modes ("-html" and "-htmlx", respectively). 
    They replace the old "-html2", "-html3" flags.
    Use "asWedit -help" to get a list of all command line options.


  3. HTML standard
  ----------------

  o the "current practice" mode ("standard") is now based on HTML 3.2x

  o full support for all HTML tags and attributes based on the HTML 3.2
    by W3C, but modified and extended by us with the widely used elements
    implemented originally by Netscape (including Frames)

  o support for the full table model as in RFC 1942, but corrected to
    support the current practice (like color cells, width on cells etc.)
    in the "experimental" mode (-htmlx).


_________
See also:
  Version 1 release history 
  Version 2 release history 

~0080020800
	Version 1 release history

The version 1.1.1 released on 19 July 1995 introduced the following:

  o The bell is used more often to signal invalid edit actions.

  o Added error message for deprecated or obsoleted tags.

  o A couple of minor bugs found in 1.1 corrected.

  o Binaries for some other platforms.


The version 1.1 released on 30 May 1995 introduced the following:

  o Additional HTML 2.0 and plain text modes.
      We call it a '3-in-1' release.  In fact you get three slightly
      different 'modes' of the same program for editing HTML 3.0,
      HTML 2.0 or just plain text files.  The default mode is HTML 3,
      to start the others use '-html2' or '-nohtml' command options.

  o The help file has been expanded and HTML 2 topics added.

  o More intelligence has been built into the HTML parser.
      Correcting invalid (legacy) documents is much easier as the
      error catalog has been extended.

  o A new heuristic rule when inserting optionally closing tags:
      when no text is selected insert only the opening tag
      (to switch the rule off use the 'noSelOmitCtag' resource).

  o The 'unknown' elements can be permanently set
      (use the 'learnTagNames' resource).

  o Case of the elements and attributes is under user's control
      (the resources are: 'useLowerTags', 'useLowerAttrNames',
      'useLowerAttrValues').

  o Auto-translating of maths short references (HTML 3.0)

  o Support for more platforms (including Linux).

  o Emacs mode is now available
      (AsWedit_em and AsWedit_em.hlp files are needed).

  o Other minor changes and fixes for the few bugs found in 1.0.


Version 1.0 was released on 19 April 1995 and it was the first context-sensitive (structural) editor for HTML 3.0.

~0080020801
	Version 2 release history

VERSION 2.5
___________

The version 2.5 released on 26 April 1996 introduces the following:

  1. User interface
  -----------------
  o International Release (versions for 9 languages).
    Localized resource files are available for the following
    languages: English (default), Czech, Danish, Dutch,
    French, German, Polish, Portuguese and Swedish.
    Commands and messages are localized for each language
    but the on-line help is available only in English.
    Some localizations are incomplete though, especially
    in the HTML modes.

  o Split window functionality.

  o Context-sensitive help (extended).


  2. HTML support
  ---------------
  o Link dialog that can make a hyperlink and generate the
    destination anchor in one step (available  from the
    attribute dialog for the A element).

  o Text to list coverter.

  o Table of Contents generator (Tools|HTML).

  o HTML tag flexible report tool (Tools|HTML).

  o Ready to use and test Form examples (max. 10).

  o Improved spell in the HTML mode.

  o Project options extended with Your E-mail address.

  o Support for Netscape specific elements (including Frames).

  o Color selection from user definable list.

  o HTML to plain text filter.

  o Additional command line options for setting one background
    and one foreground for all HTML tags (-bgtags, -fgtags; use
    "asWedit -help"  to get a list of command line options).


  3. HTML standard
  ----------------
  o HTML 2 mode is now the default one!

  o Both HTML 2 and HTML 3 modes have been significantly extended.
    Support is available for the latest IETF drafts, some other more
    stable proposals and for the widely used Netscape extensions:

    o new tables (including text to table convert command)

    o client-side image maps

    o form-based file upload

    o Java applets

    o Netscape Frames

    o Netscape-implemented elements, like CENTER, FONT, NOBR, WBR
      amd some attribute extensions for other elements


VERSION 2.0
___________

The version 2.0 released on 11 December 1995 introduced the following:

  1. User interface
  -----------------
  o Three fully customizable toolbars instead of one.

  o Fly-by hints for icons in the toolbars.

  o Context-sensitive click-on help.

  o Pop-up menus for toolbars, status line
    and HTML attribute editors.

  o New indexing scheme for Filters and Commands.


  2. HTML support
  ---------------
  o Customizable colors for different HTML tags.

  o Support for un-limited number of templates.

  o HTML project options and dialogs for selecting
    relative and absolute URL's.

  o Keyboard shortcuts for the most common HTML tags.

  o User definable, mode dependent, key bindings.

  o Filters to convert between Latin 1 characters
    and their entities (extendible).


  3. HTML standard
  ----------------
  o HTML 2 mode is now based on Internet standard RFC1866.

  o Support for the latest IETF drafts and some other more
    stable proposals in the HTML 3 mode:

    o new tables (including text to table convert command)

    o client-side image maps

    o form-based file upload

    o Java applets


Note: some of the above features have been previously available in the commercial version 1.2 only.







~0000000004
	List of supported elements

All elements in AdvaSoft's extended HTML 3.2x DTD:

   A 		- Hyperlink
   ADDRESS 	- Address
   APPLET 		- Java Applet
   AREA 		- Active Area
   B 		- Bold
   BASE 		- Base context
   BASEFONT 	- Base font
   BIG 		- Big
   BLOCKQUOTE 	- Quoted Passage
   BODY 		- Body
   BR 		- Line break
   CAPTION 	- Caption
   CENTER 	- Center
   CITE 		- Citation
   CODE 		- Code
   DD 		- Term definition
   DFN 		- Term definition
   DIR 		- Directory (O)
   DIV 		- Division
   DL 		- Glossary
   DT 		- Term
   EM 		- Emphasis
   EMBED 		- Embed
   FONT 		- Font
   FORM 		- Form
   FRAME 		- Frame
   FRAMESET 	- Frame Set
   H1 		- H1
   H2 		- H2
   H3 		- H3
   H4 		- H4
   H5 		- H5
   H6 		- H6
   HEAD 		- Head
   HR 		- Horizontal rule
   HTML 		- HTML
   I 		- Italic
   IMG 		- Image
   INPUT 		- Input element
   ISINDEX 	- Searchable index
   KBD 		- Keyboard
   LI 		- Item
   LINK 		- Link from this document
   MAP 		- Image Map
   MENU 		- Menu (O)
   META 		- Meta-information
   MULTICOL 	- Multi column
   NOBR 		- No line break (N)
   NOFRAMES 	- No frames
   NOSCRIPT 	- No script
   OL 		- Ordered
   OPTION 	- Option
   P 		- Paragraph
   PARAM 		- Parameter
   PRE 		- Preformatted
   S 		- Strikeout
   SAMP 		- Sample
   SCRIPT 		- Script
   SELECT 		- Selection of option(s)
   SMALL 		- Small
   SPACER 	- Spacer
   SPAN 		- Span
   STRIKE 		- Strike
   STRONG 	- Strong
   STYLE 		- Style
   SUB 		- Subscript
   SUP 		- Superscript
   TABLE 		- Table
   TD 		- Data cell
   TEXTAREA 	- Text area
   TH 		- Header cell
   TITLE 		- Title
   TR 		- Row
   TT 		- Typewriter
   U 		- Underline
   UL 		- Unordered
   VAR 		- Variable
   WBR 		- Allow break (N)

	Pseudo-SGML elements and 'unknown' element:

   <!-- --> 		- Comment
   <!DOCTYPE > 		- Document type (DTD)

   UNKNOWN 		- Not in the DTD used
~0000000400
	Hyperlink element 	<A>

The anchor <A> element is used to define the start and/or destination of a hypertext link.

Anchors can't be nested and always require start and end tags. They are used to define hypertext links and
also to define named locations for use as targets for hypertext links.

Example:

The <A HREF="http://www.w3.org/">World Wide Web Organization</A>
provides information on Web related standards, mailing lists
and freeware tools.

The text between the start and end tag defines the label for the link.
Selecting the link takes the reader to the document specified by the HREF attribute, in this case, the W3O home page.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   HREF 		- Link destination
   NAME 		- Named link end
   REL 		- Link relationship(s)
   REV 		- Reverse relationship(s)
   TITLE 		- Title
   TARGET 		- Target frame name

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	a
~0000000401
	Address element 	<ADDRESS>

The <ADDRESS> element specifies such information as address, signature and authorship for the current document, and typically is placed at the beginning or end of the document body.
Typically, the <ADDRESS> element is rendered in an italic typeface and may be indented.

Example of use:

  <ADDRESS>
  Newsletter editor<BR>
  J.R. Brown<BR>
  8723 Buena Vista, Smallville, CT 01234<BR>
  Tel: +1 (123) 456 7890
  </ADDRESS>


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, div, form, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, p, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000402
	Java Applet element 	<APPLET>

The <APPLET> element adds a Java applet. This element is supported by the Netscape Navigator 2.0 and by the HotJava and is the standard to be supported by other "java enabled" browsers.

Data from the APPLET tag (code, codebase, name, width, height, align, vspace and hspace) is made available to the applet. In addition, any parameters defined in the <PARAM> tags are also made available to the applet. The applet invokes the getParameter method to get a String that contains the value of one of the above parameters. See the Applet class documentation for more information.

Applet resources are loaded relative to the codebase, including images, audio files, etc. However, the applet does have access to the document-URL if resources from that location are desired.

Here is an example of how applet code can reference a resource from the codebase (this should be used when resources are accessed that are referenced directly from within the applet code):

  Image img = getImage(new URL(getBaseURL(), "images/cross.gif"));

And here is an example of how applet code can reference a resource from the document-URL (this should be used when resources are accessed that are specified in an applet parameter, and which are therefore relative to the document's base):

  Image img = getImage(new URL(getDocumentURL(), getParameter("src")));


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CODE 		- Code File  	(Required)
   WIDTH 		- Width  	(Required)
   HEIGHT 		- Height  	(Required)
   ALIGN 		- Align
   ALT 		- Alternative text
   NAME 		- Applet name
   HSPACE 		- Horizontal spacing
   VSPACE 		- Vertical spacing
   CODEBASE 	- Code base
   ARCHIVE 	- Archive

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr, param

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Inclusion elements:	param
~0000000403
	Active Area element 	<AREA>

The AREA element contained inside the MAP element specifies a single clickable area of the image.
The SHAPE attribute gives the shape of this area.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   ALT 		- Alternative text  	(Required)
   COORDS 		- Coordinates
   SHAPE 		- Hotzone shape
   NOHREF 		- Act on clicks
   HREF 		- Link destination
   TARGET 		- Target frame name

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	map

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000404
	Bold element 	<B>

The <B> element specifies that the enclosed text should be displayed in a boldface. If this is not practical, an alternative mapping is allowed.


Note: <B> inside Math element: don't use the "B" element for chemical formulae. These should be handled by subclassing the MATH element with "class=chem", for instance:
  <MATH CLASS=CHEM>

Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000405
	Base context element 	<BASE>

The optional <BASE> element provides a base address for interpreting relative URLs when the document is read out of context.  The value of the HREF attribute must be an absolute URI.
URLs within the document may be in a "partial" form relative to this base address.

For example:

 <base href="http://acme.com/docs/mydoc.html">
    ...
 <img src="images/me.gif">

which resolves to "http://acme.com/docs/images/me.gif" .

Note that the default base address is the URL used to retrieve the document.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   HREF 		- Base address  	(Required)
   TARGET 		- Target frame name

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	head

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000406
	Base font element 	<BASEFONT>

The <BASEFONT> element is used to change the base font size that all relative FONT changes are based on.  Note that this element is not supported by some browsers.

The size is specified using the SIZE attribute.  Its default value is 3, and it has a valid range of 1-7.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   SIZE 		- Size
   COLOR 		- Color
   FACE 		- Face

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000407
	Big element 	<BIG>

The <BIG> element specifies that the enclosed text should be displayed, if practical, using a big font (compared with the current font). Supported by Netsape 2.0 and proposed for HTML 3.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000408
	Quoted Passage element 	<BLOCKQUOTE>

The BLOCKQUOTE element is used for extended quotations. 

Example:

<BLOCKQUOTE>
<P>But now I shall shortly proffer him the strength and the courage of the Geats in combat. He who has the right to it shall go once more to the mead-drinking with confident heart, after the morning light of another day, the sun clothed in ethereal radiance, shines from the south upon the children of men.
</BLOCKQUOTE>

Note: If %html.recommended is active, the HTML 3.2 DTD expects you to enclose plain text in a block element such as <P> .


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000409
	Body element 	<BODY>

The Body Element and Related Elements

Within the BODY element, you can structure text into paragraphs, and lists, as well as highlighting phrases and creating links, amongst other things.


Body Structure

The document body is composed from zero or more of the following elements:
  DIV - used for hierarchical containers 
  Headings (H1, to H6) - a set of headers of varying levels of importance
  Block elements - paragraphs, lists, forms, tables, figures and other elements
  Horizontal rules, and the ADDRESS element
  Text and character level markup including emphasis, images, math hypertext links and miscellaneous elements.

Note that text and character level markup are only permitted at this level for backwards compatibility with legacy documents. The HTML.Recommended flag enforces a more structured approach to authoring HTML documents.

The BODY element has the following attributes, all of which are optional:

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   BACKGROUND 	- "Background's URL"
   BGCOLOR 	- Background color
   TEXT 		- Text color
   LINK 		- Link color
   VLINK 		- Visited link color
   ALINK 		- Activated link color

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Optional
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	html, noframes

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000410
	Line break element 	<BR>

Line break and tab elements can be used when you need a little more control over how the browser renders the text.

The <BR> element is used to force a line break.

For example:

  This is the first line<br>
  and this is the second<br>
  and this the third


Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   CLEAR 		- Clear flow

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000411
	Caption element 	<CAPTION>

The CAPTION element is used to label a table or figure. Use the align attribute to specify the position of the caption relative to the table/figure. For example:

  <CAPTION ALIGN=LEFT>The Niagara Falls</CAPTION>


Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   ALIGN 		- Align

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	table

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000412
	Center element 	<CENTER>

The <CENTER> element is used to center the text.  All lines of text between the opening and closing CENTER tags are centered between the current left and right margins.

Notes
_____
Currently many elements, like paragraph <P> and headings <H1> - <H6>, support align attribute that can be used exactly for what the CENTER element was introduced a while ago by Netscape (and for more, like left and right align).  Netscape supports now (October 1996) both ways of centering the text, but in few situations CENTER works where align attribute does not.  Some browsers however do not support the CENTER element but support the align attributes for many elements!


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000413
	Citation element 	<CITE>

The <CITE> element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example:

    He just couldn't get enough of <cite>The Grapes of Wrath</cite>.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000414
	Code element 	<CODE>

The <CODE> element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The <CODE> element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the <PRE> block structuring element is more appropriate for multiple-line listings.

Example of use:

  The expression <code>x += 1</code>
  is short for <code>x = x + 1</code>.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000415
	Glossary Term definition element 	<DD>

The DD tag element specifies a term definition, and follows one or more DT elements.

Note: The content model for term definitions is quite broad, including paragraphs, lists, preformatted text, forms, tables, figures and admonishments. Headers are not permitted. If %html.recommended is active, the HTML 3.2 DTD expects you to enclose plain text in a block element such as <P>.

Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	dl

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000416
	Term definition element 	<DFN>

The <DFN> element indicates the defining instance of a term.

Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000417
	Directory (O) element 	<DIR>

The MENU and DIR elements are superceded by extensions to the UL element. User agents are advised to continue to support them for the sake of legacy documents. Both MENU and DIR consist of one or more LI elements, similar to UL. MENU lists are typically rendered without bullets in a more compact style than UL. 
DIR lists are used to present lists of items containing up to 20 characters each. Items in a DIR list are arranged in columns. 

Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   COMPACT 	- Compact style

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		li

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	blockquote, center, dir, div, dl, form, hr, isindex, menu, multicol, noscript, ol, p, pre, table, ul
~0000000418
	Division element 	<DIV>

The <DIV> element is used with the CLASS attribute to represent different kinds of containers, e.g. chapter, section, abstract, or appendix. For example:

<DIV CLASS=Abstract>
<P>TheChieftain product range is the white hot hope for the coming year. This report sets out how to position Chieftain against competing products.
</DIV>


Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   ALIGN 		- Align

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000419
	Glossary element 	<DL>

A definition list (glossary) is a list of terms and corresponding definitions.

Definition lists are typically formatted with the term on the left with the definition following on the right or on the next line. The definition text is typically indented with respect to the term.
An alternative format places the term left aligned in a wide margin and the definition on one or more lines to the right of the term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column.


The opening list tag must be <DL>. It is followed by an optional list header (<LH>caption</LH>) and then by term names (<DT>) and definitions (<DD>). For example:

  <DL>
    <LH>List Header</LH>
    <DT>Term 1<dd>This is the definition of the first term.
    <DT>Term 2<dd>This is the definition of the second term.
  </DL>

The definition list element can take the COMPACT attribute, which suggests that a compact rendering be used, and is appropriate if the list elements are small and/or the entire list is large.

Note: Use the 'NOTE' element when you want to have an indented note. The practice of using <DD> elements without corresponding <DT> elements is deprecated.

Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   COMPACT 	- Compact style

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		dd, dt
~0000000420
	Glossary Term element 	<DT>

The DT tag element specifies a term name, and you can have several terms per DD element.
It is used inside the definition list <DL>.

Note: Term names are restricted to character level markup only, including epmhasis, inline images and footnotes. Paragraph tags and other block-like elements such as headers are not permitted.

Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	dl

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000421
	Emphasis element 	<EM>

The <EM> element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example:

  A singular subject <em>always</em> takes a singular verb.

While <EM> and <I> often give the same effect, use <EM> except where it is necessary in the text to refer to the formatting, as in "The italic parts are mandatory". This will help to ensure consistency between documents from various sources if, for example, the reader prefers to use color in place of italics for emphasis.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000422
	Embed element 	<EMBED>

The <EMBED> element is used to insert an "object" in an arbitrary format into the document.  It is supposed to be a generalization of the IMG element.  These objects will be processed by so-called "plug-in" applications.

NOTES
(1) The Netscape specification for EMBED allows inserting application-specific attributes.  As even their names are not defined they cannot be supported in asWedit.  If you really have to use them you must insert them manually with the HTML context mode switched off (use Ctrl+W to switch it off/on). Once you enter them restore the HTML context mode.
(2) NOTE that a work is being carried out in W3C to implement a new general OBJECT element in the future specifications of HTML (it has support from all major browser vendors).


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   SRC 		- "Object's URL"  	(Required)
   ALT 		- Alternative text
   ALIGN 		- Align
   WIDTH 		- Width
   HEIGHT 		- Height

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000423
	Font element 	<FONT>

The <FONT> element is used to change the font's size and color.  Note that this element is not supported by some browsers!

The size is specified using the SIZE attribute.  Valid values range from 1-7.  The default FONT size is 3.  The value given to size can optionally have a '+' or '-' character in front of it to specify that it is relative to the document baseFONT.  The default baseFONT is 3, and can be changed with the BASEFONT element.
The color is specified as hexadecimal color value.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   SIZE 		- Size
   COLOR 		- Color
   FACE 		- Face

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000424
	Form element 	<FORM>

Note you are not allowed to nest FORM elements!

HTML fill-out forms can be used for questionaires, hotel reservations, order forms, data entry and a wide variety of other applications.
The form is specified as part of an HTML document. The user fills in the form and then 'submits' it. The user agent then sends the form's contents as designated by the FORM element. Typically, this is to an HTTP server, but you can also email form contents for asynchronous processing.

Forms are created by placing input fields within paragraphs, preformatted text, lists and tables. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms.

HTML 3.2 supports the following kinds of fields:

   Simple text fields
   Multi-line text fields
   Radio buttons
   Checkboxes
   Single/multiple choice menus
   File widgets for attaching files to forms.
   Submit buttons for sending form contents
   Reset buttons for resetting fields to their initial values
   Hidden fields for book keeping information


It is expected that future revisions to HTML will add support for audio fields, multi-row entry of database tables, and extending multi-line text fields to support a range of other data types, in addition to plain text. Client-side scripts will provide the means to constrain field values and to add new field types.



Example of a form

This fictitious example is a questionnaire.
It uses the INPUT element for simple text fields, radio buttons, checkboxes, and the submit and reset buttons. The TEXTAREA field is used for a multi-line text entry field.
The form fields are laid out with several paragraph elements and an unordered list. Notice the use of the NAME attribute to name each field:

<TITLE>Sample Questionaire</TITLE>
<H1>Sample Questionaire</H1>

<P>Please fill out this questionaire:

<FORM METHOD=post ACTION="http://www.hal.com/sample">
<P>Your name: <input name="name" size="48">
<P><input name="male" type=radio> Male
<P><input name="female" type=radio>Female
  Number in family: <input name="family" type=int>

<P>Cities in which you maintain a residence:

<UL>
<LI><input name="city" type=checkbox value="kent"> Kent
<LI><input name="city" type=checkbox value="miami"> Miami
<LI>Others <textarea name="other" cols=48 rows=4></textarea>
</UL>

<P>Nickname: <INPUT NAME="nickname" size ="42">

<P>Thank you for responding to this questionaire.
<P><INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT> <INPUT TYPE=RESET>
</FORM>


Every form must be enclosed within a FORM element. There can be several forms in a single document, but the FORM element can't be nested. The browser is responsible for handling the input focus, i.e. which field will currently get keyboard input. Many platforms have existing conventions for forms, for example, using Tab and Shift-Tab to move the keyboard focus forwards and backwards between fields, and using the Enter (aka Return) key to submit the form.

This standard defines and requires support for the HTTP access protocol only. Under any protocol, the submitted contents of the form logically consist of a list of name/value pairs where the names are given by the NAME attributes of the various fields in the FORM. Each field will normally be given a distinct name. Several radio buttons can share the same name, as this is how you specify that they belong to the same control group - at any time, only one button in the group can be selected.


Note: The contents list of name/value pairs excludes unselected radio buttons and checkboxes. In general, any field with a null value can be omitted from the contents list.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   ACTION 		- Action's URL
   ENCTYPE 	- Submitted data format
   METHOD 		- HTTP method
   TARGET 		- Target frame name

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	form
~0000000425
	Frame element 	<FRAME>

The <FRAME> element is used to define a single frame in a frame set (FRAMESET).


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   SRC 		- "Frame's URL"
   NAME 		- Name
   MARGINWIDTH 	- Margin width
   MARGINHEIGHT 	- Margin height
   NORESIZE 	- Resizable
   BORDERCOLOR 	- Border Color
   SCROLLING 	- Scrollbars
   FRAMEBORDER 	- Frame border

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	frameset

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000426
	Frame Set element 	<FRAMESET>

The <FRAMESET> element is used to define a frame set and is the main container for a Frame (see the the Introduction to Frames below).

A frame document has no BODY, and no tags that would normally be placed in the BODY can appear before the FRAMESET tag, or the FRAMESET will be ignored.  The FRAMESET tag has a matching end tag, and within the FRAMESET you can only have other nested FRAMESET tags, FRAME tags, or the NOFRAMES tag.

The FRAMESET tag can be nested inside other FRAMESET tags.  In this case the complete subframe is placed in the space that would be used for the corresponding frame if this had been a FRAME tag instead of a nested FRAMESET.

Introduction to Frames
______________________
Frames (implemented in Netscape Navigator 2.0) allow you to divide Web pages into multiple, scrollable regions.
Each region, or frame, has several features:

  1. It can be given an individual URL, so it can load information independent of the other frames on the page;
  2. It can be given a NAME, allowing it to be targeted by other URLs, and;
  3. It can resize dynamically if the user changes the window's size.

These properties offer new possibilities:

  1. Elements that the user should always see, such as control bars, copyright notices, and title graphics can be placed in a static, individual frame.  As the user navigates the site in "live" frames, the static frame's contents remain fixed, even though adjoining frames redraw.
  2. Table of contents are more functional. One frame can contain TOC links that, when clicked, display results in an adjoining frame.
  3. Frames side-by-side design allows queries to be asked and answered on the same page, with one frame holding the query form, and the other presenting the results.

A Frame Document has a basic structure very much like your normal HTML document, except the BODY container is replaced by a FRAMESET container which describes the sub-HTML documents, or Frames, that will make up the page.  For example:

 <HTML>

   <HEAD>
      <TITLE> ... </TITLE>
   </HEAD>

   <FRAMESET>

   </FRAMESET>

 </HTML>

Remember that frames are generated by three things: FRAMESET tag(s), FRAME tags and frame documents.
-----


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   COLS 		- Columns
   ROWS 		- Rows
   BORDER 		- Border
   BORDERCOLOR 	- Border Color
   FRAMEBORDER 	- Frame border

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	frameset, html

Contains:		frame, frameset, noframes
~0000000427
	Heading elements 	<H1>, <H2>, ..., <H6>

	Headings 	(H1, H2, ..., H6)

HTML defines six levels of headings. A heading element implies all the font changes, paragraph breaks before and after, and any white space necessary to render the heading. The heading elements are H1, H2, H3, H4, H5, and H6 with H1 being the highest (or most important) level and H6 the least. For example:

  <H1>This is a top level heading</H1> Here is some text.

  <H2>Second level heading</H2> Here is some more text.

Use the DIV element together with header elements when you want to make the hierarchical structure of a document explicit. This is needed as header elements themselves only contain the text of the header, and do not imply any structural division of documents into sections. Header elements have the same content model as paragraphs, that is text and character level markup, such as character emphasis, inline images, form fields and math.

Headers play a related role to lists in structuring documents, and it is common to number headers or to include a graphic that acts like a bullet in lists.

Word Wrapping

User agents are free to wrap lines at whitespace characters so as to ensure lines fit within the current window size. Use the  &nbsp  entity for the non-breaking space character, when you want to make sure that a line isn't broken! 

Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   ALIGN 		- Align

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, div, form, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000433
	Head element 	<HEAD>

The HEAD element has no attributes and the start and end tag can always be safely omitted as they can be readily inferred by the parser.

Information in the HEAD element corresponds to the top part of a memo or mail message. It describes properties of the document such as the title, the document toolbar, and additional meta-information. There is no intended significance to the order of elements in the document head. Note that the TITLE element is always required. In fact, the minimal HTML 3.2 document consists of the TITLE element alone!

Note however that using HEAD might allow future extensions to be used in the HEAD context and that asWedit works better when the HEAD is present.

Within the HEAD element, only certain elements are allowed.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Optional
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	html

Contains:		base, isindex, title, link, meta, script, style

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Inclusion elements:	link, meta, script, style
~0000000434
	Horizontal rule element 	<HR>

The <HR> element is used for horizontal rules that act as dividers between sections.
The SRC attribute can be used to designate a custom graphic, otherwise subclass HR with the CLASS attribute and specify the appropriate rendering with an associated style sheet.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   WIDTH 		- Width
   SIZE 		- Size
   NOSHADE 	- Shadow
   ALIGN 		- Align

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000435
	HTML element 	<HTML>

HTML 3.2 documents formally have the following structure:

 <HTML>
   <HEAD> --head elements ...--
   <BODY> --body elements ...--
 </HTML>

Note that both the start and end tag for the HTML element can be omitted.

Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   VERSION 	- DTD version

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Optional
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	

Contains:		body, frameset, head
Content Note:	HEAD element if exists must preceed the BODY element.
~0000000436
	Italic element 	<I>

The <I> element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000437
	Image element 	<IMG>

The <IMG> tag is used to incorporate in-line graphics (typically icons or small graphics) into an HTML document.
This element is NOT intended for embedding other HTML text. 

Example:

  <IMG SRC="tajmahal.gif" ALT="The Taj Mahal">

Browsers that cannot display in-line images ignore the IMG element unless it contains the ALT attribute. Note that some browsers can display (or print) linked graphics but not in-line graphics. If the graphic is essential, you may want to create a link to it rather than to put it in-line. If the graphic is essentially decorative, then IMG is appropriate.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   SRC 		- "Custom image's URL"  	(Required)
   ALT 		- Alternative text
   ALIGN 		- Align
   WIDTH 		- Width
   HEIGHT 		- Height
   ISMAP 		- Sensitive Map
   USEMAP 		- Client usemap
   BORDER 		- Border
   HSPACE 		- Horizontal spacing
   VSPACE 		- Vertical spacing
   VRML 		- VRML (N)

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000438
	Input element element 	<INPUT>

The INPUT element is used for a wide variety of different kinds of entry fields within HTML fill-out forms. The TYPE attribute determines the type of field.

Single-line text fields (type=text)

These are used for entering short text strings, like peoples names, numbers and dates. The visible width of the field in characters can be set with the SIZE attribute. When using a variable pitch font, the SIZE attribute sets the width in en units (half the point size). The user should be able to enter more than this, with the contents of the field scrolling horizontally as needed. The MAXLENGTH attribute can be used to specify the maximum number of characters permitted for the string.

If the TYPE attribute is missing, the INPUT element is assumed to be a single-line text field. The NAME attribute is used to identify the field when the form's contents are converted to the name/value list.
The VALUE field can be used to initialize the text string. Character entities can be used include accented characters in this string.

Note: Use the <TEXTAREA> element for multi-line text entry fields.


Password fields (type=password)

This is the same as single-line text fields except that each character typed is echoed by a shadow character, e.g. an asterisk or the space character. The user can see how many characters that have been typed but not what was typed.


Checkbox fields (type=checkbox)

A checkbox field has two states: selected and unselected.Its name/value pair only appear in the submitted data when selected.
Checkboxes are used for boolean attributes. They can also be used for attributes which can take multiple values at the same time. This is represented by a checkbox for each optional value, with the same name for each of the checkboxes. Unselected checkboxes don't appear in the submitted data. Both NAME and VALUE are required for checkboxes. To initialize the checkbox to its selected state, include the CHECKED attribute.
Checkboxes provide an alternative to using the <SELECT> element for multiple-choice menus.


Radio Buttons (type=radio)

Suitable for attributes which can take a single value from a set of alternatives. All radio buttons in the same group should be given the same NAME. Only the selected radio button in the group generates a name/value pair in the submitted data. Both NAME and VALUE are required for radio buttons. To initialize the radio button to its selected state, include the CHECKED attribute.
Radio buttons offer an alternative to using the <SELECT> element for single choice menus.


Range fields (type=range)

These allow the user to pick a numeric value in between a lower and an upper bound. The range is specified with the MIN and MAX attributes, as in:

   <input name=rating type=range min=1 max=10>

If either the lower or upper bound is a real number, then the range is real valued, otherwise it is restricted to integer values only. The VALUE attribute can be used to initialize the range field. It an error for the value to lie outside the specified range. The default value is midway between the lower and upper limits.


Scribble on Image (type=scribble)

These fields allow the user to scribble with a pointing device (such as a mouse or pen) on top of a predefined image. The image is specified as a URI with the SRC attribute. If the user agent can't display images, or can't provide a means for users to scribble on the image, then the field should be treated as a text field. The VALUE attribute can be used to initialize the text field for these users. It is ignored when the user agent provides scribble on image support.


File Attachments (type=file)

This allows users to attach one or more files to be submitted with the form's contents. The ACCEPT attribute can be used to specify a comma separated list of MIME content types. These are used to restrict the kinds of files that can be attached to the form. For instance:

  <input name=pictures type=file accept="image/*">

This example restricts files to match "image/*", i.e. to registered MIME image types. For windows based user agents, it is suggested that file fields display the name of the last file attached, with the ability to open a file dialog box to view the complete list of files attached so far. The accept attribute then acts to specify the filter on the list of candidate files.


Hidden fields (type=hidden)

No field is presented to the user, but the content of the field is sent with the submitted form. This value may be used to transmit state information about client/server interaction, for instance a transaction identifier. These fields are needed because HTTP servers don't preserve state information from one request to the next.


Submit buttons (type=submit)

These are buttons that when pressed submit the form's data. You can use the VALUE attribute to provide a non-editable label to be displayed on the button.  The default label is application-specific. A graphic can be specified for the submit button using the SRC attribute.

The submit button normally makes no contribution to the submitted data. The exception is when the field includes a NAME attribute, in which case, the name and value attributes are included with the submitted data. This can be used to distinguish which submit button the user pressed.


Image fields (type=image)

These act like submit buttons but include the location where the user clicked on the image. The image is specified with the SRC attribute.


Reset buttons (type=reset)

When a reset button is pressed, the form's fields are reset to their specified initial values.  The label to be displayed on the button may be specified just as for the SUBMIT button.
Likewise, the SRC attribute can be used to specify a graphic.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   TYPE 		- Type of accepted data
   CHECKED 	- Initial state
   NAME 		- Name
   VALUE 		- Value
   SIZE 		- Size
   MAXLENGTH 	- Maximum length
   SRC 		- "Custom image's URL"
   ALIGN 		- Align

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000439
	Searchable index element 	<ISINDEX>

The ISINDEX element indicates that the user agent should allow the user to search an index by giving keywords.  As well as reading the document, the reader may use a keyword search.

The document can be queried with a keyword search by adding a question mark to the end of the document address, followed by a list of keywords separated by plus signs.
In other words, the <ISINDEX> element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent.  The user agent computes the head URI by appending '?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to URL requirements and joined by '+'.  For example, if a document contains:

  <BASE HREF="http://host.domain/index">
  <ISINDEX>

and the user provides the keywords 'apple' and 'berry', then the user agent must access the resource 'http://host/index?apple+berry'.

Note: A server normally generates the ISINDEX tag automatically.  If added by hand to an HTML document, the browser assumes that the server can handle a search on the document.  Obviously the server must have this capability for it to work; simply adding <ISINDEX> in the document is not enough to make searches happen if the server does not have a search engine!


Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   PROMPT 		- Prompt message

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, head, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000440
	Keyboard element 	<KBD>

The <KBD> element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example:

  Enter <kbd>FIND IT</kbd> to search the database.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000441
	List Item element 	<LI>

The list item element (LI) is used for items in both ordered and unordered lists.

Note: The content model for list items is quite broad, including paragraphs, lists, preformatted text, forms, tables, figures and admonishments. Headers are not permitted.
If %html.recommended is active, the HTML 3.2 DTD expects you to enclose plain text in a block element such as <P> .

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   VALUE 		- New number
   TYPE 		- Numbering style

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	dir, menu, ol, ul

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000442
	Link from this document element 	<LINK>

The <LINK> element indicates a relationship between the document and some other object. A document may have any number of LINK elements. The LINK element is empty (does not have a closing tag), but takes the same attributes as the anchor element.

LINK elements can be used in principle: 

 (1) for document specific navigation toolbars/menus when used with the LINK element in document head 
 (2) to control how collections of html nodes are rendered into printed documents


The important attributes are:

  REL	This defines the relationship defined by the link.

  REV	This defines a reverse relationship. A link from document A to document B with "REV=relation" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with "REL=relation". "REV=made" is sometimes used to identify the document author, either the author's email address with a "mailto" URI, or a link to the author's home page.

  HREF	This names an object using the URI notation.


Using LINK to define document specific toolbars
_______________________________________________
An important use of the LINK element is to define a toolbar of navigation buttons or an equivalent mechanism such as menu items.

LINK relationship values reserved for toolbars are:

  REL=Home	- The link references a home page or the top of some hierarchy.

  REL=ToC	- The link references a document serving as a table of contents.

  REL=Index	- The link references a document providing an index for the current document.

  REL=Glossary	- The link references a document providing a glossary of terms that pertain to the current document.

  REL=Copyright	- The link references a copyright statement for the current document.

  REL=Up	- When the document forms part of a hierarchy, this link references the immediate parent of the current document.

  REL=Next	- The link references the next document to visit in a guided tour.

  REL=Previous	- The link references the previous document in a guided tour.

  REL=Help	- The link references a document offering help, e.g. describing the wider context and offering further links to relevant documents. This is aimed at reorienting users who have lost their way.

  REL=Bookmark	- Bookmarks are used to provide direct links to key entry points into an extended document. The TITLE attribute may be used to label the bookmark. Several bookmarks may be defined in each document, and provide a means for orienting users in extended documents.


An example of toolbar LINK elements:

  <LINK REL=Previous HREF=doc31.html>
  <LINK REL=Next HREF=doc33.html>
  <LINK REL=Bookmark TITLE="Order Form" HREF=doc56.html>




Using LINK to include a Document Banner
_______________________________________
The LINK element can be used with "REL=Banner" to reference another document to be used as banner for this document. This is typically used for corporate logos, navigation aids, and other information which shouldn't be scrolled with the rest of the document.
For example:

  <LINK REL=Banner HREF=banner.html>

The use of a LINK element in this way, allows a banner to be shared between several documents, with the benefit of being able to separately cache the banner. Rather than using a linked banner, you can also include the banner in the document itself, using the BANNER element.


Link to an associated Style Sheet
_________________________________
The LINK element can be used with "REL=StyleSheet" to reference a style sheet to be used to control the way the current document is rendered.
For example:

  <LINK REL=StyleSheet HREF=housestyle.dsssl>


Other uses of the LINK element
______________________________
Additional relationship names have been proposed, but do not form part of the HTML 3.2 specification. Servers may also allow links to be added by those who do not have the right to alter the body of a document.



NOTE:
See Internet Draft: draft-ietf-html-relrev-00.txt for information on proposed relationship values. 

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   HREF 		- Link destination
   REL 		- Link relationship(s)
   REV 		- Reverse relationship(s)
   TITLE 		- Title
   ID 		- Link end ID

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	head

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000443
	Image Map element 	<MAP>

The different regions of the image (clients-side image maps) are described using a MAP element.  The map describes each region in the image and indicates where it links to. The basic format for the MAP element is as follows:

  <MAP NAME="name">
   <AREA [SHAPE="shape"] COORDS="x,y,..." [HREF="reference"]
	 [NOHREF] [ALT="alt"]>
  </MAP>


An arbitrary number of AREA tags may be specified.  If two areas intersect, the one which appears first in the map definition takes precedence in the overlapping region.  Multiple areas may share the same destination to create composite shapes.  Any portion of an image which is not described by an AREA tag defaults to having no action.


Backwards compatibility
_______________________
The client-side imagemaps extension was specifically designed to provide a variety of fallback options for browsers which do not support it.

The following three examples show markup demonstrating different fallback mechanisms possible:

This image map will work with any graphical browser:

  <A HREF="/cgi-bin/imagemap/pic1">
  <IMG SRC="pic1.jpg" USEMAP="maps.html#map1" ISMAP></A>

  Clicking here will take you to a page with an error message if
  you don't have client-side image map support:
  <A HREF="no_csim.html">
  <IMG SRC="pic2.jpg" USEMAP="maps.html#map2"></A>

   You can only click here if your browser supports client-side
   image maps: <IMG SRC="pic3.jpg" USEMAP="maps.html#map3">


The following example shows the use of a map in the same file as the image:

  <IMG SRC="picture.jpg" USEMAP="#mymap">


The following example defines a simple map which describes an image with a circle in the middle overlapping two large rectangles:

  <MAP NAME="welcomemap">
  <AREA SHAPE=CIRCLE COORDS="50,50,40" HREF="about_us.html"
	ALT="About our company">
  <AREA SHAPE=RECT COORDS="0,0,100,50" HREF="products.html"
	ALT="Our products">
  <AREA SHAPE=RECT COORDS="0,51,100,100 HREF="technology.html"
	ALT="Technology for the next century">
  </MAP>


Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   NAME 		- Name

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		area
~0000000444
	Menu (O) element 	<MENU>

The MENU and DIR elements are superceded by extensions to the UL element. User agents are advised to continue to support them for the sake of legacy documents. Both MENU and DIR consist of one or more LI elements, similar to UL. MENU lists are typically rendered without bullets in a more compact style than UL. 
DIR lists are used to present lists of items containing up to 20 characters each. Items in a DIR list are arranged in columns. 

Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   COMPACT 	- Compact style

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		li

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	blockquote, center, dir, div, dl, form, hr, isindex, menu, multicol, noscript, ol, p, pre, table, ul
~0000000445
	Meta-information element 	<META>

The <META> element is an extensible container for use in identifying specialized document meta-information.
Meta-information has two main functions:
  - to provide a means to discover that the data set
    exists and how it might be obtained or accessed;
  - to document the content, quality, and features
    of a data set, indicating its fitness for use.

Each <META> element specifies a name/value pair. If multiple META elements are provided with the same name, their combined contents (concatenated as a comma-separated list) is the value associated with that name.

NOTE - The <META> element should not be used where a specific element, such as <TITLE>, would be more appropriate. Rather than a <META> element with a URI as the value of the CONTENT attribute, use a <LINK> element.

HTTP servers may read the content of the document <HEAD> to generate header fields corresponding to any elements defining a value for the attribute HTTP-EQUIV.

NOTE - The method by which the server extracts document meta-information is unspecified and not mandatory. The <META> element only provides an extensible mechanism for identifying and embedding document meta-information; how it may be used is up to the individual server implementation and the HTML user agent.

For example, if the document contains:

    <META HTTP-EQUIV="Expires"
      CONTENT="Tue, 04 Dec 1995 21:29:02 GMT">
    <meta http-equiv="Keywords" CONTENT="Fred">
    <META HTTP-EQUIV="Reply-to"
      content="field@host.domain.edu (Roy Field)">
    <Meta Http-equiv="Keywords" CONTENT="Barney">

then the server may include the following header fields:

    Expires: Tue, 04 Dec 1995 21:29:02 GMT
    Keywords: Fred, Barney
    Reply-to: field@host.domain.edu (Roy Field)

as part of the HTTP response to a 'GET' or 'HEAD' request for that document.

An HTTP server must not use the <META> element to form an HTTP response header unless the HTTP-EQUIV attribute is present.

An HTTP server may disregard any <META> elements that specify information controlled by the HTTP server, for example 'Server', 'Date' and 'Last-modified'.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CONTENT 	- Content (HTTP response)  	(Required)
   NAME 		- Name
   HTTP-EQUIV 	- -equiv_T HTTP response header-equiv_T

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	head

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000446
	Multi column element 	<MULTICOL>

This element is used to implement a multi column layout (like in newspapers).  It has been implemented in Netscape Navigator 3.0.
The MULTICOL element is used  with COLS, GUTTER, and WIDTH attributes to control the number of columns, the space between the columns, and the width of individual columns, respectively.

Example:
To achieve two column layout with spacing between them set to 20 pixels you could use the following:

  <MULTICOL COLS=2 GUTTER=20 WIDTH=100%>

  ....

  </MULTICOL>


The MULTICOL element can be nested to achieve nested multicolumn layout.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   COLS 		- Number of columns  	(Required)
   WIDTH 		- Width
   GUTTER 		- Gutter

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000447
	No line break (N) element 	<NOBR>

The NOBR element stands for NO BReak (Netscape extension).  This means all the text between the starting and the closing NOBR tags cannot have line breaks inserted between them.  While NOBR is essential for those odd character sequences you really don't want broken, please be careful; long text strings inside of NOBR elements can look rather odd.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000448
	No frames element 	<NOFRAMES>

The <NOFRAMES> element is used to encapsulate alternative content that is viewable by clients that do not support Frames.  A Frame-capable client ignores all tags between start and end of NOFRAMES tags.

Only one NOFRAMES element per document is allowed.  If used it must be defined as the first element in the first FRAMESET element.

The alternative content is in fact a "body" of a standard HTML document.

FRAMESET/NOFRAMES/BODY hierarchy note
_____________________________________
asWedit requires the BODY tag to be the first one inside NOFRAMES (it is NOT optional in this context).  The program will automatically insert the required BODY tags at the time you insert NOFRAMES element (if they do not exist already).
The content model for NOFRAMES might cause a small problem if you want to change your current legal HTML document into a Frames one.  As BODY must be inside NOFRAMES, NOFRAMES inside FRAMESET and the FRAMESET must not contain body elements you cannot insert the FRAMESET/NOFRAMES construction without breaking the asWedit context HTML mode.  To put the body of your current HTML document inside such elements do the following:
  1. Highlight the whole body text of your document but without the BODY tags and Cut it to the Clipboard (Ctrl+X);
  2. Delete the BODY tag(s) if your document contains them (position the cursor inside the <BODY> tag and use Edit|Delete Tag command);
  3. Insert the FRAMESET element (HTML|Frames|Frame Set);
  4. Insert the NOFRAMES element (HTML|Frames|No frames); this will automatically insert the BODY element;
  5. Paste the contents from the Clipboard (Ctrl+V).

There are of course other ways of doing the above.  If something goes wrong just use a sequence of undo actions (Edit|Undo).


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	frameset

Contains:		body
~0000000449
	No script element 	<NOSCRIPT>

The <NOSCRIPT> is used to display alternate content for browsers not supporting the <SCRIPT> element or when the user has disabled JavaScript in the browser.
HTML enclosed within the element is displayed by a non-JavaScript browser; text enclosed within the tag is hidden and ignored by for example, Netscape Navigator. Use this tag to specify alternate content for browsers that do not support JavaScript, or in case the user has disabled JavaScript in the browser's options.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000450
	Ordered List element 	<OL>

An ordered list typically is a numbered list of items.

The OL START attribute can be used to initialize the sequence number (by default it is initialized to 1). You can set it later on with the VALUE attribute on LI elements. Both of these attributes expect integer values.  You can't indicate that numbering should be continued from a previous list, or to skip missing values without giving an explicit number. 

The COMPACT attribute can be used as a hint to the user agent to render lists in a more compact style. The OL TYPE attribute allows you to set the numbering style for list items.


Example:

  <OL>
    <LH>Meeting Agenda</LH>
    <LI>Minutes of the last meeting
    <LI>Do we need yet more meetings?
    <LI>Any other business
  </OL>


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   COMPACT 	- Compact style
   START 		- Start number
   TYPE 		- Numbering style

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		li
~0000000451
	Option element 	<OPTION>

The OPTION element can only occur within a SELECT element. It represents a possible choice. It can only contain text, together with SGML entities for accented characters etc.

When the form is submitted, the NAME of the enclosing SELECT element is paired with the OPTION's VALUE attribute to contribute a name/value pair for the selection. Unselected options don't contribute to the form's submitted data. You can initialize the option to its selected state by including the SELECT attribute.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   VALUE 		- Value
   SELECTED 	- Initially selected

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	select

Contains:		#PCDATA
~0000000452
	Paragraph element 	<P>

The <P> element is used to define a paragraph. The exact rendering (indentation, leading etc.) is not defined and may be a function of other tags, style sheets, etc.
The ALIGN attribute can be used to explicitly specify the horizontal alignment. Paragraph elements have the same content model as headers, that is text and character level markup, such as character emphasis, inline images, form fields and math.

Example:

  <H1>The heading precedes the first paragraph</H1>
  <P>Here is the text of the first paragraph.  <P>and
  this is the text of the second paragraph.

The text up to the next <P> element is treated as being part of the current paragraph. This is an example of how SGML allows end tags like </P> to be left out where they can be inferred from the context.

Word Wrapping
_____________
User agents are free to wrap lines at whitespace characters so as to ensure lines fit within the current window size. Use the  &nbsp;  entity for the non-breaking space character, when you want to make sure that a line isn't broken! Alternatively, use the NOWRAP attribute to disable word wrapping and the <BR> element to force line breaks where desired.

Note: Do not use empty paragraphs to add white space around headings, lists or other elements. White space is added by the rendering software.


Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   ALIGN 		- Align

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	address, blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000453
	Parameter element 	<PARAM>

The <PARAM> element is used to define extra parameters for the current applet.

The applet invokes the getParameter method to get a String that contains the value specified in the PARAM element.  See the Applet class documentation for more information.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   NAME 		- Name  	(Required)
   VALUE 		- Value

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	applet

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000454
	Preformatted element 	<PRE>

Preformatted text between the start and end PRE tag is rendered using a fixed with font, in addition whitespace characters are treated literally. The spacing and line breaks are rendered directly, unlike other elements, for which repeated whitespace characters are collapsed to a single space character and line breaks introduced automatically.

Line breaks within the text are rendered as a move to the beginning of the next line. The exceptions are line breaks immediately following the starting PRE tag or immediately preceding the ending PRE tag, which should be ignored.

The <P> tag should be avoided, but for robustness, user agents are recommended to treat these tags as line breaks.

Anchor elements, and character highlighting elements may be used.

FORM elements may be included, and the fixed width font exploited to control layout (the TAB or TABLE elements give similar control for normal text though).

Block-like elements such as headers, lists and TABLES should be avoided.

The horizontal tab character (encoded in US ASCII and ISO 8859-1 as decimal 9) should be interpreted as the smallest nonzero  number of spaces which will leave the number of characters so far on the line as a multiple of 8. Its use is deprecated!


For example, a verse from Shelley (To a Skylark):

  <PRE>
    Higher still and higher
      From the earth thou springest
    Like a cloud of fire;
      The blue deep thou wingest,
    And singing still dost soar, and soaring ever singest.
  </PRE>


Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   WIDTH 		- Width

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, i, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, spacer, span, strike, strong, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	big, font, img, small, sub, sup
~0000000455
	Strikeout element 	<S>

The <S> element specifies that the enclosed text should be displayed with a horizontal line striking through the text.  If this is not practical, an alternative mapping is allowed.  Supported by Netscape Navigator 2.0 and proposed for HTML 3.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000456
	Sample element 	<SAMP>

The <SAMP> element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example:

  The only word containing the letters <samp>mt</samp> is dreamt.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000457
	Script element 	<SCRIPT>

The <SCRIPT> element is used to include some scripting language in the document. It is primarily used with Netscape's JavaScript. Usually the script is embeded in tha same document, but from version 3.0 of Netscape Navigator you can supply a SRC attribute to specify a URL that loads the text of a script. 

Note that in the current HTML 3.2 DTD the context of script is declared as #PCDATA, i.e. the script is parsed by the parser (this might be in conflict with some of the usage of SCRIPT seen on the Web).

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   SRC 		- "Source URL"
   LANGUAGE 	- Language

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, head, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	link, meta, script, style
~0000000458
	Selection of option(s) element 	<SELECT>

The <SELECT> element is used for single and multiple choice menus.
It is generally rendered as a drop-down or pop-up menu, and offers a more compact alternative to using radio buttons for single choice menus, or checkboxes for multiple choice menus.

Example:

<SELECT NAME="flavor">
 <OPTION VALUE=a>Vanilla
 <OPTION VALUE=b>Strawberry
 <OPTION VALUE=c>Rum and Raisin
 <OPTION VALUE=d>Peach and Orange
</SELECT>

This is a single choice menu. When you want a multiple choice menu, you need to include the MULTIPLE attribute with the SELECT element, e.g.
 <SELECT MULTIPLE NAME="flavor">.

The NAME attribute is used when creating the name/value list describing the form's contents. A name/value pair is contributed for each selected option. The value is taken from the OPTION's VALUE attribute, and defaults to the content of the OPTION when the VALUE attribute is missing.

For single choice menus, if no option is initially marked as selected, then the first item listed is selected. This is inappropriate for multiple choice menus, though.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   NAME 		- Formal name  	(Required)
   MULTIPLE 	- Multiple selections
   SIZE 		- Size

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		option
~0000000459
	Small element 	<SMALL>

The <SMALL> element specifies that the enclosed text should be displayed, if practical, using a small font (compared with normal text).  Supported by Netscape Navigator 2.0 and proposed for HTML 3.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000460
	Spacer element 	<SPACER>

The <SPACER> element (implemented in Netscape Navigator 3.0) is used to control the vertical and horizontal whitespace that appears on the HTML page. 
You can control the horizontal whitespace that appears between words in a line, the vertical whitespace that appears between lines on a page, and you can set up arbitrary rectangular spacing elements (usually placed in margins to make text flow around them, but they can also be placed within the text flow of a line). The new SPACER tag has TYPE, SIZE, WIDTH, HEIGHT, and ALIGN attributes.
The SPACER tag allows HTML developers to enhance the appearance of their documents, for instance, by indenting a paragraph. It can be used to control vertical white space.
The SPACER tag can also be used like an invisible IMG tag. That is, it can have a WIDTH and HEIGHT, and an ALIGN setting.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   TYPE 		- Type
   ALIGN 		- Align
   SIZE 		- Size
   WIDTH 		- Width
   HEIGHT 		- Height

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000461
	Span element 	<SPAN>

The <SPAN> element is used to mark part of the document that does not have a structural meaning. It is proposed to be used with styles.

Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000462
	Strike element 	<STRIKE>

The <STRIKE> element specifies that the enclosed text should be displayed with a horizontal line striking through the text.  If this is not practical, an alternative mapping is allowed.  
Note that the <S> element means exactly the same and is much shorter.  The asWedit program supports both tags but on the menu only the shorter one is available.



Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000463
	Strong element 	<STRONG>

The <STRONG> element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example:

  <strong>STOP</strong>, or I'll say "<strong>STOP</strong>" again!


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000464
	Style element 	<STYLE>

The <STYLE> element provides a means for including rendering information using a specified style notation. Information in the STYLE element overrides client defaults and that of linked style sheets. It allows authors to specify overrides, while for the most part using a generic style sheet, and as such improves the effectiveness of caching schemes for linked style sheets. 

Stylistic rules will in general match tag names and attribute values for elements in the document body. Context sensitive rules may be used for such purposes as rendering drop down capitals for the initial letter in the first paragraph following a header.

Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	head

Contains:		#PCDATA

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	link, meta, script, style
~0000000465
	Subscript and Superscript elements	<sub> and <sup>

The SUB and SUP elements are used for subscripts and superscripts respectively, and are preferably rendered in reduced font. 


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000467
	Table element 	<TABLE>

Table elements start with an optional CAPTION element, optionally followed by one or more COL or COLGROUP elements, then an optional THEAD, an optional TFOOT, and finally one or more TBODY elements.

Introduction to HTML Tables
___________________________
Tables start with an optional caption followed by one or more rows.  Each row is formed by one or more cells, which are differentiated into header and data cells.  Cells can be merged across rows and columns, and include attributes assisting rendering to speech and braille, or for exporting table data into databases.  The model provides limited support for control over appearence, for example horizontal and vertical alignment of cell contents, border styles and cell margins.  You can further affect this by grouping rows and columns together.  Tables can contain a wide range of content, such as headers, lists, paragraphs, forms, figures, preformatted text and even nested tables.

Example

  <TABLE BORDER>
    <CAPTION>A test table with merged cells</CAPTION>
    <TR><TH ROWSPAN=2><TH COLSPAN=2>Average
	<TH ROWSPAN=2>other<BR>category<TH>Misc
    <TR><TH>height<TH>weight
    <TR><TH ALIGN=LEFT>males<TD>1.9<TD>0.003
    <TR><TH ALIGN=LEFT ROWSPAN=2>females<TD>1.7<TD>0.002
  </TABLE>

On a dumb terminal, this would be rendered something like:

	     A test table with merged cells
   /--------------------------------------------------\
   |          |      Average      |  other   |  Misc  |
   |          |-------------------| category |--------|
   |          |  height |  weight |          |        |
   |-----------------------------------------|--------|
   | males    | 1.9     | 0.003   |          |        |
   |-----------------------------------------|--------|
   | females  | 1.7     | 0.002   |          |        |
   \--------------------------------------------------/


Frame and rules
_______________
The FRAME attribute controls the appearence of the border frame around the table while the RULES attribute determines the choice of rulings within the table. A finer level of control will be supported via rendering annotations. The STYLE attribute can be used for including rendering information with individual elements. Further rendering information can be given with the STYLE element in the document head or via linked style sheets.


Table sections
______________
Following the CALS table model, this specification allows table rows to be grouped into head and body and foot sections. This simplifies the representation of rendering information and can be used to repeat table head and foot rows when breaking tables across page boundaries, or to provide fixed headers above a scrollable body panel. In the markup, the foot section is placed before the body sections. This is an optimization shared with CALS for dealing with very long tables. It allows the foot to be rendered without having to wait for the entire table to be processed.



Large tables and incremental display
____________________________________
For large tables or slow network connections, it is desirable to be able to start displaying the table before all of the data has been received. The default window width for most user agents shows about 80 characters, and the graphics for many HTML pages are designed with these defaults in mind. Authors can provide a hint to user agents to activate incremental display of table contents. This feature requires the author to specify the number of columns, and includes provision for control of table width and the relative widths of different columns.

For incremental display, the browser needs the number of columns and their widths. The default width of the table is the current window size (width="100%"). This can be altered by including a WIDTH attribute in the TABLE start tag. By default all columns have the same width, but you can specify column widths with one or more COL elements before the table data starts.

When incremental display is desired, the best is to explicitly specify the number of columns in the TABLE start tag.


Alignment Inheritance Order
___________________________
Alignment properties can be included with most of the table elements: COL, THEAD, TBODY, TFOOT, TR, TH and TD.  When rendering cells, horizontal alignment is determined by columns in preference to rows, while for vertical alignment, the rows are more important than the columns.  The following table gives the detailed precedence order for each attribute, where X > Y denotes that X takes precedence over Y::

  ALIGN, CHAR and CHAROFF:

   cells > columns > column groups > rows > row groups > default

  VALIGN, LANG, DIR and STYLE:

    cells > rows > row groups > columns > column groups > table > default

Where cells are defined by TH and TD elements; rows by TR elements; row groups by THEAD, TBODY and TFOOT elements, columns by COL elements; and column groups by COLGROUP and COL elements. Note that there is no inheritance mechanism for the CLASS attribute.

Properties defined on cells take precedence over inherited properties, but are in turn over-ridden by alignment properties on elements within cells.  In the absence of an ALIGN attribute along the inheritance path, the recommended default alignment for table cell contents is ALIGN=LEFT for table data and ALIGN=CENTER for table headers.  The recommended default for vertical alignment is VALIGN=MIDDLE.  These defaults are chosen to match the behaviour of the widely deployed Netscape implementation.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   BORDER 		- Frame width
   WIDTH 		- Width
   ALIGN 		- Align
   CELLPADDING 	- Spacing within cells
   CELLSPACING 	- Spacing between cells
   BGCOLOR 	- Background color

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		caption, tr
~0000000468
	Data cell element 	<TD>

<TH> elements are used to represent header cells, while <TD> elements are used to represent data cells.  This allows user agents to render header and data cells distinctly, even in the absence of style sheets.

Cells can span multiple rows and columns, and may be empty.  Cells spanning rows contribute to the column count on each of the spanned rows, but only appear in the markup once (in the first row spanned).  The row count is determined by the number of TR elements.  Any rows implied by cells spanning rows beyond this should be ignored.

If the column count for the table is greater than the number of cells for a given row (after including cells for spanned rows), the missing cells are treated as occurring on the right hand side of the table and rendered as empty cells.  If the language context indicates a right to left writing order, then the missing cells should be placed on the left hand side.

It is possible to create tables with overlapping cells, for instance:

  <table border>
    <tr><td rowspan=2>1<td>2<td>3
    <tr><td rowspan=2>4
    <tr><td colspan=2>5<td>6
  </table>

which might look something like:

  /-----------\
  | 1 | 2 | 3 |
  |   |-------|
  |   | 4 |   |
  |---|...|---|
  | 5 :   | 6 |
  \-----------/

In this example, the cells labeled 4 and 5 overlap.  In such cases, the rendering is implementation dependent.

The AXIS and AXES attributes for cells provide a means for defining concise labels for cells.  When rendering to speech, these attributes may be used to provide abbreviated names for the headers relevant to each cell.  Another application is when you want to be able to later process table contents to enter them into a database.  These attributes are then used to give database field names.  The table's class attribute should be used to let the software recognize which tables can be treated in this way.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   WIDTH 		- Width
   HEIGHT 		- Height
   ALIGN 		- Align
   VALIGN 		- Vertical align
   COLSPAN 	- Columns spanned
   ROWSPAN 	- Rows spanned
   NOWRAP 		- Wordwrap
   BGCOLOR 	- Background color

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	tr

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000469
	Text area element 	<TEXTAREA>

The <TEXTAREA> element allow users enter more than one line of text inside a fill-out form.
For example:

<TEXTAREA NAME="address" ROWS=44 COLS=5>
AdvaSoft Ltd
30 Hatch Road
London SW16 4PN, UK
</TEXTAREA>

The text up to the end tag is used to initialize the field's value.
The initialization text can contain SGML entities, e.g. for accented characters, but is otherwise treated as literal text. This end tag is always required even if the field is initially blank. When submitting a form, the line terminators are implementation dependent. Servers should be capable of recognizing a CR immediately followed by an LF, or separate CRs and LFs as all signifying the ends of lines. User agents should tolerate the same range of line terminators within the initialization text.

In a typical rendering, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is rendered in a fixed-width font. User agents should allow text to grow beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. The user agent is recommended to wrap words as they are entered, to fit within the textarea field. It is further recommended that a means is provided for users to turn this feature off and on.


Note: In the initial design for forms, multi-line text fields were supported by the INPUT element with TYPE=TEXT. Unfortunately, this causes problems for fields with long text values as SGML limits the length of attribute literals. The HTML DTD allows for up to 1024 characters (the SGML default is only 240 characters).


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   NAME 		- Formal name  	(Required)
   COLS 		- Number of columns  	(Required)
   ROWS 		- Height  	(Required)

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA
~0000000470
	Header cell element 	<TH>

<TH> elements are used to represent header cells, while <TD> elements are used to represent data cells.  This allows user agents to render header and data cells distinctly, even in the absence of style sheets.

Cells can span multiple rows and columns, and may be empty.  Cells spanning rows contribute to the column count on each of the spanned rows, but only appear in the markup once (in the first row spanned).  The row count is determined by the number of TR elements.  Any rows implied by cells spanning rows beyond this should be ignored.

If the column count for the table is greater than the number of cells for a given row (after including cells for spanned rows), the missing cells are treated as occurring on the right hand side of the table and rendered as empty cells.  If the language context indicates a right to left writing order, then the missing cells should be placed on the left hand side.

It is possible to create tables with overlapping cells, for instance:

  <table border>
    <tr><td rowspan=2>1<td>2<td>3
    <tr><td rowspan=2>4
    <tr><td colspan=2>5<td>6
  </table>

which might look something like:

  /-----------\
  | 1 | 2 | 3 |
  |   |-------|
  |   | 4 |   |
  |---|...|---|
  | 5 :   | 6 |
  \-----------/

In this example, the cells labeled 4 and 5 overlap.  In such cases, the rendering is implementation dependent.

The AXIS and AXES attributes for cells provide a means for defining concise labels for cells.  When rendering to speech, these attributes may be used to provide abbreviated names for the headers relevant to each cell.  Another application is when you want to be able to later process table contents to enter them into a database.  These attributes are then used to give database field names.  The table's class attribute should be used to let the software recognize which tables can be treated in this way.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   WIDTH 		- Width
   HEIGHT 		- Height
   ALIGN 		- Align
   VALIGN 		- Vertical align
   COLSPAN 	- Columns spanned
   ROWSPAN 	- Rows spanned
   NOWRAP 		- Wordwrap
   BGCOLOR 	- Background color

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	tr

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000471
	Title element 	<TITLE>

Every HTML document must contain a <TITLE> element.

The title should identify the contents of the document in a global context.  A short title, such as "Introduction" may be meaningless out of context.  A title such as "Introduction to HTML Elements" is more appropriate.
There may only be one <TITLE> element in any document.

A user agent may display the title of a document in a history list or as a label for the window displaying the document.  Unlike headings, titles are not normally displayed in the text of a document itself.

NOTE - The length of a title is not limited, however, long titles may be truncated in some applications.  To minimize this possibility, titles should be fewer than 64 characters.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	head

Contains:		#PCDATA

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	link, meta, script, style
~0000000472
	Row element 	<TR>

The TR or table row element acts as a container for a row of table cells (TH and/or TD elements).  The end tag may be omitted.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   ALIGN 		- Align
   BGCOLOR 	- Background color
   VALIGN 		- Vertical align

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	table

Contains:		td, th
~0000000473
	Typewriter element 	<TT>

The <TT> element indicates teletype (monospaced) text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000474
	Underline element 	<U>

The <U> element specifies that the enclosed text should be displayed, if practical, as underlined.  Supported by Netscape Navigator 2.0 and proposed for HTML 3.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000475
	Unordered List element 	<UL>

An unordered list typically is a bulleted list of items. 

The UL element is used for unordered lists. Both start and end tags are always needed. The LI element is used for individual list items. The end tag for LI elements can always be omitted. Note that LI elements can contain nested lists. The COMPACT attribute can be used as a hint to the user agent to render lists in a more compact style. 

The TYPE attribute can be used to set the bullet style on UL and LI elements. The permitted values are "disc", "square" or "circle". The default generally depends on the level of nesting for lists.

Example:

  <UL>
    <LH>Table Fruit</LH>
    <LI>apples
    <LI>oranges
    <LI>bananas
  </UL>


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   COMPACT 	- Compact style
   TYPE 		- Mark type

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		li
~0000000476
	Variable element 	<VAR>

The <VAR> element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic and might be used in an instruction manual. For example:

  Type <SAMP>html-check <VAR>file</VAR> | more</SAMP>
  to check <VAR>file</VAR> for markup errors.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000477
	Allow break (N) element 	<WBR>

The WBR element stands for Word BReak (Netscape extension).  This is for the very rare case when you have a NOBR section and you know exactly where you want it to break.  Also, any time you want to give the Netscape Navigator help by telling it where a word is allowed to be broken.  The WBR element does not force a line break (BR does that) it simply lets the Netscape Navigator (or other client) know where a line break is allowed to be inserted if needed.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000398
	SGML DOCTYPE declaration

The DOCTYPE declaration is used by SGML systems in the document's proloque.

HTML Public Text Identifiers

To identify information as an HTML document conforming to the HTML 2.0 specification, each document must start with one of the following document type declarations.

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN">
    NOTE - If the body of a 'text/html' message entity does
    not begin with a document type declaration, an HTML user
    agent should infer the above document type declaration.

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN">

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN">
    This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD.
    Form elements must not occur in level 1 documents.

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN">
  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN">
    These two document type declarations refer to the
    "Strict HTML DTD" and "Strict Level 1 HTML DTD". They
    refer to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML.

To identify the document as being HTML 3.2, it is recommended that documents start with the prologue:

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN">

The last published DTD for HTML 3.2 has a following declaration:

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2 Draft 19960821//EN">


As we, at AdvaSoft, have modified and extended the above HTML 3.2 DTD with currently used extensions (like Netscape frames) you should use the following DOCTYPE, whenever you use any of the new features:

in the basic mode (-html):

   <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//AdvaSoft//DTD HTML 3.2 extended 961018//EN">

in the experimental mode (-htmlx):

   <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//AdvaSoft//DTD HTML 3.2 experimental 961018//EN">

Our extended DTD's are available at the following addresses:

   http://www.advasoft.com/lib/html-3.2x-as-961018.dtd
   http://www.advasoft.com/lib/html-3.2exp-as-961018.dtd

while the latest versions of DTD's used in asWedit extended and experimental modes are available as:
   
   http://www.advasoft.com/lib/html-x-as.dtd
   http://www.advasoft.com/lib/html-exp-as.dtd


Note:
Because asWedit supports also non-standard (unknown) elements the DTD declaration is not available through a menu entry. It is however automatically inserted when you select the Standard HTML Layout. Alternatively you have to enter/paste it manually.

There are also other formal public identifiers.
~0000000397
	Unknown tag element 	<XYZ>

The element unknown to asWedit in the current mode, i.e. element that is not defined in the AdvaSoft's extended HTML 3.2x DTD (for example a proprietary HTML extension). 
When inserted or edited the  Unknown tag editor   dialog is used where you enter the unsupported tag (and any attributes).

Note that for an unknown element any attribute is allowed and no context checks are made (so use this kind of element when you really have to).

The AdvaSoft's extended HTML 3.2x  DTD is based on: HTML 3.2 DTD draft as of 21 Aug 1996 and several documents about extensions used in Netscape Navigator 3.0 (and other browsers).
    

Detailed specification:

Assumed Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Assumed Content type:	Mixed

It is assumed that an 'unknown' element can contain any element that can appear in the HTML body.
~0000000071
	Layout menu (Alt+a)

The Layout menu provides following commands for laying out the HTML documents:

	 Document > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Heading > 	 (sub-menu)

	 List > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Paragraph 

	 Line break 

	 Horizontal rule 

	 Center 

	 Comment 

	 Others > 	 (sub-menu)

~0000007100
	Layout|Document sub-menu

The Layout|Document menu provides following commands:

	 Standard 

	 HTML 

	 Head > 		 (sub-menu)

	 Body 

	 Frames > 	 (sub-menu)

~0000710002
	Document|Head sub-menu

The Head sub-menu provides following commands:

	 Head 

	 Title 

	 Base context 

	 Meta-information 

	 Link from this document 

	 Searchable index 

	 Script 

	 Style 

~0000710005
	Document|Frames sub-menu

This sub-menu is used to support HTML frames extensions as implemented in Netscape Navigator 2.0.
It contains the following commands:

	 Frame Set 

	 No frames 

	 Frame 

~0000007101
	Layout|Heading sub-menu

The Layout|Heading menu provides commands to mark-up HTML headings:

	 H1 

	 H2 

	 H3 

	 H4 

	 H5 

	 H6 

~0000007102
	Layout|List sub-menu

The Layout|List menu provides commands to mark-up lists.
(Note that the DIR and MENU tags are deprecated in the HTML 3: use UL with type=plain instead, whenever possible.)

The menu includes following commands:

	 Convert text to 

	 Ordered 

	 Unordered 

	 Item 

	 Glossary 

	 Term 

	 Term definition 

	 Directory (O) 

	 Menu (O) 

~0000007110
	Layout|Others sub-menu

The Others menu provides the following additional HTML commands:

	 Address 

	 Preformatted 

	 Quoted Passage 

	 Multi column 

	 Spacer 

	 No script 

	 Division 

~0000000066
	Markup menu (Alt+M)

The Markup menu provides following commands for marking up of the HTML text:

	 Phrase > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Font > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Others > 		 (sub-menu)

	 Target 

	 Hyperlink 

	 Image 

	 Entities > 	 (sub-menu)

~0000006600
	Markup|Phrase sub-menu

The Markup|Phrase menu provides following commands for structural mark-up of HTML text:

	 Emphasis 

	 Strong 

	 Code 

	 Sample 

	 Keyboard 

	 Variable 

	 Citation 

~0000006601
	Markup|Font sub-menu

The Markup|Font menu provides following commands to mark-up directly physical appearence of HTML text:
These elements may be nested within one another. Browsers should, where practical, aim to combine different types of highlighting as required.

	 Bold 

	 Italic 

	 Typewriter 

	 Big 

	 Small 

	 Subscript 

	 Superscript 

	 Underline 

	 Strikeout 

	 Font 

	 Base font 

~0000006602
	Markup|Others sub-menu

The Markup|Others menu provides miscellaneous commands to mark-up HTML text:

	 No line break (N) 

	 Allow break (N) 

	 Term definition 

	 Span 

	 Unknown tag 

~0000000076
	HTML menu (Alt+L)

The HTML menu provides following commands, mostly specific to HTML version 2:
(it is rather modest when compared with the HTML 3 version)


	 Forms > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Tables > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Java Applet 

	 Parameter 

	 Image Map 

	 Active Area 

	 Embed 

~0000007600
	HTML|Forms sub-menu

The HTML|Forms menu provides following commands:

	 Form 

	 Examples > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Input element 

	 Text area 

	 Selection of option(s) 

	 Option 

~0000007601
	HTML|Tables sub-menu

The HTML|Tables menu provides following commands:

	 Convert text to 

	 Table 

	 Caption 

	 Row 

	 Header cell 

	 Data cell 


~0000000002
	List of supported elements

All elements in AdvaSoft's experimental HTML 3.2X DTD:

   A 		- Hyperlink
   ADDRESS 	- Address
   APPLET 		- Java Applet
   AREA 		- Active Area
   B 		- Bold
   BASE 		- Base context
   BASEFONT 	- Base font
   BIG 		- Big
   BLOCKQUOTE 	- Quoted Passage
   BODY 		- Body
   BR 		- Line break
   CAPTION 	- Caption
   CENTER 	- Center
   CITE 		- Citation
   CODE 		- Code
   COL 		- Column properties
   COLGROUP 	- Column Group
   DD 		- Term definition
   DFN 		- Term definition
   DIR 		- Directory (O)
   DIV 		- Division
   DL 		- Glossary
   DT 		- Term
   EM 		- Emphasis
   EMBED 		- Embed
   FONT 		- Font
   FORM 		- Form
   FRAME 		- Frame
   FRAMESET 	- Frame Set
   H1 		- H1
   H2 		- H2
   H3 		- H3
   H4 		- H4
   H5 		- H5
   H6 		- H6
   HEAD 		- Head
   HR 		- Horizontal rule
   HTML 		- HTML
   I 		- Italic
   IMG 		- Image
   INPUT 		- Input element
   ISINDEX 	- Searchable index
   KBD 		- Keyboard
   LI 		- Item
   LINK 		- Link from this document
   MAP 		- Image Map
   MENU 		- Menu (O)
   META 		- Meta-information
   MULTICOL 	- Multi column
   NOBR 		- No line break (N)
   NOFRAMES 	- No frames
   NOSCRIPT 	- No script
   OL 		- Ordered
   OPTION 	- Option
   P 		- Paragraph
   PARAM 		- Parameter
   PRE 		- Preformatted
   S 		- Strikeout
   SAMP 		- Sample
   SCRIPT 		- Script
   SELECT 		- Selection of option(s)
   SMALL 		- Small
   SPACER 	- Spacer
   SPAN 		- Span
   STRIKE 		- Strike
   STRONG 	- Strong
   STYLE 		- Style
   SUB 		- Subscript
   SUP 		- Superscript
   TABLE 		- Table
   TBODY 		- Body section
   TD 		- Data cell
   TEXTAREA 	- Text area
   TFOOT 		- Static Footer
   TH 		- Header cell
   THEAD 		- Static header
   TITLE 		- Title
   TR 		- Row
   TT 		- Typewriter
   U 		- Underline
   UL 		- Unordered
   VAR 		- Variable
   WBR 		- Allow break (N)

	Pseudo-SGML elements and 'unknown' element:

   <!-- --> 		- Comment
   <!DOCTYPE > 		- Document type (DTD)

   UNKNOWN 		- Not in the DTD used
~0000000200
	Hyperlink element 	<A>

The anchor <A> element is used to define the start and/or destination of a hypertext link.

Anchors can't be nested and always require start and end tags. They are used to define hypertext links and
also to define named locations for use as targets for hypertext links.

Example:

The <A HREF="http://www.w3.org/">World Wide Web Organization</A>
provides information on Web related standards, mailing lists
and freeware tools.

The text between the start and end tag defines the label for the link.
Selecting the link takes the reader to the document specified by the HREF attribute, in this case, the W3O home page.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   HREF 		- Link destination
   NAME 		- Named link end
   REL 		- Link relationship(s)
   REV 		- Reverse relationship(s)
   TITLE 		- Title
   TARGET 		- Target frame name
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	a
~0000000201
	Address element 	<ADDRESS>

The <ADDRESS> element specifies such information as address, signature and authorship for the current document, and typically is placed at the beginning or end of the document body.
Typically, the <ADDRESS> element is rendered in an italic typeface and may be indented.

Example of use:

  <ADDRESS>
  Newsletter editor<BR>
  J.R. Brown<BR>
  8723 Buena Vista, Smallville, CT 01234<BR>
  Tel: +1 (123) 456 7890
  </ADDRESS>


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, div, form, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, p, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000202
	Java Applet element 	<APPLET>

The <APPLET> element adds a Java applet. This element is supported by the Netscape Navigator 2.0 and by the HotJava and is the standard to be supported by other "java enabled" browsers.

Data from the APPLET tag (code, codebase, name, width, height, align, vspace and hspace) is made available to the applet. In addition, any parameters defined in the <PARAM> tags are also made available to the applet. The applet invokes the getParameter method to get a String that contains the value of one of the above parameters. See the Applet class documentation for more information.

Applet resources are loaded relative to the codebase, including images, audio files, etc. However, the applet does have access to the document-URL if resources from that location are desired.

Here is an example of how applet code can reference a resource from the codebase (this should be used when resources are accessed that are referenced directly from within the applet code):

  Image img = getImage(new URL(getBaseURL(), "images/cross.gif"));

And here is an example of how applet code can reference a resource from the document-URL (this should be used when resources are accessed that are specified in an applet parameter, and which are therefore relative to the document's base):

  Image img = getImage(new URL(getDocumentURL(), getParameter("src")));


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CODE 		- Code File  	(Required)
   WIDTH 		- Width  	(Required)
   HEIGHT 		- Height  	(Required)
   ALIGN 		- Align
   ALT 		- Alternative text
   NAME 		- Applet name
   HSPACE 		- Horizontal spacing
   VSPACE 		- Vertical spacing
   CODEBASE 	- Code base
   ARCHIVE 	- Archive

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr, param

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Inclusion elements:	param
~0000000203
	Active Area element 	<AREA>

The AREA element contained inside the MAP element specifies a single clickable area of the image.
The SHAPE attribute gives the shape of this area.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   ALT 		- Alternative text  	(Required)
   COORDS 		- Coordinates
   SHAPE 		- Hotzone shape
   NOHREF 		- Act on clicks
   HREF 		- Link destination
   TARGET 		- Target frame name

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	map

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000204
	Bold element 	<B>

The <B> element specifies that the enclosed text should be displayed in a boldface. If this is not practical, an alternative mapping is allowed.


Note: <B> inside Math element: don't use the "B" element for chemical formulae. These should be handled by subclassing the MATH element with "class=chem", for instance:
  <MATH CLASS=CHEM>

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000205
	Base context element 	<BASE>

The optional <BASE> element provides a base address for interpreting relative URLs when the document is read out of context.  The value of the HREF attribute must be an absolute URI.
URLs within the document may be in a "partial" form relative to this base address.

For example:

 <base href="http://acme.com/docs/mydoc.html">
    ...
 <img src="images/me.gif">

which resolves to "http://acme.com/docs/images/me.gif" .

Note that the default base address is the URL used to retrieve the document.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   HREF 		- Base address  	(Required)
   TARGET 		- Target frame name

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	head

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000206
	Base font element 	<BASEFONT>

The <BASEFONT> element is used to change the base font size that all relative FONT changes are based on.  Note that this element is not supported by some browsers.

The size is specified using the SIZE attribute.  Its default value is 3, and it has a valid range of 1-7.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   SIZE 		- Size
   COLOR 		- Color
   FACE 		- Face

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000207
	Big element 	<BIG>

The <BIG> element specifies that the enclosed text should be displayed, if practical, using a big font (compared with the current font). Supported by Netsape 2.0 and proposed for HTML 3.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000208
	Quoted Passage element 	<BLOCKQUOTE>

The BLOCKQUOTE element is used for extended quotations. 

Example:

<BLOCKQUOTE>
<P>But now I shall shortly proffer him the strength and the courage of the Geats in combat. He who has the right to it shall go once more to the mead-drinking with confident heart, after the morning light of another day, the sun clothed in ethereal radiance, shines from the south upon the children of men.
</BLOCKQUOTE>

Note: If %html.recommended is active, the HTML 3.2 DTD expects you to enclose plain text in a block element such as <P> .


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr

Content sequence:	an optional CREDIT must be the last element and only one is allowed.
~0000000209
	Body element 	<BODY>

The Body Element and Related Elements

Within the BODY element, you can structure text into paragraphs, and lists, as well as highlighting phrases and creating links, amongst other things.


Body Structure

The document body is composed from zero or more of the following elements:
  DIV - used for hierarchical containers 
  Headings (H1, to H6) - a set of headers of varying levels of importance
  Block elements - paragraphs, lists, forms, tables, figures and other elements
  Horizontal rules, and the ADDRESS element
  Text and character level markup including emphasis, images, math hypertext links and miscellaneous elements.

Note that text and character level markup are only permitted at this level for backwards compatibility with legacy documents. The HTML.Recommended flag enforces a more structured approach to authoring HTML documents.

The BODY element has the following attributes, all of which are optional:

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   BACKGROUND 	- "Background's URL"
   BGCOLOR 	- Background color
   TEXT 		- Text color
   LINK 		- Link color
   VLINK 		- Visited link color
   ALINK 		- Activated link color
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Optional
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	html, noframes

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr

Content sequence:	an optional BANNER must be the first element and only one is allowed.
~0000000210
	Line break element 	<BR>

Line break and tab elements can be used when you need a little more control over how the browser renders the text.

The <BR> element is used to force a line break.

For example:

  This is the first line<br>
  and this is the second<br>
  and this the third


Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   CLEAR 		- Clear flow

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000211
	Caption element 	<CAPTION>

The CAPTION element is used to label a table or figure. Use the align attribute to specify the position of the caption relative to the table/figure. For example:

  <CAPTION ALIGN=LEFT>The Niagara Falls</CAPTION>


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   ALIGN 		- Align
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	table

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000212
	Center element 	<CENTER>

The <CENTER> element is used to center the text.  All lines of text between the opening and closing CENTER tags are centered between the current left and right margins.

Notes
_____
Currently many elements, like paragraph <P> and headings <H1> - <H6>, support align attribute that can be used exactly for what the CENTER element was introduced a while ago by Netscape (and for more, like left and right align).  Netscape supports now (October 1996) both ways of centering the text, but in few situations CENTER works where align attribute does not.  Some browsers however do not support the CENTER element but support the align attributes for many elements!


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000213
	Citation element 	<CITE>

The <CITE> element is used to indicate the title of a book or other citation. It is typically rendered as italics. For example:

    He just couldn't get enough of <cite>The Grapes of Wrath</cite>.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000214
	Code element 	<CODE>

The <CODE> element indicates an example of code, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. The <CODE> element is intended for short words or phrases of code; the <PRE> block structuring element is more appropriate for multiple-line listings.

Example of use:

  The expression <code>x += 1</code>
  is short for <code>x = x + 1</code>.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000215
	Column properties element 	<COL>

The COL element is used to specify column based defaults for table properties. It is an empty element, and as such has no content, and shouldn't be given an end tag. Several COL elements may be given in succession. COL attributes override those of the parent COLGROUP element.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   WIDTH 		- Width
   SPAN 		- Span number
   ALIGN 		- Align
   CHAR 		- Align on character
   CHAROFF 	- Align offset
   VALIGN 		- Vertical align
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	colgroup, table

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000216
	Column Group element 	<COLGROUP>

The COLGROUP element (introduced recently) acts as a container for a group of columns, and allows you to set default properties for these columns.
In the absence of a COLGROUP element, all columns in the table are assumed to belong to a single column group.
Each COLGROUP element can contain zero or more COL elements.  COLGROUP requires a start tag,but the end tag may be omitted.  This is useful when defining a sequence of COLGROUP elements, for example:

  <TABLE FRAME=ALL RULES=COLS>
    <COLGROUP>
      <COL WIDTH="1*">
      <COL WIDTH="2*">
    <COLGROUP>
      <COL WIDTH="1*">
      <COL WIDTH="3*">
    <THEAD>
      <TR> ...
  </TABLE>


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   WIDTH 		- Width
   SPAN 		- Span number
   ALIGN 		- Align
   CHAR 		- Align on character
   CHAROFF 	- Align offset
   VALIGN 		- Vertical align
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	table

Contains:		col
~0000000217
	Glossary Term definition element 	<DD>

The DD tag element specifies a term definition, and follows one or more DT elements.

Note: The content model for term definitions is quite broad, including paragraphs, lists, preformatted text, forms, tables, figures and admonishments. Headers are not permitted. If %html.recommended is active, the HTML 3.2 DTD expects you to enclose plain text in a block element such as <P>.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	dl

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000218
	Term definition element 	<DFN>

The <DFN> element indicates the defining instance of a term.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000219
	Directory (O) element 	<DIR>

The MENU and DIR elements are superceded by extensions to the UL element. User agents are advised to continue to support them for the sake of legacy documents. Both MENU and DIR consist of one or more LI elements, similar to UL. MENU lists are typically rendered without bullets in a more compact style than UL. 
DIR lists are used to present lists of items containing up to 20 characters each. Items in a DIR list are arranged in columns. 

Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   COMPACT 	- Compact style

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		li

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	blockquote, center, dir, div, dl, form, hr, isindex, menu, multicol, noscript, ol, p, pre, table, ul
~0000000220
	Division element 	<DIV>

The <DIV> element is used with the CLASS attribute to represent different kinds of containers, e.g. chapter, section, abstract, or appendix. For example:

<DIV CLASS=Abstract>
<P>TheChieftain product range is the white hot hope for the coming year. This report sets out how to position Chieftain against competing products.
</DIV>


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   ALIGN 		- Align
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000221
	Glossary element 	<DL>

A definition list (glossary) is a list of terms and corresponding definitions.

Definition lists are typically formatted with the term on the left with the definition following on the right or on the next line. The definition text is typically indented with respect to the term.
An alternative format places the term left aligned in a wide margin and the definition on one or more lines to the right of the term. If the DT term does not fit in the DT column (one third of the display area), it may be extended across the page with the DD section moved to the next line, or it may be wrapped onto successive lines of the left hand column.


The opening list tag must be <DL>. It is followed by an optional list header (<LH>caption</LH>) and then by term names (<DT>) and definitions (<DD>). For example:

  <DL>
    <LH>List Header</LH>
    <DT>Term 1<dd>This is the definition of the first term.
    <DT>Term 2<dd>This is the definition of the second term.
  </DL>

The definition list element can take the COMPACT attribute, which suggests that a compact rendering be used, and is appropriate if the list elements are small and/or the entire list is large.

Note: Use the 'NOTE' element when you want to have an indented note. The practice of using <DD> elements without corresponding <DT> elements is deprecated.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   COMPACT 	- Compact style
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		dd, dt

Content sequence:	an optional list header (LH), then one or more terms (DT) and definitions (DD).
~0000000222
	Glossary Term element 	<DT>

The DT tag element specifies a term name, and you can have several terms per DD element.
It is used inside the definition list <DL>.

Note: Term names are restricted to character level markup only, including epmhasis, inline images and footnotes. Paragraph tags and other block-like elements such as headers are not permitted.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	dl

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000223
	Emphasis element 	<EM>

The <EM> element indicates an emphasized phrase, typically rendered as italics. For example:

  A singular subject <em>always</em> takes a singular verb.

While <EM> and <I> often give the same effect, use <EM> except where it is necessary in the text to refer to the formatting, as in "The italic parts are mandatory". This will help to ensure consistency between documents from various sources if, for example, the reader prefers to use color in place of italics for emphasis.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000224
	Embed element 	<EMBED>

The <EMBED> element is used to insert an "object" in an arbitrary format into the document.  It is supposed to be a generalization of the IMG element.  These objects will be processed by so-called "plug-in" applications.

NOTES
(1) The Netscape specification for EMBED allows inserting application-specific attributes.  As even their names are not defined they cannot be supported in asWedit.  If you really have to use them you must insert them manually with the HTML context mode switched off (use Ctrl+W to switch it off/on). Once you enter them restore the HTML context mode.
(2) NOTE that a work is being carried out in W3C to implement a new general OBJECT element in the future specifications of HTML (it has support from all major browser vendors).


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   SRC 		- "Object's URL"  	(Required)
   ALT 		- Alternative text
   ALIGN 		- Align
   WIDTH 		- Width
   HEIGHT 		- Height
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000225
	Font element 	<FONT>

The <FONT> element is used to change the font's size and color.  Note that this element is not supported by some browsers!

The size is specified using the SIZE attribute.  Valid values range from 1-7.  The default FONT size is 3.  The value given to size can optionally have a '+' or '-' character in front of it to specify that it is relative to the document baseFONT.  The default baseFONT is 3, and can be changed with the BASEFONT element.
The color is specified as hexadecimal color value.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   SIZE 		- Size
   COLOR 		- Color
   FACE 		- Face
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000226
	Form element 	<FORM>

Note you are not allowed to nest FORM elements!

HTML fill-out forms can be used for questionaires, hotel reservations, order forms, data entry and a wide variety of other applications.
The form is specified as part of an HTML document. The user fills in the form and then 'submits' it. The user agent then sends the form's contents as designated by the FORM element. Typically, this is to an HTTP server, but you can also email form contents for asynchronous processing.

Forms are created by placing input fields within paragraphs, preformatted text, lists and tables. This gives considerable flexibility in designing the layout of forms.

HTML 3.2 supports the following kinds of fields:

   Simple text fields
   Multi-line text fields
   Radio buttons
   Checkboxes
   Single/multiple choice menus
   File widgets for attaching files to forms.
   Submit buttons for sending form contents
   Reset buttons for resetting fields to their initial values
   Hidden fields for book keeping information


It is expected that future revisions to HTML will add support for audio fields, multi-row entry of database tables, and extending multi-line text fields to support a range of other data types, in addition to plain text. Client-side scripts will provide the means to constrain field values and to add new field types.



Example of a form

This fictitious example is a questionnaire.
It uses the INPUT element for simple text fields, radio buttons, checkboxes, and the submit and reset buttons. The TEXTAREA field is used for a multi-line text entry field.
The form fields are laid out with several paragraph elements and an unordered list. Notice the use of the NAME attribute to name each field:

<TITLE>Sample Questionaire</TITLE>
<H1>Sample Questionaire</H1>

<P>Please fill out this questionaire:

<FORM METHOD=post ACTION="http://www.hal.com/sample">
<P>Your name: <input name="name" size="48">
<P><input name="male" type=radio> Male
<P><input name="female" type=radio>Female
  Number in family: <input name="family" type=int>

<P>Cities in which you maintain a residence:

<UL>
<LI><input name="city" type=checkbox value="kent"> Kent
<LI><input name="city" type=checkbox value="miami"> Miami
<LI>Others <textarea name="other" cols=48 rows=4></textarea>
</UL>

<P>Nickname: <INPUT NAME="nickname" size ="42">

<P>Thank you for responding to this questionaire.
<P><INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT> <INPUT TYPE=RESET>
</FORM>


Every form must be enclosed within a FORM element. There can be several forms in a single document, but the FORM element can't be nested. The browser is responsible for handling the input focus, i.e. which field will currently get keyboard input. Many platforms have existing conventions for forms, for example, using Tab and Shift-Tab to move the keyboard focus forwards and backwards between fields, and using the Enter (aka Return) key to submit the form.

This standard defines and requires support for the HTTP access protocol only. Under any protocol, the submitted contents of the form logically consist of a list of name/value pairs where the names are given by the NAME attributes of the various fields in the FORM. Each field will normally be given a distinct name. Several radio buttons can share the same name, as this is how you specify that they belong to the same control group - at any time, only one button in the group can be selected.


Note: The contents list of name/value pairs excludes unselected radio buttons and checkboxes. In general, any field with a null value can be omitted from the contents list.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   ACTION 		- Action's URL
   ENCTYPE 	- Submitted data format
   METHOD 		- HTTP method
   TARGET 		- Target frame name

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	form
~0000000227
	Frame element 	<FRAME>

The <FRAME> element is used to define a single frame in a frame set (FRAMESET).


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   SRC 		- "Frame's URL"
   NAME 		- Name
   MARGINWIDTH 	- Margin width
   MARGINHEIGHT 	- Margin height
   NORESIZE 	- Resizable
   BORDERCOLOR 	- Border Color
   SCROLLING 	- Scrollbars
   FRAMEBORDER 	- Frame border

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	frameset

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000228
	Frame Set element 	<FRAMESET>

The <FRAMESET> element is used to define a frame set and is the main container for a Frame (see the the Introduction to Frames below).

A frame document has no BODY, and no tags that would normally be placed in the BODY can appear before the FRAMESET tag, or the FRAMESET will be ignored.  The FRAMESET tag has a matching end tag, and within the FRAMESET you can only have other nested FRAMESET tags, FRAME tags, or the NOFRAMES tag.

The FRAMESET tag can be nested inside other FRAMESET tags.  In this case the complete subframe is placed in the space that would be used for the corresponding frame if this had been a FRAME tag instead of a nested FRAMESET.

Introduction to Frames
______________________
Frames (implemented in Netscape Navigator 2.0) allow you to divide Web pages into multiple, scrollable regions.
Each region, or frame, has several features:

  1. It can be given an individual URL, so it can load information independent of the other frames on the page;
  2. It can be given a NAME, allowing it to be targeted by other URLs, and;
  3. It can resize dynamically if the user changes the window's size.

These properties offer new possibilities:

  1. Elements that the user should always see, such as control bars, copyright notices, and title graphics can be placed in a static, individual frame.  As the user navigates the site in "live" frames, the static frame's contents remain fixed, even though adjoining frames redraw.
  2. Table of contents are more functional. One frame can contain TOC links that, when clicked, display results in an adjoining frame.
  3. Frames side-by-side design allows queries to be asked and answered on the same page, with one frame holding the query form, and the other presenting the results.

A Frame Document has a basic structure very much like your normal HTML document, except the BODY container is replaced by a FRAMESET container which describes the sub-HTML documents, or Frames, that will make up the page.  For example:

 <HTML>

   <HEAD>
      <TITLE> ... </TITLE>
   </HEAD>

   <FRAMESET>

   </FRAMESET>

 </HTML>

Remember that frames are generated by three things: FRAMESET tag(s), FRAME tags and frame documents.
-----


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   COLS 		- Columns
   ROWS 		- Rows
   BORDER 		- Border
   BORDERCOLOR 	- Border Color
   FRAMEBORDER 	- Frame border

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	frameset, html

Contains:		frame, frameset, noframes
~0000000229
	Heading elements 	<H1>, <H2>, ..., <H6>

	Headings 	(H1, H2, ..., H6)

HTML defines six levels of headings. A heading element implies all the font changes, paragraph breaks before and after, and any white space necessary to render the heading. The heading elements are H1, H2, H3, H4, H5, and H6 with H1 being the highest (or most important) level and H6 the least. For example:

  <H1>This is a top level heading</H1> Here is some text.

  <H2>Second level heading</H2> Here is some more text.

Use the DIV element together with header elements when you want to make the hierarchical structure of a document explicit. This is needed as header elements themselves only contain the text of the header, and do not imply any structural division of documents into sections. Header elements have the same content model as paragraphs, that is text and character level markup, such as character emphasis, inline images, form fields and math.

Headers play a related role to lists in structuring documents, and it is common to number headers or to include a graphic that acts like a bullet in lists. 


Word Wrapping

User agents are free to wrap lines at whitespace characters so as to ensure lines fit within the current window size. Use the  &nbsp  entity for the non-breaking space character, when you want to make sure that a line isn't broken! 

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   ALIGN 		- Align
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, div, form, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000235
	Head element 	<HEAD>

The HEAD element has no attributes and the start and end tag can always be safely omitted as they can be readily inferred by the parser.

Information in the HEAD element corresponds to the top part of a memo or mail message. It describes properties of the document such as the title, the document toolbar, and additional meta-information. There is no intended significance to the order of elements in the document head. Note that the TITLE element is always required. In fact, the minimal HTML 3.2 document consists of the TITLE element alone!

Note however that using HEAD might allow future extensions to be used in the HEAD context and that asWedit works better when the HEAD is present.

Within the HEAD element, only certain elements are allowed.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Optional
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	html

Contains:		base, isindex, title, link, meta, script, style

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Inclusion elements:	link, meta, script, style
~0000000236
	Horizontal rule element 	<HR>

The <HR> element is used for horizontal rules that act as dividers between sections.
The SRC attribute can be used to designate a custom graphic, otherwise subclass HR with the CLASS attribute and specify the appropriate rendering with an associated style sheet.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   WIDTH 		- Width
   SIZE 		- Size
   NOSHADE 	- Shadow
   ALIGN 		- Align

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000237
	HTML element 	<HTML>

HTML 3.2 documents formally have the following structure:

 <HTML>
   <HEAD> --head elements ...--
   <BODY> --body elements ...--
 </HTML>

Note that both the start and end tag for the HTML element can be omitted.

Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   VERSION 	- DTD version

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Optional
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	

Contains:		body, frameset, head

Content sequence:	a HEAD element if exists must preceed the BODY element.
~0000000238
	Italic element 	<I>

The <I> element indicates italic text. Where italic typography is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000239
	Image element 	<IMG>

The <IMG> tag is used to incorporate in-line graphics (typically icons or small graphics) into an HTML document.
This element is NOT intended for embedding other HTML text. 

Example:

  <IMG SRC="tajmahal.gif" ALT="The Taj Mahal">

Browsers that cannot display in-line images ignore the IMG element unless it contains the ALT attribute. Note that some browsers can display (or print) linked graphics but not in-line graphics. If the graphic is essential, you may want to create a link to it rather than to put it in-line. If the graphic is essentially decorative, then IMG is appropriate.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   SRC 		- "Custom image's URL"  	(Required)
   ALT 		- Alternative text
   ALIGN 		- Align
   WIDTH 		- Width
   HEIGHT 		- Height
   ISMAP 		- Sensitive Map
   USEMAP 		- Client usemap
   BORDER 		- Border
   HSPACE 		- Horizontal spacing
   VSPACE 		- Vertical spacing
   VRML 		- VRML (N)
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000240
	Input element element 	<INPUT>

The INPUT element is used for a wide variety of different kinds of entry fields within HTML fill-out forms. The TYPE attribute determines the type of field.

Single-line text fields (type=text)

These are used for entering short text strings, like peoples names, numbers and dates. The visible width of the field in characters can be set with the SIZE attribute. When using a variable pitch font, the SIZE attribute sets the width in en units (half the point size). The user should be able to enter more than this, with the contents of the field scrolling horizontally as needed. The MAXLENGTH attribute can be used to specify the maximum number of characters permitted for the string.

If the TYPE attribute is missing, the INPUT element is assumed to be a single-line text field. The NAME attribute is used to identify the field when the form's contents are converted to the name/value list.
The VALUE field can be used to initialize the text string. Character entities can be used include accented characters in this string.

Note: Use the <TEXTAREA> element for multi-line text entry fields.


Password fields (type=password)

This is the same as single-line text fields except that each character typed is echoed by a shadow character, e.g. an asterisk or the space character. The user can see how many characters that have been typed but not what was typed.


Checkbox fields (type=checkbox)

A checkbox field has two states: selected and unselected.Its name/value pair only appear in the submitted data when selected.
Checkboxes are used for boolean attributes. They can also be used for attributes which can take multiple values at the same time. This is represented by a checkbox for each optional value, with the same name for each of the checkboxes. Unselected checkboxes don't appear in the submitted data. Both NAME and VALUE are required for checkboxes. To initialize the checkbox to its selected state, include the CHECKED attribute.
Checkboxes provide an alternative to using the <SELECT> element for multiple-choice menus.


Radio Buttons (type=radio)

Suitable for attributes which can take a single value from a set of alternatives. All radio buttons in the same group should be given the same NAME. Only the selected radio button in the group generates a name/value pair in the submitted data. Both NAME and VALUE are required for radio buttons. To initialize the radio button to its selected state, include the CHECKED attribute.
Radio buttons offer an alternative to using the <SELECT> element for single choice menus.


Range fields (type=range)

These allow the user to pick a numeric value in between a lower and an upper bound. The range is specified with the MIN and MAX attributes, as in:

   <input name=rating type=range min=1 max=10>

If either the lower or upper bound is a real number, then the range is real valued, otherwise it is restricted to integer values only. The VALUE attribute can be used to initialize the range field. It an error for the value to lie outside the specified range. The default value is midway between the lower and upper limits.


Scribble on Image (type=scribble)

These fields allow the user to scribble with a pointing device (such as a mouse or pen) on top of a predefined image. The image is specified as a URI with the SRC attribute. If the user agent can't display images, or can't provide a means for users to scribble on the image, then the field should be treated as a text field. The VALUE attribute can be used to initialize the text field for these users. It is ignored when the user agent provides scribble on image support.


File Attachments (type=file)

This allows users to attach one or more files to be submitted with the form's contents. The ACCEPT attribute can be used to specify a comma separated list of MIME content types. These are used to restrict the kinds of files that can be attached to the form. For instance:

  <input name=pictures type=file accept="image/*">

This example restricts files to match "image/*", i.e. to registered MIME image types. For windows based user agents, it is suggested that file fields display the name of the last file attached, with the ability to open a file dialog box to view the complete list of files attached so far. The accept attribute then acts to specify the filter on the list of candidate files.


Hidden fields (type=hidden)

No field is presented to the user, but the content of the field is sent with the submitted form. This value may be used to transmit state information about client/server interaction, for instance a transaction identifier. These fields are needed because HTTP servers don't preserve state information from one request to the next.


Submit buttons (type=submit)

These are buttons that when pressed submit the form's data. You can use the VALUE attribute to provide a non-editable label to be displayed on the button.  The default label is application-specific. A graphic can be specified for the submit button using the SRC attribute.

The submit button normally makes no contribution to the submitted data. The exception is when the field includes a NAME attribute, in which case, the name and value attributes are included with the submitted data. This can be used to distinguish which submit button the user pressed.


Image fields (type=image)

These act like submit buttons but include the location where the user clicked on the image. The image is specified with the SRC attribute.


Reset buttons (type=reset)

When a reset button is pressed, the form's fields are reset to their specified initial values.  The label to be displayed on the button may be specified just as for the SUBMIT button.
Likewise, the SRC attribute can be used to specify a graphic.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   TYPE 		- Type of accepted data
   CHECKED 	- Initial state
   NAME 		- Name
   VALUE 		- Value
   SIZE 		- Size
   MAXLENGTH 	- Maximum length
   SRC 		- "Custom image's URL"
   ALIGN 		- Align
   ACCEPT 		- Accept content
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000241
	Searchable index element 	<ISINDEX>

The ISINDEX element indicates that the user agent should allow the user to search an index by giving keywords.  As well as reading the document, the reader may use a keyword search.

The document can be queried with a keyword search by adding a question mark to the end of the document address, followed by a list of keywords separated by plus signs.
In other words, the <ISINDEX> element represents a set of hyperlinks. The user can choose from the set by providing keywords to the user agent.  The user agent computes the head URI by appending '?' and the keywords to the base URI. The keywords are escaped according to URL requirements and joined by '+'.  For example, if a document contains:

  <BASE HREF="http://host.domain/index">
  <ISINDEX>

and the user provides the keywords 'apple' and 'berry', then the user agent must access the resource 'http://host/index?apple+berry'.

Note: A server normally generates the ISINDEX tag automatically.  If added by hand to an HTML document, the browser assumes that the server can handle a search on the document.  Obviously the server must have this capability for it to work; simply adding <ISINDEX> in the document is not enough to make searches happen if the server does not have a search engine!


Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   PROMPT 		- Prompt message

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, head, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000242
	Keyboard element 	<KBD>

The <KBD> element indicates text typed by a user, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. This is commonly used in instruction manuals. For example:

  Enter <kbd>FIND IT</kbd> to search the database.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000243
	List Item element 	<LI>

The list item element (LI) is used for items in both ordered and unordered lists.

Note: The content model for list items is quite broad, including paragraphs, lists, preformatted text, forms, tables, figures and admonishments. Headers are not permitted.
If %html.recommended is active, the HTML 3.2 DTD expects you to enclose plain text in a block element such as <P> .

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   VALUE 		- New number
   TYPE 		- Numbering style
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	dir, menu, ol, ul

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000244
	Link from this document element 	<LINK>

The <LINK> element indicates a relationship between the document and some other object. A document may have any number of LINK elements. The LINK element is empty (does not have a closing tag), but takes the same attributes as the anchor element.

LINK elements can be used in principle: 

 (1) for document specific navigation toolbars/menus when used with the LINK element in document head 
 (2) to control how collections of html nodes are rendered into printed documents


The important attributes are:

  REL	This defines the relationship defined by the link.

  REV	This defines a reverse relationship. A link from document A to document B with "REV=relation" expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with "REL=relation". "REV=made" is sometimes used to identify the document author, either the author's email address with a "mailto" URI, or a link to the author's home page.

  HREF	This names an object using the URI notation.


Using LINK to define document specific toolbars
_______________________________________________
An important use of the LINK element is to define a toolbar of navigation buttons or an equivalent mechanism such as menu items.

LINK relationship values reserved for toolbars are:

  REL=Home	- The link references a home page or the top of some hierarchy.

  REL=ToC	- The link references a document serving as a table of contents.

  REL=Index	- The link references a document providing an index for the current document.

  REL=Glossary	- The link references a document providing a glossary of terms that pertain to the current document.

  REL=Copyright	- The link references a copyright statement for the current document.

  REL=Up	- When the document forms part of a hierarchy, this link references the immediate parent of the current document.

  REL=Next	- The link references the next document to visit in a guided tour.

  REL=Previous	- The link references the previous document in a guided tour.

  REL=Help	- The link references a document offering help, e.g. describing the wider context and offering further links to relevant documents. This is aimed at reorienting users who have lost their way.

  REL=Bookmark	- Bookmarks are used to provide direct links to key entry points into an extended document. The TITLE attribute may be used to label the bookmark. Several bookmarks may be defined in each document, and provide a means for orienting users in extended documents.


An example of toolbar LINK elements:

  <LINK REL=Previous HREF=doc31.html>
  <LINK REL=Next HREF=doc33.html>
  <LINK REL=Bookmark TITLE="Order Form" HREF=doc56.html>




Using LINK to include a Document Banner
_______________________________________
The LINK element can be used with "REL=Banner" to reference another document to be used as banner for this document. This is typically used for corporate logos, navigation aids, and other information which shouldn't be scrolled with the rest of the document.
For example:

  <LINK REL=Banner HREF=banner.html>

The use of a LINK element in this way, allows a banner to be shared between several documents, with the benefit of being able to separately cache the banner. Rather than using a linked banner, you can also include the banner in the document itself, using the BANNER element.


Link to an associated Style Sheet
_________________________________
The LINK element can be used with "REL=StyleSheet" to reference a style sheet to be used to control the way the current document is rendered.
For example:

  <LINK REL=StyleSheet HREF=housestyle.dsssl>


Other uses of the LINK element
______________________________
Additional relationship names have been proposed, but do not form part of the HTML 3.2 specification. Servers may also allow links to be added by those who do not have the right to alter the body of a document.



NOTE:
See Internet Draft: draft-ietf-html-relrev-00.txt for information on proposed relationship values. 

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   HREF 		- Link destination
   REL 		- Link relationship(s)
   REV 		- Reverse relationship(s)
   TITLE 		- Title
   ID 		- Link end ID

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	head

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000245
	Image Map element 	<MAP>

The different regions of the image (clients-side image maps) are described using a MAP element.  The map describes each region in the image and indicates where it links to. The basic format for the MAP element is as follows:

  <MAP NAME="name">
   <AREA [SHAPE="shape"] COORDS="x,y,..." [HREF="reference"]
	 [NOHREF] [ALT="alt"]>
  </MAP>


An arbitrary number of AREA tags may be specified.  If two areas intersect, the one which appears first in the map definition takes precedence in the overlapping region.  Multiple areas may share the same destination to create composite shapes.  Any portion of an image which is not described by an AREA tag defaults to having no action.


Backwards compatibility
_______________________
The client-side imagemaps extension was specifically designed to provide a variety of fallback options for browsers which do not support it.

The following three examples show markup demonstrating different fallback mechanisms possible:

This image map will work with any graphical browser:

  <A HREF="/cgi-bin/imagemap/pic1">
  <IMG SRC="pic1.jpg" USEMAP="maps.html#map1" ISMAP></A>

  Clicking here will take you to a page with an error message if
  you don't have client-side image map support:
  <A HREF="no_csim.html">
  <IMG SRC="pic2.jpg" USEMAP="maps.html#map2"></A>

   You can only click here if your browser supports client-side
   image maps: <IMG SRC="pic3.jpg" USEMAP="maps.html#map3">


The following example shows the use of a map in the same file as the image:

  <IMG SRC="picture.jpg" USEMAP="#mymap">


The following example defines a simple map which describes an image with a circle in the middle overlapping two large rectangles:

  <MAP NAME="welcomemap">
  <AREA SHAPE=CIRCLE COORDS="50,50,40" HREF="about_us.html"
	ALT="About our company">
  <AREA SHAPE=RECT COORDS="0,0,100,50" HREF="products.html"
	ALT="Our products">
  <AREA SHAPE=RECT COORDS="0,51,100,100 HREF="technology.html"
	ALT="Technology for the next century">
  </MAP>


Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   NAME 		- Name

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		area
~0000000246
	Menu (O) element 	<MENU>

The MENU and DIR elements are superceded by extensions to the UL element. User agents are advised to continue to support them for the sake of legacy documents. Both MENU and DIR consist of one or more LI elements, similar to UL. MENU lists are typically rendered without bullets in a more compact style than UL. 
DIR lists are used to present lists of items containing up to 20 characters each. Items in a DIR list are arranged in columns. 

Detailed specification:

Attribute:

   COMPACT 	- Compact style

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		li

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	blockquote, center, dir, div, dl, form, hr, isindex, menu, multicol, noscript, ol, p, pre, table, ul
~0000000247
	Meta-information element 	<META>

The <META> element is an extensible container for use in identifying specialized document meta-information.
Meta-information has two main functions:
  - to provide a means to discover that the data set
    exists and how it might be obtained or accessed;
  - to document the content, quality, and features
    of a data set, indicating its fitness for use.

Each <META> element specifies a name/value pair. If multiple META elements are provided with the same name, their combined contents (concatenated as a comma-separated list) is the value associated with that name.

NOTE - The <META> element should not be used where a specific element, such as <TITLE>, would be more appropriate. Rather than a <META> element with a URI as the value of the CONTENT attribute, use a <LINK> element.

HTTP servers may read the content of the document <HEAD> to generate header fields corresponding to any elements defining a value for the attribute HTTP-EQUIV.

NOTE - The method by which the server extracts document meta-information is unspecified and not mandatory. The <META> element only provides an extensible mechanism for identifying and embedding document meta-information; how it may be used is up to the individual server implementation and the HTML user agent.

For example, if the document contains:

    <META HTTP-EQUIV="Expires"
      CONTENT="Tue, 04 Dec 1995 21:29:02 GMT">
    <meta http-equiv="Keywords" CONTENT="Fred">
    <META HTTP-EQUIV="Reply-to"
      content="field@host.domain.edu (Roy Field)">
    <Meta Http-equiv="Keywords" CONTENT="Barney">

then the server may include the following header fields:

    Expires: Tue, 04 Dec 1995 21:29:02 GMT
    Keywords: Fred, Barney
    Reply-to: field@host.domain.edu (Roy Field)

as part of the HTTP response to a 'GET' or 'HEAD' request for that document.

An HTTP server must not use the <META> element to form an HTTP response header unless the HTTP-EQUIV attribute is present.

An HTTP server may disregard any <META> elements that specify information controlled by the HTTP server, for example 'Server', 'Date' and 'Last-modified'.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CONTENT 	- Content (HTTP response)  	(Required)
   NAME 		- Name
   HTTP-EQUIV 	- -equiv_T HTTP response header-equiv_T

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	head

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000248
	Multi column element 	<MULTICOL>

This element is used to implement a multi column layout (like in newspapers).  It has been implemented in Netscape Navigator 3.0.
The MULTICOL element is used  with COLS, GUTTER, and WIDTH attributes to control the number of columns, the space between the columns, and the width of individual columns, respectively.

Example:
To achieve two column layout with spacing between them set to 20 pixels you could use the following:

  <MULTICOL COLS=2 GUTTER=20 WIDTH=100%>

  ....

  </MULTICOL>


The MULTICOL element can be nested to achieve nested multicolumn layout.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   COLS 		- Number of columns  	(Required)
   WIDTH 		- Width
   GUTTER 		- Gutter

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000249
	No line break (N) element 	<NOBR>

The NOBR element stands for NO BReak (Netscape extension).  This means all the text between the starting and the closing NOBR tags cannot have line breaks inserted between them.  While NOBR is essential for those odd character sequences you really don't want broken, please be careful; long text strings inside of NOBR elements can look rather odd.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000250
	No frames element 	<NOFRAMES>

The <NOFRAMES> element is used to encapsulate alternative content that is viewable by clients that do not support Frames.  A Frame-capable client ignores all tags between start and end of NOFRAMES tags.

Only one NOFRAMES element per document is allowed.  If used it must be defined as the first element in the first FRAMESET element.

The alternative content is in fact a "body" of a standard HTML document.

FRAMESET/NOFRAMES/BODY hierarchy note
_____________________________________
asWedit requires the BODY tag to be the first one inside NOFRAMES (it is NOT optional in this context).  The program will automatically insert the required BODY tags at the time you insert NOFRAMES element (if they do not exist already).
The content model for NOFRAMES might cause a small problem if you want to change your current legal HTML document into a Frames one.  As BODY must be inside NOFRAMES, NOFRAMES inside FRAMESET and the FRAMESET must not contain body elements you cannot insert the FRAMESET/NOFRAMES construction without breaking the asWedit context HTML mode.  To put the body of your current HTML document inside such elements do the following:
  1. Highlight the whole body text of your document but without the BODY tags and Cut it to the Clipboard (Ctrl+X);
  2. Delete the BODY tag(s) if your document contains them (position the cursor inside the <BODY> tag and use Edit|Delete Tag command);
  3. Insert the FRAMESET element (HTML|Frames|Frame Set);
  4. Insert the NOFRAMES element (HTML|Frames|No frames); this will automatically insert the BODY element;
  5. Paste the contents from the Clipboard (Ctrl+V).

There are of course other ways of doing the above.  If something goes wrong just use a sequence of undo actions (Edit|Undo).


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	frameset

Contains:		body
~0000000251
	No script element 	<NOSCRIPT>

The <NOSCRIPT> is used to display alternate content for browsers not supporting the <SCRIPT> element or when the user has disabled JavaScript in the browser.
HTML enclosed within the element is displayed by a non-JavaScript browser; text enclosed within the tag is hidden and ignored by for example, Netscape Navigator. Use this tag to specify alternate content for browsers that do not support JavaScript, or in case the user has disabled JavaScript in the browser's options.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000252
	Ordered List element 	<OL>

An ordered list typically is a numbered list of items.

The OL START attribute can be used to initialize the sequence number (by default it is initialized to 1). You can set it later on with the VALUE attribute on LI elements. Both of these attributes expect integer values.  You can't indicate that numbering should be continued from a previous list, or to skip missing values without giving an explicit number. 

The COMPACT attribute can be used as a hint to the user agent to render lists in a more compact style. The OL TYPE attribute allows you to set the numbering style for list items.


Example:

  <OL>
    <LH>Meeting Agenda</LH>
    <LI>Minutes of the last meeting
    <LI>Do we need yet more meetings?
    <LI>Any other business
  </OL>


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   COMPACT 	- Compact style
   START 		- Start number
   TYPE 		- Numbering style
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		li

Content sequence:	an optional list header (LH), then one or more list items (LI).
~0000000253
	Option element 	<OPTION>

The OPTION element can only occur within a SELECT element. It represents a possible choice. It can only contain text, together with SGML entities for accented characters etc.

When the form is submitted, the NAME of the enclosing SELECT element is paired with the OPTION's VALUE attribute to contribute a name/value pair for the selection. Unselected options don't contribute to the form's submitted data. You can initialize the option to its selected state by including the SELECT attribute.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   VALUE 		- Value
   SELECTED 	- Initially selected
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	select

Contains:		#PCDATA
~0000000254
	Paragraph element 	<P>

The <P> element is used to define a paragraph. The exact rendering (indentation, leading etc.) is not defined and may be a function of other tags, style sheets, etc.
The ALIGN attribute can be used to explicitly specify the horizontal alignment. Paragraph elements have the same content model as headers, that is text and character level markup, such as character emphasis, inline images, form fields and math.

Example:

  <H1>The heading precedes the first paragraph</H1>
  <P>Here is the text of the first paragraph.  <P>and
  this is the text of the second paragraph.

The text up to the next <P> element is treated as being part of the current paragraph. This is an example of how SGML allows end tags like </P> to be left out where they can be inferred from the context.

Word Wrapping
_____________
User agents are free to wrap lines at whitespace characters so as to ensure lines fit within the current window size. Use the  &nbsp;  entity for the non-breaking space character, when you want to make sure that a line isn't broken! Alternatively, use the NOWRAP attribute to disable word wrapping and the <BR> element to force line breaks where desired.

Note: Do not use empty paragraphs to add white space around headings, lists or other elements. White space is added by the rendering software.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   ALIGN 		- Align
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	address, blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000255
	Parameter element 	<PARAM>

The <PARAM> element is used to define extra parameters for the current applet.

The applet invokes the getParameter method to get a String that contains the value specified in the PARAM element.  See the Applet class documentation for more information.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   NAME 		- Name  	(Required)
   VALUE 		- Value

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	applet

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000256
	Preformatted element 	<PRE>

Preformatted text between the start and end PRE tag is rendered using a fixed with font, in addition whitespace characters are treated literally. The spacing and line breaks are rendered directly, unlike other elements, for which repeated whitespace characters are collapsed to a single space character and line breaks introduced automatically.

Line breaks within the text are rendered as a move to the beginning of the next line. The exceptions are line breaks immediately following the starting PRE tag or immediately preceding the ending PRE tag, which should be ignored.

The <P> tag should be avoided, but for robustness, user agents are recommended to treat these tags as line breaks.

Anchor elements, and character highlighting elements may be used.

FORM elements may be included, and the fixed width font exploited to control layout (the TAB or TABLE elements give similar control for normal text though).

Block-like elements such as headers, lists and TABLES should be avoided.

The horizontal tab character (encoded in US ASCII and ISO 8859-1 as decimal 9) should be interpreted as the smallest nonzero  number of spaces which will leave the number of characters so far on the line as a multiple of 8. Its use is deprecated!


For example, a verse from Shelley (To a Skylark):

  <PRE>
    Higher still and higher
      From the earth thou springest
    Like a cloud of fire;
      The blue deep thou wingest,
    And singing still dost soar, and soaring ever singest.
  </PRE>


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   WIDTH 		- Width
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, i, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, spacer, span, strike, strong, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	big, font, img, small, sub, sup
~0000000257
	Strikeout element 	<S>

The <S> element specifies that the enclosed text should be displayed with a horizontal line striking through the text.  If this is not practical, an alternative mapping is allowed.  Supported by Netscape Navigator 2.0 and proposed for HTML 3.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000258
	Sample element 	<SAMP>

The <SAMP> element indicates a sequence of literal characters, typically rendered in a mono-spaced font. For example:

  The only word containing the letters <samp>mt</samp> is dreamt.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000259
	Script element 	<SCRIPT>

The <SCRIPT> element is used to include some scripting language in the document. It is primarily used with Netscape's JavaScript. Usually the script is embeded in tha same document, but from version 3.0 of Netscape Navigator you can supply a SRC attribute to specify a URL that loads the text of a script. 

Note that in the current HTML 3.2 DTD the context of script is declared as #PCDATA, i.e. the script is parsed by the parser (this might be in conflict with some of the usage of SCRIPT seen on the Web).

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   SRC 		- "Source URL"
   LANGUAGE 	- Language

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, head, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	link, meta, script, style
~0000000260
	Selection of option(s) element 	<SELECT>

The <SELECT> element is used for single and multiple choice menus.
It is generally rendered as a drop-down or pop-up menu, and offers a more compact alternative to using radio buttons for single choice menus, or checkboxes for multiple choice menus.

Example:

<SELECT NAME="flavor">
 <OPTION VALUE=a>Vanilla
 <OPTION VALUE=b>Strawberry
 <OPTION VALUE=c>Rum and Raisin
 <OPTION VALUE=d>Peach and Orange
</SELECT>

This is a single choice menu. When you want a multiple choice menu, you need to include the MULTIPLE attribute with the SELECT element, e.g.
 <SELECT MULTIPLE NAME="flavor">.

The NAME attribute is used when creating the name/value list describing the form's contents. A name/value pair is contributed for each selected option. The value is taken from the OPTION's VALUE attribute, and defaults to the content of the OPTION when the VALUE attribute is missing.

For single choice menus, if no option is initially marked as selected, then the first item listed is selected. This is inappropriate for multiple choice menus, though.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   NAME 		- Formal name  	(Required)
   MULTIPLE 	- Multiple selections
   SIZE 		- Size
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		option
~0000000261
	Small element 	<SMALL>

The <SMALL> element specifies that the enclosed text should be displayed, if practical, using a small font (compared with normal text).  Supported by Netscape Navigator 2.0 and proposed for HTML 3.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000262
	Spacer element 	<SPACER>

The <SPACER> element (implemented in Netscape Navigator 3.0) is used to control the vertical and horizontal whitespace that appears on the HTML page. 
You can control the horizontal whitespace that appears between words in a line, the vertical whitespace that appears between lines on a page, and you can set up arbitrary rectangular spacing elements (usually placed in margins to make text flow around them, but they can also be placed within the text flow of a line). The new SPACER tag has TYPE, SIZE, WIDTH, HEIGHT, and ALIGN attributes.
The SPACER tag allows HTML developers to enhance the appearance of their documents, for instance, by indenting a paragraph. It can be used to control vertical white space.
The SPACER tag can also be used like an invisible IMG tag. That is, it can have a WIDTH and HEIGHT, and an ALIGN setting.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   TYPE 		- Type
   ALIGN 		- Align
   SIZE 		- Size
   WIDTH 		- Width
   HEIGHT 		- Height

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000263
	Span element 	<SPAN>

The <SPAN> element is used to mark part of the document that does not have a structural meaning. It is proposed to be used with styles.

Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000264
	Strike element 	<STRIKE>

The <STRIKE> element specifies that the enclosed text should be displayed with a horizontal line striking through the text.  If this is not practical, an alternative mapping is allowed.  
Note that the <S> element means exactly the same and is much shorter.  The asWedit program supports both tags but on the menu only the shorter one is available.



Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000265
	Strong element 	<STRONG>

The <STRONG> element indicates strong emphasis, typically rendered in bold. For example:

  <strong>STOP</strong>, or I'll say "<strong>STOP</strong>" again!


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000266
	Style element 	<STYLE>

The <STYLE> element provides a means for including rendering information using a specified style notation. Information in the STYLE element overrides client defaults and that of linked style sheets. It allows authors to specify overrides, while for the most part using a generic style sheet, and as such improves the effectiveness of caching schemes for linked style sheets. 

Stylistic rules will in general match tag names and attribute values for elements in the document body. Context sensitive rules may be used for such purposes as rendering drop down capitals for the initial letter in the first paragraph following a header.

Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	head

Contains:		#PCDATA

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	link, meta, script, style
~0000000267
	Subscript and Superscript elements	<sub> and <sup>

The SUB and SUP elements are used for subscripts and superscripts respectively, and are preferably rendered in reduced font. 


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000269
	Table element 	<TABLE>

Table elements start with an optional CAPTION element, optionally followed by one or more COL or COLGROUP elements, then an optional THEAD, an optional TFOOT, and finally one or more TBODY elements.

Introduction to HTML Tables
___________________________
Tables start with an optional caption followed by one or more rows.  Each row is formed by one or more cells, which are differentiated into header and data cells.  Cells can be merged across rows and columns, and include attributes assisting rendering to speech and braille, or for exporting table data into databases.  The model provides limited support for control over appearence, for example horizontal and vertical alignment of cell contents, border styles and cell margins.  You can further affect this by grouping rows and columns together.  Tables can contain a wide range of content, such as headers, lists, paragraphs, forms, figures, preformatted text and even nested tables.

Example

  <TABLE BORDER>
    <CAPTION>A test table with merged cells</CAPTION>
    <TR><TH ROWSPAN=2><TH COLSPAN=2>Average
	<TH ROWSPAN=2>other<BR>category<TH>Misc
    <TR><TH>height<TH>weight
    <TR><TH ALIGN=LEFT>males<TD>1.9<TD>0.003
    <TR><TH ALIGN=LEFT ROWSPAN=2>females<TD>1.7<TD>0.002
  </TABLE>

On a dumb terminal, this would be rendered something like:

	     A test table with merged cells
   /--------------------------------------------------\
   |          |      Average      |  other   |  Misc  |
   |          |-------------------| category |--------|
   |          |  height |  weight |          |        |
   |-----------------------------------------|--------|
   | males    | 1.9     | 0.003   |          |        |
   |-----------------------------------------|--------|
   | females  | 1.7     | 0.002   |          |        |
   \--------------------------------------------------/


Frame and rules
_______________
The FRAME attribute controls the appearence of the border frame around the table while the RULES attribute determines the choice of rulings within the table. A finer level of control will be supported via rendering annotations. The STYLE attribute can be used for including rendering information with individual elements. Further rendering information can be given with the STYLE element in the document head or via linked style sheets.


Table sections
______________
Following the CALS table model, this specification allows table rows to be grouped into head and body and foot sections. This simplifies the representation of rendering information and can be used to repeat table head and foot rows when breaking tables across page boundaries, or to provide fixed headers above a scrollable body panel. In the markup, the foot section is placed before the body sections. This is an optimization shared with CALS for dealing with very long tables. It allows the foot to be rendered without having to wait for the entire table to be processed.



Large tables and incremental display
____________________________________
For large tables or slow network connections, it is desirable to be able to start displaying the table before all of the data has been received. The default window width for most user agents shows about 80 characters, and the graphics for many HTML pages are designed with these defaults in mind. Authors can provide a hint to user agents to activate incremental display of table contents. This feature requires the author to specify the number of columns, and includes provision for control of table width and the relative widths of different columns.

For incremental display, the browser needs the number of columns and their widths. The default width of the table is the current window size (width="100%"). This can be altered by including a WIDTH attribute in the TABLE start tag. By default all columns have the same width, but you can specify column widths with one or more COL elements before the table data starts.

When incremental display is desired, the best is to explicitly specify the number of columns in the TABLE start tag.


Alignment Inheritance Order
___________________________
Alignment properties can be included with most of the table elements: COL, THEAD, TBODY, TFOOT, TR, TH and TD.  When rendering cells, horizontal alignment is determined by columns in preference to rows, while for vertical alignment, the rows are more important than the columns.  The following table gives the detailed precedence order for each attribute, where X > Y denotes that X takes precedence over Y::

  ALIGN, CHAR and CHAROFF:

   cells > columns > column groups > rows > row groups > default

  VALIGN, LANG, DIR and STYLE:

    cells > rows > row groups > columns > column groups > table > default

Where cells are defined by TH and TD elements; rows by TR elements; row groups by THEAD, TBODY and TFOOT elements, columns by COL elements; and column groups by COLGROUP and COL elements. Note that there is no inheritance mechanism for the CLASS attribute.

Properties defined on cells take precedence over inherited properties, but are in turn over-ridden by alignment properties on elements within cells.  In the absence of an ALIGN attribute along the inheritance path, the recommended default alignment for table cell contents is ALIGN=LEFT for table data and ALIGN=CENTER for table headers.  The recommended default for vertical alignment is VALIGN=MIDDLE.  These defaults are chosen to match the behaviour of the widely deployed Netscape implementation.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   BORDER 		- Frame width
   FRAME 		- Frame side(s) to render
   RULES 		- Rules to render
   WIDTH 		- Width
   COLS 		- Number of columns
   ALIGN 		- Align
   CELLPADDING 	- Spacing within cells
   CELLSPACING 	- Spacing between cells
   BGCOLOR 	- Background color
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		caption, col, colgroup, tbody, tfoot, thead

Content sequence:	an optional CAPTION element, optionally followed by one or more COL or COLGROUP elements, then an optional THEAD, an optional TFOOT, and finally one or more TBODY elements.
~0000000271
	Data cell element 	<TD>

<TH> elements are used to represent header cells, while <TD> elements are used to represent data cells.  This allows user agents to render header and data cells distinctly, even in the absence of style sheets.

Cells can span multiple rows and columns, and may be empty.  Cells spanning rows contribute to the column count on each of the spanned rows, but only appear in the markup once (in the first row spanned).  The row count is determined by the number of TR elements.  Any rows implied by cells spanning rows beyond this should be ignored.

If the column count for the table is greater than the number of cells for a given row (after including cells for spanned rows), the missing cells are treated as occurring on the right hand side of the table and rendered as empty cells.  If the language context indicates a right to left writing order, then the missing cells should be placed on the left hand side.

It is possible to create tables with overlapping cells, for instance:

  <table border>
    <tr><td rowspan=2>1<td>2<td>3
    <tr><td rowspan=2>4
    <tr><td colspan=2>5<td>6
  </table>

which might look something like:

  /-----------\
  | 1 | 2 | 3 |
  |   |-------|
  |   | 4 |   |
  |---|...|---|
  | 5 :   | 6 |
  \-----------/

In this example, the cells labeled 4 and 5 overlap.  In such cases, the rendering is implementation dependent.

The AXIS and AXES attributes for cells provide a means for defining concise labels for cells.  When rendering to speech, these attributes may be used to provide abbreviated names for the headers relevant to each cell.  Another application is when you want to be able to later process table contents to enter them into a database.  These attributes are then used to give database field names.  The table's class attribute should be used to let the software recognize which tables can be treated in this way.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   WIDTH 		- Width
   HEIGHT 		- Height
   ALIGN 		- Align
   VALIGN 		- Vertical align
   COLSPAN 	- Columns spanned
   ROWSPAN 	- Rows spanned
   CHAR 		- Align on character
   CHAROFF 	- Align offset
   NOWRAP 		- Wordwrap
   BGCOLOR 	- Background color
   AXES 		- Axis names list
   AXIS 		- Short axis name
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	tr

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000272
	Text area element 	<TEXTAREA>

The <TEXTAREA> element allow users enter more than one line of text inside a fill-out form.
For example:

<TEXTAREA NAME="address" ROWS=44 COLS=5>
AdvaSoft Ltd
30 Hatch Road
London SW16 4PN, UK
</TEXTAREA>

The text up to the end tag is used to initialize the field's value.
The initialization text can contain SGML entities, e.g. for accented characters, but is otherwise treated as literal text. This end tag is always required even if the field is initially blank. When submitting a form, the line terminators are implementation dependent. Servers should be capable of recognizing a CR immediately followed by an LF, or separate CRs and LFs as all signifying the ends of lines. User agents should tolerate the same range of line terminators within the initialization text.

In a typical rendering, the ROWS and COLS attributes determine the visible dimension of the field in characters. The field is rendered in a fixed-width font. User agents should allow text to grow beyond these limits by scrolling as needed. The user agent is recommended to wrap words as they are entered, to fit within the textarea field. It is further recommended that a means is provided for users to turn this feature off and on.


Note: In the initial design for forms, multi-line text fields were supported by the INPUT element with TYPE=TEXT. Unfortunately, this causes problems for fields with long text values as SGML limits the length of attribute literals. The HTML DTD allows for up to 1024 characters (the SGML default is only 240 characters).


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   NAME 		- Formal name  	(Required)
   COLS 		- Number of columns  	(Required)
   ROWS 		- Height  	(Required)
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA
~0000000274
	Header cell element 	<TH>

<TH> elements are used to represent header cells, while <TD> elements are used to represent data cells.  This allows user agents to render header and data cells distinctly, even in the absence of style sheets.

Cells can span multiple rows and columns, and may be empty.  Cells spanning rows contribute to the column count on each of the spanned rows, but only appear in the markup once (in the first row spanned).  The row count is determined by the number of TR elements.  Any rows implied by cells spanning rows beyond this should be ignored.

If the column count for the table is greater than the number of cells for a given row (after including cells for spanned rows), the missing cells are treated as occurring on the right hand side of the table and rendered as empty cells.  If the language context indicates a right to left writing order, then the missing cells should be placed on the left hand side.

It is possible to create tables with overlapping cells, for instance:

  <table border>
    <tr><td rowspan=2>1<td>2<td>3
    <tr><td rowspan=2>4
    <tr><td colspan=2>5<td>6
  </table>

which might look something like:

  /-----------\
  | 1 | 2 | 3 |
  |   |-------|
  |   | 4 |   |
  |---|...|---|
  | 5 :   | 6 |
  \-----------/

In this example, the cells labeled 4 and 5 overlap.  In such cases, the rendering is implementation dependent.

The AXIS and AXES attributes for cells provide a means for defining concise labels for cells.  When rendering to speech, these attributes may be used to provide abbreviated names for the headers relevant to each cell.  Another application is when you want to be able to later process table contents to enter them into a database.  These attributes are then used to give database field names.  The table's class attribute should be used to let the software recognize which tables can be treated in this way.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   WIDTH 		- Width
   HEIGHT 		- Height
   ALIGN 		- Align
   VALIGN 		- Vertical align
   COLSPAN 	- Columns spanned
   ROWSPAN 	- Rows spanned
   CHAR 		- Align on character
   CHAROFF 	- Align offset
   NOWRAP 		- Wordwrap
   BGCOLOR 	- Background color
   AXES 		- Axis names list
   AXIS 		- Short axis name
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	tr

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, address, applet, b, basefont, big, blockquote, br, center, cite, code, dfn, dir, div, dl, em, embed, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, hr, i, img, input, isindex, kbd, map, menu, multicol, nobr, noscript, ol, p, pre, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, table, textarea, tt, u, ul, var, wbr
~0000000275
	Table Head, Foot and Body Elements 	

Tables may be divided up into head and body sections.
The THEAD and TFOOT elements are optional, but one or more TBODY elements are always required.  If the table only consists of a TBODY section, the TBODY start and end tags may be omitted, as the parser can infer them.  If a THEAD element is present, the THEAD start tag is required, but the end tag can be omitted, provided a TFOOT or TBODY start tag follows.  The same applies to TFOOT.  This definition provides compatibility with tables created for the older model, as well as allowing the end tags for THEAD, TFOOT and TBODY to be omitted.

The THEAD, TFOOT and TBODY elements provide a convenient means for controlling rendering.  If the table has a large number of rows in the body, user agents may choose to use a scrolling region for the table body sections.  When rendering to a paged device, tables will often have to be broken across page boundaries.  The THEAD, TFOOT and TBODY elements allow the user agent to repeat the table foot at the bottom of the current page, and then the table head at the top of the new page before continuing on with the table body.

TFOOT is placed before the TBODY in the markup sequence, so that browsers can render the foot before receiving all of the table data.  This is useful when very long tables are rendered with scrolling body sections, or for paged output, involving breaking the table over many pages.

Each THEAD, TFOOT and TBODY element must contain one or more TR elements.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   ALIGN 		- Align
   CHAR 		- Align on character
   CHAROFF 	- Align offset
   VALIGN 		- Vertical align
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	table

Contains:		tr
~0000000276
	Title element 	<TITLE>

Every HTML document must contain a <TITLE> element.

The title should identify the contents of the document in a global context.  A short title, such as "Introduction" may be meaningless out of context.  A title such as "Introduction to HTML Elements" is more appropriate.
There may only be one <TITLE> element in any document.

A user agent may display the title of a document in a history list or as a label for the window displaying the document.  Unlike headings, titles are not normally displayed in the text of a document itself.

NOTE - The length of a title is not limited, however, long titles may be truncated in some applications.  To minimize this possibility, titles should be fewer than 64 characters.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	head

Contains:		#PCDATA

INHERITANCE (content model to inherit by child elements):

Exclusion elements:	link, meta, script, style
~0000000277
	Row element 	<TR>

The TR or table row element acts as a container for a row of table cells (TH and/or TD elements).  The end tag may be omitted.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   ALIGN 		- Align
   CHAR 		- Align on character
   CHAROFF 	- Align offset
   VALIGN 		- Vertical align
   BGCOLOR 	- Background color
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	tbody, tfoot, thead

Contains:		td, th
~0000000278
	Typewriter element 	<TT>

The <TT> element indicates teletype (monospaced) text. Where a teletype font is unavailable, an alternative representation may be used.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000279
	Underline element 	<U>

The <U> element specifies that the enclosed text should be displayed, if practical, as underlined.  Supported by Netscape Navigator 2.0 and proposed for HTML 3.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000280
	Unordered List element 	<UL>

An unordered list typically is a bulleted list of items. 

The UL element is used for unordered lists. Both start and end tags are always needed. The LI element is used for individual list items. The end tag for LI elements can always be omitted. Note that LI elements can contain nested lists. The COMPACT attribute can be used as a hint to the user agent to render lists in a more compact style. 

The TYPE attribute can be used to set the bullet style on UL and LI elements. The permitted values are "disc", "square" or "circle". The default generally depends on the level of nesting for lists.

Example:

  <UL>
    <LH>Table Fruit</LH>
    <LI>apples
    <LI>oranges
    <LI>bananas
  </UL>


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   COMPACT 	- Compact style
   TYPE 		- Mark type
   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Element

Contained in:	blockquote, body, center, dd, div, form, li, multicol, noscript, td, th

Contains:		li

Content sequence:	an optional list header (LH), then one or more list items (LI).
~0000000281
	Variable element 	<VAR>

The <VAR> element indicates a placeholder variable, typically rendered as italic and might be used in an instruction manual. For example:

  Type <SAMP>html-check <VAR>file</VAR> | more</SAMP>
  to check <VAR>file</VAR> for markup errors.


Detailed specification:

Attributes:

   CLASS 		- Class
   STYLE 		- Style
   LANG 		- Language
   DIR 		- Characters direction

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Required

Content type:	Mixed

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		#PCDATA, a, applet, b, basefont, big, br, cite, code, dfn, em, embed, font, i, img, input, kbd, map, nobr, s, samp, script, select, small, spacer, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, textarea, tt, u, var, wbr
~0000000282
	Allow break (N) element 	<WBR>

The WBR element stands for Word BReak (Netscape extension).  This is for the very rare case when you have a NOBR section and you know exactly where you want it to break.  Also, any time you want to give the Netscape Navigator help by telling it where a word is allowed to be broken.  The WBR element does not force a line break (BR does that) it simply lets the Netscape Navigator (or other client) know where a line break is allowed to be inserted if needed.


Detailed specification:

No attributes.

Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Content type:	Empty

Contained in:	a, address, applet, b, big, blockquote, body, caption, center, cite, code, dd, dfn, div, dt, em, font, form, h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, i, kbd, li, multicol, nobr, noscript, p, pre, s, samp, small, span, strike, strong, sub, sup, td, th, tt, u, var

Contains:		NONE (empty element)
~0000000199
	Comment declaration 	<!-- ... --> 

To include comments in an HTML document, use a comment declaration.
A comment declaration consists of '<!' followed by zero or more comments followed by '>'.  Each comment starts with '--' and includes all text up to and including the next occurrence of '--'.
In a comment declaration, white space is allowed after each comment, but not before the first comment.  The entire comment declaration is ignored.

For example:

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN">
  <HEAD>
    <TITLE>HTML Comment Example</TITLE>
    <!-- Id: asWedit.c,v 2.0 1995/09/26 18:01:50 as Exp  -->
    <!-- another -- -- comment -->
    <!>
  </HEAD>
  <BODY>
    <p> <!- not a comment, just regular old data characters ->

NOTE: Some historical HTML implementations incorrectly consider any '>' character to be the termination of a comment.

~0000000198
	SGML DOCTYPE declaration

The DOCTYPE declaration is used by SGML systems in the document's proloque.

HTML Public Text Identifiers

To identify information as an HTML document conforming to the HTML 2.0 specification, each document must start with one of the following document type declarations.

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0//EN">
    NOTE - If the body of a 'text/html' message entity does
    not begin with a document type declaration, an HTML user
    agent should infer the above document type declaration.

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 2//EN">

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Level 1//EN">
    This document type declaration refers to the level 1 HTML DTD.
    Form elements must not occur in level 1 documents.

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict//EN">
  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 1//EN">
    These two document type declarations refer to the
    "Strict HTML DTD" and "Strict Level 1 HTML DTD". They
    refer to the more structurally rigid definition of HTML.

To identify the document as being HTML 3.2, it is recommended that documents start with the prologue:

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN">

The last published DTD for HTML 3.2 has a following declaration:

  <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2 Draft 19960821//EN">


As we, at AdvaSoft, have modified and extended the above HTML 3.2 DTD with currently used extensions (like Netscape frames) you should use the following DOCTYPE, whenever you use any of the new features:

in the basic mode (-html):

   <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//AdvaSoft//DTD HTML 3.2 extended 961018//EN">

in the experimental mode (-htmlx):

   <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//AdvaSoft//DTD HTML 3.2 experimental 961018//EN">

Our extended DTD's are available at the following addresses:

   http://www.advasoft.com/lib/html-3.2x-as-961018.dtd
   http://www.advasoft.com/lib/html-3.2exp-as-961018.dtd

while the latest versions of DTD's used in asWedit extended and experimental modes are available as:
   
   http://www.advasoft.com/lib/html-x-as.dtd
   http://www.advasoft.com/lib/html-exp-as.dtd


Note:
Because asWedit supports also non-standard (unknown) elements the DTD declaration is not available through a menu entry. It is however automatically inserted when you select the Standard HTML Layout. Alternatively you have to enter/paste it manually.

There are also other formal public identifiers.
~0000000197
	Unknown tag element 	<XYZ>

The element unknown to asWedit in the current mode, i.e. element that is not defined in the AdvaSoft's experimental HTML 3.2x DTD (for example a proprietary HTML extension). 
When inserted or edited the  Unknown tag editor   dialog is used where you enter the unsupported tag (and any attributes).

Note that for an unknown element any attribute is allowed and no context checks are made (so use this kind of element when you really have to).

The AdvaSoft's experimental HTML 3.2x  DTD is based on: HTML 3.2 DTD draft as of 21 Aug 1996, documentation for extensions used in Netscape Navigator 3.0 (and other browsers), HTML internationalization drafts, style sheets proposals and the full table as in RFC 1942.
    

Detailed specification:

Assumed Tag requirements:
	Open Tag:	Required
	Close Tag:	Optional

Assumed Content type:	Mixed

It is assumed that an 'unknown' element can contain any element that can appear in the HTML body.
~0000000005
	List of supported attributes:

   accept 		- Accept content
   action 		- Action's URL	(Required)
   action 		- Action's URL
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   align 		- Align
   alink 		- Activated link color
   alt 		- Alternative text
   alt 		- Alternative text	(Required)
   archive 	- Archive
   axes 		- Axis names list
   axis 		- Short axis name
   background 	- "Background's URL"
   bgcolor 	- Background color
   border 		- Frame width
   border 		- Frame width
   border 		- Border
   border 		- Border
   bordercolor 	- Border Color
   cellpadding 	- Spacing within cells
   cellspacing 	- Spacing between cells
   char 		- Align on character
   charoff 	- Align offset
   checked 	- Initial state
   class 		- Class
   clear 		- Clear flow
   clear 		- Clear flow
   clear 		- Clear flow
   code 		- Code File	(Required)
   codebase 	- Code base
   coldef 		- Columns definition	(Required)
   coldef 		- Columns definition
   color 		- Color
   cols 		- Number of columns	(Required)
   cols 		- Number of columns
   cols 		- Columns
   colspan 	- Columns spanned
   colspec 	- Column specification
   compact 	- Compact style
   content 	- Content (HTTP response)	(Required)
   continue 	- Continue sequence number
   coords 		- Coordinates
   dingbat 	- Dingbat icon entity
   dir 		- Characters direction
   disabled 	- Disabled
   dp 		- Decimal point
   enctype 	- Submitted data format
   error 		- Error message
   face 		- Face
   frame 		- Frame side(s) to render
   frameborder 	- Frame border
   from 		- Range start	(Required)
   gutter 		- Gutter
   height 		- Height
   height 		- Height
   height 		- Height	(Required)
   height 		- Height	(Required)
   height 		- Height
   height 		- Height
   href 		- Link destination
   href 		- Base address	(Required)
   href 		- Link address	(Required)
   hspace 		- Horizontal spacing
   hspace 		- Horizontal spacing
   http-equiv 	- -equiv_T HTTP response header-equiv_T
   id 		- Link end ID
   id 		- Link end ID	(Required)
   id 		- Named tab ID
   imagemap 	- URL for image clicks
   indent 		- Indent by
   ismap 		- Sensitive Map
   labels 		- Array labels
   lang 		- Language
   language 	- Language
   ldelim 		- Left delimiter
   link 		- Link color
   marginheight 	- Margin height
   marginwidth 	- Margin width
   max 		- Upper bound
   maxlength 	- Maximum length
   md 		- Message digest
   method 		- HTTP method
   methods 	- HTTP methods supported
   min 		- Lower bound
   multiple 	- Multiple selections
   n 		- Next document number	(Required)
   name 		- Name
   name 		- Named link end
   name 		- Applet name
   name 		- Name
   name 		- Name
   name 		- Name	(Required)
   name 		- Formal name	(Required)
   noflow 		- Flow around
   nohref 		- Act on clicks
   noresize 	- Resizable
   noshade 	- Shadow
   notation 	- Style notation	(Required)
   nowrap 		- Wordwrap
   plain 		- Plain list
   prompt 		- Prompt message
   rdelim 		- Right delimiter
   rel 		- Link relationship(s)
   rel 		- Link relationship(s)
   rev 		- Reverse relationship(s)
   rev 		- Reverse relationship(s)
   role 		- Role
   rows 		- Height	(Required)
   rows 		- Rows
   rowspan 	- Rows spanned
   rules 		- Rules to render
   script 		- __not_used_in_3.0
   scrolling 	- Scrollbars
   selected 	- Initially selected
   seqnum 		- Sequence number
   shape 		- Hotzone shape
   shape 		- Hotzone shape
   size 		- Size
   size 		- Size
   size 		- Delimiters Size
   size 		- Size	(Required)
   size 		- Size
   skip 		- Skip sequence by
   span 		- Span number
   src 		- "Custom image's URL"
   src 		- "Object's URL"	(Required)
   src 		- "Frame's URL"
   src 		- "Custom image's URL"	(Required)
   src 		- "Source URL"
   start 		- Start number
   style 		- Style
   sym 		- Symbol
   target 		- Target frame name
   text 		- Text color
   title 		- Title
   to 		- Tab name to move to
   type 		- Type of accepted data
   typeNul 	- Mark type
   typeSpacer 	- Type
   type 		- Type of accepted data
   type 		- Numbering style
   units 		- Units
   units 		- Units
   until 		- Range end	(Required)
   urn 		- Universal Resource Name
   usemap 		- Client usemap
   valign 		- Vertical align
   valign 		- Vertical align
   value 		- Value
   value 		- New number
   version 	- DTD version
   version 	- DTD version
   vlink 		- Visited link color
   vrml 		- VRML (N)
   vspace 		- Vertical spacing
   vspace 		- Vertical spacing
   width 		- Width
   width 		- Width	(Required)
   width 		- Width	(Required)
   width 		- Width
   width 		- Width
   width 		- Width
   wrap 		- Multicolumn wrapping
   x 		- Left offset
   y 		- Top offset
~0000000561
	Accept content attribute  (accept)

A comma separated list of MIME content types for use in restricting the types of files that can be attached to a form with a file field.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000500
	Action's URL attribute  (action)  	(Required)

The ACTION attribute is a URL specifying the location to which the content of the form is submitted to elicit a response. If the ACTION attribute is missing, the URL for the document itself is assumed. The way in which data is submitted varies with the access protocol of the URL and with the values of the METHOD and ENCTYPE attributes.

Text allowed:	URI

NO default value!
~0000000595
	Action's URL attribute  (action)

The ACTION attribute is a URL specifying the location to which the content of the form is submitted to elicit a response. If the ACTION attribute is missing, the URL for the document itself is assumed. The way in which data is submitted varies with the access protocol of the URL and with the values of the METHOD and ENCTYPE attributes.

Text allowed:	URI

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000581
	Align attribute  (align)

The ALIGN attribute can be used to explicitly specify the horizontal alignment of the current element (probably paragraph, heading, HR, table cell etc.):

  align=left	Elements are rendered flush left (the default).

  align=center	Elements are centered.

  align=right	Elements are rendered flush right.

  align=justify	Text lines are justified where practical, otherwise this gives the same effect as the default 'align=left' setting.


For example (when we use align in the context of a heading element):

  <h1 align=center>This is a centered heading</H1>
  Here is some text.
  <H2 align=right>and this is a flush right heading</H2>
  Here is some more text.


Possible Values:
  left
  center
  right

Default value:	LEFT
~0000000504
	Align attribute  (align)

The ALIGN attribute can be used to explicitly specify the horizontal alignment of the current element (probably paragraph, heading, HR, table cell etc.):

  align=left	Elements are rendered flush left (the default).

  align=center	Elements are centered.

  align=right	Elements are rendered flush right.

  align=justify	Text lines are justified where practical, otherwise this gives the same effect as the default 'align=left' setting.


For example (when we use align in the context of a heading element):

  <h1 align=center>This is a centered heading</H1>
  Here is some text.
  <H2 align=right>and this is a flush right heading</H2>
  Here is some more text.


Possible Values:
  left
  center
  right
  justify

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000614
	Align attribute  (align)

The ALIGN attribute specifies how the applet's image should be aligned with the text that follows.  If you do not specify this attribute, then the base line of the applet is aligned with the following text. If you select ALIGN=top, then the adjacent text is aligned with the top of the image. Select ALIGN=middle to align the text with the center of the image, and so on (see the options menu).

Possible Values:
  left
  right
  top
  texttop
  middle
  absmiddle
  baseline
  bottom
  absbottom

Default value:	BASELINE
~0000000584
	Align attribute  (align)

By default, arrays are vertically positioned so that preceding and following expressions are aligned with the mid point of the array. The ALIGN attribute can take on of the following values:


  TOP	- The top row of the array is aligned with the same baseline as the preceding or following expression.

  MIDDLE	- The middle row of the array is aligned with the same baseline as the preceding or following expression. This is the default. If there are an even number of rows, the midpoint of the array is used instead.

  BOTTOM	- The bottom row of the array is aligned with the same baseline as the preceding or following expression.

Possible Values:
  top
  middle
  bottom

Default value:	MIDDLE
~0000000583
	Align attribute  (align)

Positioning of the caption relative to the table or figure it labels.
The permitted values are: TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT or RIGHT.

Possible Values:
  top
  bottom
  left
  right

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000654
	Align attribute  (align)

Positioning of the caption relative to the table or figure it labels.
The permitted values are: TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT or RIGHT.

Possible Values:
  top
  bottom

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000609
	Align attribute  (align)

This specifies the horizontal alignment of cell contents.

The attribute value should be one of LEFT, CENTER, RIGHT, JUSTIFY and CHAR. User agents may treat JUSTIFY as left alignment if they lack support for text justification. ALIGN=CHAR is used for aligning cell contents on a particular character.

For cells spanning multiple rows or columns, where the alignment property is inherited from the row or column, the initial row and column for the cell determines the appropriate alignment property to use.

Note that an alignment attribute on elements within the cell, e.g. on a P element, overrides the normal alignment value for the cell.

Possible Values:
  left
  center
  right
  justify
  char

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000502
	Align attribute  (align)

Specifies horizontal alignment of the current element, i.e. figure (or table, but no its contents):
  BLEEDLEFT	- Flush left with the left (window) border.
  LEFT		- Flush left with the left text margin.
  CENTER	- The figure (table)is centered between the text margins and text flow around it is disabled. This is the default setting for ALIGN.
  RIGHT		- Flush right with the right text margin.
  BLEEDRIGHT	- Flush right with the right (window) border
  JUSTIFY	- When applicable the figure (table) should be magnified or reduced (sized) to fill the space between the left and right text margins. Text flow around the figure (table) is disabled for align=justify.

Possible Values:
  bleedleft
  left
  center
  right
  bleedright
  justify

Default value:	CENTER
~0000000593
	Align attribute  (align)

This attribute gives you positional control and applies to IMG and INPUT elements.
The ALIGN attribute takes the values TOP, MIDDLE or BOTTOM, defining whether the top, middle or bottom of the field should be aligned with the baseline for the text line, in which the INPUT element appears.

Possible Values:
  top
  middle
  bottom

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000637
	Align attribute  (align)

This attributes gives you a positional control over the image placement.

Note that only the "Top", "Middle" and "Bottom" are the standard HTML 2.0 values!  They specify whether the top, middle or bottom of the image should be aligned with the baseline for the text line.

In Netscape Navigator they actually have the following meaning:
  top	- align the image with the top of the tallest item on the line

  middle	- align the baseline of the current line with the middle of the image.

  bottom 	- align the bottom of the image with the baseline of the current line

The values "left" and "right" (Netscape) are so-called floating alignments.
Left aligned image will float down and over to the left margin (into the next available space there), and subsequent text will wrap around the right hand side of that image.  Likewise for "right" the image aligns with the right margin, and the text wraps around the left.

The other values are as follow:
  texttop 	- align the image with the top of the tallest text in the line (this is usually but not always the same as ALIGN=top).

  absmiddle 	- align the middle of the current line with the middle of the image.

  baseline 	- align the bottom of the image with the baseline of the current line (the same as ALIGN=bottom but clearer name)

  absbottom 	- align the bottom of the image with the bottom of the current line.

Possible Values:
  top
  middle
  bottom
  texttop
  absmiddle
  baseline
  absbottom
  left
  right

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000501
	Align attribute  (align)

By default expressions in items are centered horizontally.
This can be altered by the COLDEF attribute on the parent ARRAY element, and overridden on a per item basis with the ALIGN attribute. The permitted values are: LEFT, CENTER or RIGHT.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000503
	Align attribute  (align)

The ALIGN attribute can be used to explicitly specify the horizontal alignment of the current element (probably paragraph, heading, HR, table cell etc.):

  align=left	Elements are rendered flush left (the default).

  align=center	Elements are centered.

  align=right	Elements are rendered flush right.


For example (when we use align in the context of a heading element):

  <h1 align=center>This is a centered heading</H1>
  Here is some text.
  <H2 align=right>and this is a flush right heading</H2>
  Here is some more text.


Possible Values:
  left
  center
  right

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000582
	Align attribute  (align)

Lines are usually rendered according to the alignment option for the enclosing paragraph element. The ALIGN attribute can be used to explicitly specify the horizontal alignment:

 align=left	- Following text starts immediately after the designated tab stop (the default).

 align=center	- Following text up to next tab or line break is centered on the designated tab stop. If the TO attribute is missing, it centers the text between the current left and right margins.

 align=right	- Following text up to the next tab or line break is rendered flush right to the designated tab stop. If the TO attribute is missing, it renders the text flush right against the current right margin.

 align=decimal	- The following text is searched for the first occurrence of the character representing the decimal point. The text up to the next tab or line break is then aligned such that the decimal point starts at the designated tab stop. If the TO attribute is missing, the tab element is treated as a single space character.

Possible Values:
  left
  center
  right
  decimal

Default value:	LEFT
~0000000585
	Align attribute  (align)

Take values TOP or MIDDLE or BOTTOM, defining whether the top or middle or bottom of the graphic should be aligned with the baseline for the text line in which the IMG (SELECT or TEXTAREA) element appears.

With ALIGN=LEFT, the graphic will float down and over to the current left margin, and subsequent text will wrap around the right hand side of the graphic. Likewise for ALIGN=RIGHT, the graphic aligns with the current right margin and, and text wraps around the left.

Note for IMG element: It is inappropriate to use this feature for larger graphics as these are best represented with the FIG element.

Possible Values:
  top
  middle
  bottom
  left
  right

Default value:	TOP
~0000000625
	Activated link color attribute  (alink)

This attribute specifies the active link color, i.e. the color of the link being clicked on (Netscape extension).

The color should be specified in the hexadecimal RGB (red-green-blue) format.  For example #FF0000 means red, #FFFFFF means white.  You can use the asWedit pick color dialog to select one of the pre-defined colors.  Alternatively look in the X Window System color database (usually in the file /usr/lib/X11/rgb.txt).

Text allowed:	Hexadecimal color

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000505
	Alternative text attribute  (alt)

Optional text as an alternative to the graphics for display in text-only environments.
The ALT text can contain entities, e.g. for accented characters or special symbols, but it can't contain markup. 

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000655
	Alternative text attribute  (alt)  	(Required)

The ALT attribute is used to provide text labels which can be displayed in the status line as the mouse or other pointing device is moved over hotzones, or for constructing a textual menu for non-graphical user agents. Authors are strongly recommended to provide meaningful ALT attributes to support interoperability with speech-based or text-only user agents.

Note that this attribute has been made required in the HTML 3.2 DTD.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000656
	Archive attribute  (archive)

This attribute specifies the "archive" of applets. This can improve applet download time by reducing the number of HTTP connections required to fetch applet code.

Example: 

 <APPLET ARCHIVE="Nuclear.zip"
      code="NuclearPlant.class"
      width=680 height=473>
 </APPLET>

This will cause the file Nuclear.zip to be downloaded to the user's disk, and will search it for the NuclearPlant class and the classes it requires. The zip file is found relative to the codebase path, and must not be compressed. Classes not in the zip file will still be searched for via the old mechanism if required. 



Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000506
	Axis names list attribute  (axes)

This is a comma separated list of axis names which together identify the row and column headers that pertain to this cell.
It is used for example when rendering to speech to identify the cell's position in the table. If missing the user agent can try to follow up columns and left along rows (right for some languages) to find the corresponding header cells.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000507
	Short axis name attribute  (axis)

This defines an abbreviated name for a header cell, e.g. which can be used when rendering to speech. It defaults to the cell's content.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000508
	"Background's URL" attribute  (background)

This can be used to specify a URL for an image tile to cover the document background. This provides a way of giving a group of documents a distinctive appearence.
Clients may ignore this attribute. It is included here for the benefit of clients that don't support style sheets.

Text allowed:	URI

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000626
	Background color attribute  (bgcolor)

This attribute specifies the background color for the page (Netscape extension).

The color should be specified in the hexadecimal RGB (red-green-blue) format.  For example #FF0000 means red, #FFFFFF means white.  You can use the asWedit pick color dialog to select one of the pre-defined colors.  Alternatively look in the X Window System color database (usually in the file /usr/lib/X11/rgb.txt).

Text allowed:	Hexadecimal color

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000509
	Frame width attribute  (border)

This presence of this attribute instructs the user agent to render borders around tables. For instance: <TABLE BORDER>.
The precise appearence, along with the size of margins around cells, can be controlled by associated style sheets, or via information in the STYLE element in the document head. Subclassing tables, rows and cells is particularly useful in this regard.

Possible Value:
  border

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000603
	Frame width attribute  (border)

This presence of this attribute instructs the user agent to render borders around tables. For instance: <TABLE BORDER>.
The precise appearence, along with the size of margins around cells, can be controlled by associated style sheets, or via information in the STYLE element in the document head. Subclassing tables, rows and cells is particularly useful in this regard.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000644
	Border attribute  (border)

This lets the document author control the thickness of the border around an image displayed.
Warning: setting BORDER=0 on images that are also part of anchors may confuse your users as they are used to a colored border indicating an image is an anchor.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000671
	Border attribute  (border)

This lets the document author control the thickness of the border around an image displayed.
Warning: setting BORDER=0 on images that are also part of anchors may confuse your users as they are used to a colored border indicating an image is an anchor.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000657
	Border Color attribute  (bordercolor)

This attribute specifies the color of the border.

Text allowed:	Hexadecimal color

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000604
	Spacing within cells attribute  (cellpadding)

Specifies the amount of space between the border of the cell and its contents.

The value is specified as a number followed by an optional suffix. The suffix determines the units being used as follow:
    pt	points
    pi	picas
    in	inches
    cm	centimeters
    mm 	millimeters
    em	em units (equal to the height of the default font)
    px  screen pixels (default).

The default units are screen pixels (chosen for backwards compatibility). The number is an integer value or a real valued number such as "2.5". Exponents, as in "1.2e2", are not allowed. White space is not allowed between the number and the suffix.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000605
	Spacing between cells attribute  (cellspacing)

Specifies the space between individual cells in a table.

The value is specified as a number followed by an optional suffix. The suffix determines the units being used as follow:
    pt	points
    pi	picas
    in	inches
    cm	centimeters
    mm 	millimeters
    em	em units (equal to the height of the default font)
    px  screen pixels (default).

The default units are screen pixels (chosen for backwards compatibility). The number is an integer value or a real valued number such as "2.5". Exponents, as in "1.2e2", are not allowed. White space is not allowed between the number and the suffix.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000599
	Align on character attribute  (char)

This is used to specify an alignment character for use with align=char, e.g. char=":".
The default character is the decimal point for the current language, as set by the LANG attribute.
The CHAR attribute value is case sensitive.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000600
	Align offset attribute  (charoff)

Specifies the offset to the first occurrence of the alignment character on each line.
If a line doesn't include the alignment character, it should be horizontally shifted to end at the alignment position. The resolved direction of the cell, as determined by the inheritance of the DIR attribute, is used to set whether the offset is from the left or right margin of the cell. For Latin scripts, the offset will be from the left margin, while for Arabic scripts, it will be from the right margin. In addition to standard units, the "%" sign may be used to indicate that the value specifies the alignment position as a percentage offset of the current cell, e.g. CHAROFF="30%" indicates the alignment character should be positioned 30% through the cell.

In the absence of an explicit or inherited CHAROFF attribute, the default alignment position when using the two pass layout algorithm can be determined by choosing the position that would center lines for which the width before and after the alignment character are at the maximum values for any of the lines in the column for which ALIGN=CHAR. For incremental table layout the suggested default is CHAROFF="50%". If several cells in different rows for the same column use character alignment, then by default, all such cells should line up, regardless of which character is used for alignment.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000510
	Initial state attribute  (checked)

The presence of this attribute indicates that a radio button or checkbox should be initialized to its selected state.

Possible Value:
  checked

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000576
	Class attribute  (class)

A space separated list of SGML NAME tokens. CLASS names specify that the element belongs to the corresponding named classes.
These may be used by style sheets to provide class dependent renderings.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000562
	Clear flow attribute  (clear)

This attribute is common to all block-like elements. When text flows around a figure or table in the margin, you sometimes want to start the division below the figure rather than alongside it. The CLEAR attribute allows you to move down unconditionally:

  clear=left	move down until left margin is clear
  clear=right	move down until right margin is clear
  clear=all	move down until both margins are clear

Alternatively, you can decide to place the element alongside the figure just so long as there is enough room. The minimum width needed is specified as:

  clear="40 en"	move down until there is at least 40 en units free
  clear="100 pixels" move down until there is at least 100 pixels free

The style sheet (or browser defaults) may provide default minimum widths for each class of block-like elements.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000669
	Clear flow attribute  (clear)

This extra attribute was added by Netscape because of the addition of floating images.
Normal BR still just inserts a line break.  But adding CLEAR=left attribute for BR will break the line, and move vertically down until you have a clear left margin (no floating images).  CLEAR=right does the same for the right margin, and CLEAR=all moves down until both margins are clear of images.

Possible Values:
  left
  all
  right
  none

Default value:	NONE
~0000000645
	Clear flow attribute  (clear)

This extra attribute was added by Netscape because of the addition of floating images.
Normal BR still just inserts a line break.  But adding CLEAR=left attribute for BR will break the line, and move vertically down until you have a clear left margin (no floating images).  CLEAR=right does the same for the right margin, and CLEAR=all moves down until both margins are clear of images.

Possible Values:
  all
  left
  right

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000615
	Code File attribute  (code)  	(Required)

The CODE attribute specifies the name of a file containing the Applet subclass.
For example if you write an Applet subclass named MyApplet, then to include it in an HTML page you could do the following:

  <APPLET CODE="MyApplet.class"
	width="300"
	height="50">
    <PARAM name="text" value="My Applet is Cool!">
  </APPLET>


See the CODEBASE attribute to learn where the applet resources are taken from.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000616
	Code base attribute  (codebase)

The CODEBASE attribute is used to re-define the base location for applet resources.

Applet resources (including their classes) are normally loaded relative to the
document-URL (or to the <BASE> element if it is defined). The codebase attribute is used
to change this default behavior. If the codebase attribute is defined then it
specifies a different location to find applet resources. The value can be an
absolute URL or a relative URL. The absolute URL is used as is without
modification and is not effected by the documents <BASE> element. When the codebase
attribute is relative, then it is relative to the document-URL (or <BASE> element
if defined).
For example:

  <APPLET CODEBASE="applets/NervousText"
	code="NervousText.class"
	width="300"
	height="50">
    <PARAM name="text" value="Java is Cool!">
  </APPLET>


Text allowed:	URI

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000511
	Columns definition attribute  (coldef)  	(Required)

By default the columns are centered. This attribute can be used to specify the horizontal alignment for each column with character string formed by one capital letter per column, with L for left, C for center and R to right alignment, e.g. "LLCR" for a 4 column table.

The COLDEF attribute can also be used to place a "+", "-" or "=" between the columns, e.g.
	coldef="C+C+C+C=C"
Whitespace within the COLDEF attribute is ignored.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000563
	Columns definition attribute  (coldef)

By default the columns are centered. This attribute can be used to specify the horizontal alignment for each column with character string formed by one capital letter per column, with L for left, C for center and R to right alignment, e.g. "LLCR" for a 4 column table.

The COLDEF attribute can also be used to place a "+", "-" or "=" between the columns, e.g.
	coldef="C+C+C+C=C"
Whitespace within the COLDEF attribute is ignored.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000630
	Color attribute  (color)

This attribute specifies the background color for the table or table cell (Netscape 3.0 extension).

The color should be specified in the hexadecimal RGB (red-green-blue) format.  For example #FF0000 means red, #FFFFFF means white.  You can use the asWedit pick color dialog to select one of the pre-defined colors.  Alternatively look in the X Window System color database (usually in the file /usr/lib/X11/rgb.txt).

Text allowed:	Hexadecimal color

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000512
	Number of columns attribute  (cols)  	(Required)

Inside TEXTAREA
_______________
The visible number of characters across the field. User agents should allow text to grow beyond these limits by scrolling as needed.

Inside MULTICOL
_______________
Controls how many columns the display will be split into. Layout will attempt to flow elements evenly across the columns to make each column about
the same height. Unless the WIDTH attribute is specified, column width is adjusted to fill the available view. 

Text allowed:	Number

NO default value!
~0000000607
	Number of columns attribute  (cols)

Inside TEXTAREA
_______________
The visible number of characters across the field. User agents should allow text to grow beyond these limits by scrolling as needed.

Inside MULTICOL
_______________
Controls how many columns the display will be split into. Layout will attempt to flow elements evenly across the columns to make each column about
the same height. Unless the WIDTH attribute is specified, column width is adjusted to fill the available view. 

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000633
	Columns attribute  (cols)

The ROWS and COLS attributes of FRAMESET determine how many regions the frame set will be divided into.
The default value for each attribute is one.

Each attribute takes as its value a comma separated list of values.  These values can be:
  N	- absolute pixel values,
  N%	- percentage values between 1 and 100,
  N*	- relative scaling values,

where 'N' above denotes a positive integer number.

A detailed description of the three possible value types follow.

  N	- A simple numeric value is assumed to be a fixed size in pixels.  This is the most dangerous type of value to use since the size of the viewer's window can and does vary substantially.  If fixed pixel values are used, it will almost certainly be necessary to mix them with one or more of the relative size values described below.  Otherwise, the client engine will likely override your specified pixel value to ensure that the total proportions of the frame are 100% of the width and height of the user's window.

  N%	- This is a simple percentage value between 1 and 100.  If the total is greater than 100 all percentages are scaled down.  If the total is less than 100, and relative-sized frames exist, extra space will be given to them.  If there are no relative-sized frames, all percentages will be scaled up to match a total of 100%.

  N*	-  The value on this field is optional. A single '*' character is a "relative-sized" frame and is interpreted as a request to give the frame all remaining space. If there exist multiple relative-sized frames, the remaining space is divided evenly among them.  If there is a value in front of the '*', that frame gets that much more relative space.  "2*,*" would give 2/3 of the space to the first frame, and 1/3 to the second.

Example for 3 rows, the first and the last being smaller than the center row:

     <FRAMESET ROWS="20%,60%,20%">

Example for 3 rows, the first and the last being fixed height, with the remaining space assigned to the middle row:

     <FRAMESET ROWS="100,*,100">


Of course you can supply both ROWS and COLS for the same FRAMESET to obtain a grid design, or you can nest frames to achieve a more complicated one.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000513
	Columns spanned attribute  (colspan)

In the context of a table cell (<TH> or <TD>)
_____________________________________________
A positive integer value that defines how many columns this cell spans. The default COLSPAN is 1. COLSPAN=0 has a special significance and implies that the cell spans all columns from the current column up to the last column of the table.

In the context of <ITEM>
________________________
This can be used to provide a single item which spans several columns. The attribute v
alue is a positive integer and defaults to one.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	1
~0000000514
	Column specification attribute  (colspec)

The colspec attribute is a list of column widths and alignment specifications. The columns are listed from left to right with a capital letter followed by a number, e.g. COLSPEC="L20 C8 L40".
The letter is L for left, C for center, R for right alignment of cell contents. J is for justification, when feasible, otherwise this is treated in the same way as L for left alignment. D is for decimal alignment, see DP attribute.

Capital letters are required to avoid a particularly common error when a lower case L is confused with a one. Column entries are delimited by one or more space characters.

The number specifies the width in en's, pixels or as a fractional value of the table width, as according to the associated units attribute. This approach is more compact than used with most SGML table models and chosen to simplify hand entry. The width attribute allows you to specify the width of the table in pixels, em units or as a percentage of the space between the current left and right margins.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000515
	Compact style attribute  (compact)

The presence of this attribute indicates the user agent should use reduced interitem spacing.
In practice, there are several ways to increase the compactness of lists: reduced vertical interitem spacing, smaller font size, or even to avoid line breaks between items. This is best handled through associated style sheets and the class attribute.

Possible Value:
  compact

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000516
	Content (HTTP response) attribute  (content)  	(Required)

Used to supply a value for a named property.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000517
	Continue sequence number attribute  (continue)

Don't restart the sequence number, i.e. continue where previous list left off, e.g. <OL CONTINUE> .

Possible Value:
  continue

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000598
	Coordinates attribute  (coords)

The COORDS attribute describes the position of an area, using image pixels as the units with the origin at the upper-left corner of the image.

For a rectangle, the coordinates are given as "left,top,right,bottom".  The rectangular region defined includes the lower-right corner specified, i.e. to specify the entire area of a 100x100 image, the coordinates would be "0,0,99,99".

For a circular region, the coordinates are given as "center_x,center_y,radius", specifying the center and radius of the circle.  All points up to and including those at a distance of "radius" points from the center are included.  For example, the coordinates "4,4,2" would specify a circle which included the coordinates (2,4) (6,4) (4,2) and (4,6).

For a polygonal region, the coordinates specify successive vertices of the region in the format "x1,y1,x2,y2,...,xn,yn". If the first and last coordinates are not the same then a segment is inferred to close the polygon.  The region includes the boundary lines of the polygon.  For example, "20,20,30,40,10,40" would specify a triangle with vertices at (20,20) (30,40) and (10,40).  No explicit limit is placed on the number of vertices, but a practical limit is imposed by the fact that HTML limits an attribute value to 1024 characters.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000518
	Dingbat icon entity attribute  (dingbat)

Specifies an iconic image for use as a bullet (or to appear preceding the header). The icon is specified as an entity name. A list of standard icon entity names for HTML 3.0 is given in an appendix of the HTML 3.0 specification, e.g. 'folder' is the entity name for an icon denoting a directory or folder (all of them are readily available from the asWedit option menu).

Possible Values:
  ftp
  gopher
  telnet
  archive
  audio
  film
  image
  map
  form
  parent
  next
  previous
  home
  toc
  glossary
  index
  summary
  caution
  folder
  filing.cabinet
  document
  unknown.document
  text.document
  binary.document
  binhex.document
  compressed.document
  uuencoded.document
  mail
  mail.in
  mail.out
  calculator
  clock
  display
  diskette
  mouse
  printer
  trash
  tn3270
  fax
  fixed.disk
  disk.drive

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000622
	Characters direction attribute  (dir)

Human writing systems are grouped into scripts, which determine amongst other things, the direction the characters are written. Elements of the Latin script are nominally left to right, while those of the Arabic script are nominally right to left. These characters have what is called strong directionality. Other characters can be directionally neutral (spaces) or weak (punctuation).

The DIR attribute specifies an encapsulation boundary which governs the interpretation of neutral and weakly directional characters. It does not override the directionality of strongly directional characters. The DIR attribute value is one of LTR for left to right, or RTL for right to left, e.g. DIR=RTL.

When applied to TABLE, it indicates the geometric layout of rows (i.e. row 1 is on right if DIR=RTL, but on the left if DIR=LTR) and it indicates a default base directionality for any text in the table's content if no other DIR attribute applies to that text.

Possible Values:
  ltr
  rtl

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000586
	Disabled attribute  (disabled)

When present, the field (menu or option) should be rendered as normal, but can't be modified by the user. Where practical the rendering should provide a cue that the field (menu or option)  is disabled e.g. by graying out the text, changing the color of the background or similar.

Possible Value:
  disabled

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000564
	Decimal point attribute  (dp)

This specifies the character to be used for the decimal point with the COLSPEC attribute, e.g. dp="." (the default) or dp=",".
The default may be altered by the language context, as set by the LANG attribute on enclosing elements.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000519
	Submitted data format attribute  (enctype)

This attribute specifies the MIME content type to be used to encode the form contents. It defaults to the string:
	"application/x-www-form-urlencoded"

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	application/x-www-form-urlencoded
~0000000565
	Error message attribute  (error)

This attribute specifies an error message explaining why the field's current value is incorrect. When this attribute is missing, the field can be assumed to be ok. User agents are recommended to provide a cue to indicate that the field is in error.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000658
	Face attribute  (face)

This attribute allows page designers to specify a font that might be loaded on a user's system. 

If the first choice is not available it will try the subsequent choices, and if none of the font choices are available, it will display a default font. This attribute can be used in conjunction with SIZE and COLOR attributes as well. 

This syntax is an extension of the original FONT tag; it looks like this: 

   <FONT FACE="font name, 2nd choice, 3rd choice">
 	....
   </FONT>


Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000611
	Frame side(s) to render attribute  (frame)

Specifies which sides of the frame to render.
The values and their meanings are:

 VOID	Don't render any sides of the frame.

 ABOVE	The top side of the frame

 BELOW	The bottom side of the frame

 HSIDES	The top and bottom sides of the frame

 LHS	The left hand side of the frame

 RHS	The right hand side of the frame

 VSIDES	The left and right sides of the frame

 BOX	All four sides of the frame

 BORDER	All four sides of the frame

The value "Border" is included for backwards compatibility with deployed browsers. If a document includes <TABLE BORDER> the user agent will see FRAME=BORDER and BORDER=(Implied). If the document includes <TABLE BORDER=n> then the user agent should treat this as FRAME=BORDER except if n=0 for which FRAME=VOID is appropriate.

Possible Values:
  void
  above
  below
  hsides
  lhs
  rhs
  vsides
  box
  border

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000670
	Frame border attribute  (frameborder)

This attribute specifies the border of the frame.

Possible Values:
  yes
  no

Default value:	YES
~0000000578
	Range start attribute  (from)  	(Required)

References an SGML identifier for an element in the document body. It identifies the start of the marked range.

Text allowed:	Reference to an identifier

NO default value!
~0000000659
	Gutter attribute  (gutter)

This attribute controls the amount of space between columns. It defaults to a value of 10 pixels for Netscape Navigator 3.0.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000660
	Height attribute  (height)

This HEIGHT attribute is used for the following elements:
	EMBED, SPACER, TD, TH

Inside EMBED
____________

Specifies the height of the embeded object.

Inside SPACER
_____________

Specifies the height of BLOCK type spacer (you should also specify its width). For horizontal and vertical spacers you should use SIZE attribute instead.

Inside TD and TH
________________

Specifies the suggested height for a cell content in pixels excluding the cell padding. This value will normally be used except when it conflicts with the height requirements for other cells in the same row. 

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000520
	Height attribute  (height)

This HEIGHT attribute is used for the following elements:
	EMBED, SPACER, TD, TH

Inside EMBED
____________

Specifies the height of the embeded object.

Inside SPACER
_____________

Specifies the height of BLOCK type spacer (you should also specify its width). For horizontal and vertical spacers you should use SIZE attribute instead.

Inside TD and TH
________________

Specifies the suggested height for a cell content in pixels excluding the cell padding. This value will normally be used except when it conflicts with the height requirements for other cells in the same row. 

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000661
	Height attribute  (height)  	(Required)

The HEIGHT attribute is a hint to the browser (generally a User Agent) indicating how much height the applet will require.  The browser uses it (together with the WIDTH hint) to lay out the page properly while it's waiting for the applet to draw itself.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000617
	Height attribute  (height)  	(Required)

The HEIGHT attribute is a hint to the browser (generally a User Agent) indicating how much height the applet will require.  The browser uses it (together with the WIDTH hint) to lay out the page properly while it's waiting for the applet to draw itself.

Text allowed:	Number

NO default value!
~0000000652
	Height attribute  (height)

Specifies the HEIGHT of the image in pixels.  The WIDTH and HEIGHT tags were added to IMG mainly to speed up display of the document.  If the author specifies these, the viewer of their document will not have to wait for the image to be loaded over the network and its size calculated.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000675
	Height attribute  (height)

Specifies the HEIGHT of the image in pixels.  The WIDTH and HEIGHT tags were added to IMG mainly to speed up display of the document.  If the author specifies these, the viewer of their document will not have to wait for the image to be loaded over the network and its size calculated.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000521
	Link destination attribute  (href)

The HREF attribute implies that the anchor acts as the start of a hypertext link. The destination is designated by the value of the HREF attribute, which is expressed in the Universal Resource Identifier (URI) notation.

Note that in the context of element <A> at least one of the NAME and HREF attributes should be present.

Text allowed:	URI

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000523
	Base address attribute  (href)  	(Required)

The HREF attribute specifies the base address for resolving relative links from the document, overriding any context otherwise known to the user agent. 
The value of the HREF attribute must be an absolute URL.

Text allowed:	URI

NO default value!
~0000000522
	Link address attribute  (href)  	(Required)

The HREF attribute specifies the LINK address (destination). 
The value of the HREF attribute must be an absolute URI (Universal Resource Identifier).

Text allowed:	URI

NO default value!
~0000000618
	Horizontal spacing attribute  (hspace)

The HSPACE specifies horizontal spacing for the applet.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000663
	Horizontal spacing attribute  (hspace)

The HSPACE specifies horizontal spacing for the applet.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000524
	-equiv_T HTTP response header-equiv_T attribute  (http-equiv)

This attribute binds the element to an HTTP response header.
If the semantics of the HTTP response header named by this attribute is known, then the contents can be processed based on a well defined syntactic mapping, whether or not the DTD includes anything about it. HTTP header names are not case sensitive.
If absent, the NAME attribute should be used to identify this meta-information and it should not be used within an HTTP response header.

Examples:

If the document contains:

  <META HTTP-EQUIV=Expires CONTENT="Tue, 02 May 1995 21:00:00 GMT">
  <META HTTP-EQUIV="Keywords" CONTENT="Electromagnetics, Computational">
  <META HTTP-EQUIV="Reply-to" CONTENT="A.Stochniol@ic.ac.uk">

The server will include the following response headers:

  Expires: Tue, 02 May 1995 21:00:00 GMT
  Keywords: Electromagnetics, Computational
  Reply-to: A.Stochniol@ic.ac.uk

When the HTTP-EQUIV attribute is absent, the server should not generate an HTTP response header for this meta-information, e.g.

  <META NAME="IndexType" CONTENT="Service">

Do not use the META element to define information that should be associated with an existing HTML element.


Example of an inappropriate use of the META element:

  <META NAME="Title" CONTENT="The Etymology of Dunsel">

Do not name an HTTP-EQUIV attribute the same as a response header that should typically only be generated by the HTTP server. Some inappropriate names are "Server", "Date" and "Last-Modified". Whether a name is inappropriate depends on the particular server implementation. It is recommended that servers ignore any META elements that specify HTTP equivalents (case insensitively) to their own reserved response headers.

Text allowed:	Name

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000525
	Link end ID attribute  (id)

Used to define a document-wide identifier. This can be used for naming positions within documents as the destination of a hypertext link. It may also be used by style sheets for rendering an element in a unique style. An ID attribute value is an SGML NAME token. NAME tokens are formed by an initial letter followed by letters, digits, "-" and "." characters. The letters are restricted to A-Z and a-z.

Identifiers must be unique within the scope of the current document.

For example, the following paragraph is defined as an anchor named "potomac":

<P ID="potomac">The Potomac river flows into Boston harbour, and played an important role in opening up the hinterland to early settlers... </P>

Elsewhere, you can define a link to this paragraph, as follows:

<A HREF="#potomac">Boston</A> is a historic city and a thriving center of commerce and higher education.

The reader can select the link labelled "Boston" to see further information on the Boston area.


Text allowed:	Identifier

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000580
	Link end ID attribute  (id)  	(Required)

Used to define a document-wide identifier. This can be used for naming positions within documents as the destination of a hypertext link. It may also be used by style sheets for rendering an element in a unique style. An ID attribute value is an SGML NAME token. NAME tokens are formed by an initial letter followed by letters, digits, "-" and "." characters. The letters are restricted to A-Z and a-z.

Identifiers must be unique within the scope of the current document.

For example, the following paragraph is defined as an anchor named "potomac":

<P ID="potomac">The Potomac river flows into Boston harbour, and played an important role in opening up the hinterland to early settlers... </P>

Elsewhere, you can define a link to this paragraph, as follows:

<A HREF="#potomac">Boston</A> is a historic city and a thriving center of commerce and higher education.

The reader can select the link labelled "Boston" to see further information on the Boston area.


Text allowed:	Identifier

NO default value!
~0000000526
	Named tab ID attribute  (id)

An SGML identifier used to name a new tab stop at the current position.
The scope of the tab stop is the rest of the document.

Text allowed:	Identifier

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000566
	URL for image clicks attribute  (imagemap)

Specifies a URI for processing image clicks and drags.

Text allowed:	URI

NO default value!
~0000000572
	Indent by attribute  (indent)

Specifies the number of en units before the tab stop.
The en is a typographical unit equal to half the point size. It allows authors to control the leading indent before text, e.g. in poetry, one might use: <TAB INDENT=6> to indent six en units at the start of a line. The INDENT attribute is not meaningful when combined with the TO attribute.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	0
~0000000527
	Sensitive Map attribute  (ismap)

An image map is a graphical map by which users can navigate transparently from one information resource to another.
The ISMAP attribute identifies an image as an image map. The IMG element can then be used as part of the label for a hypertext link (see anchor element). When the user clicks on the image, the location clicked on is sent to the server designated by the hypertext link.

For example:

  <A HREF="http://machine/htbin/imagemap/sample">
    <IMG SRC="sample.gif" ISMAP>
  </A>

Note: There are drawbacks from having the server process clicks on images: the delay in getting feedback and the inability to change the pointer cursor on the fly as it moves over hotzones.
Client-side processing of events is possible if one of the following applies:

- The server may allow the image map to be downloaded and processed locally. This should work with legacy documents produced using earlier versions of HTML.

- Using an image format that includes image hotzones as part of the file format. The public domain Portable Network Graphics (PNG) format is especially suitable in this regard.

- The FIG element provides for client-side image maps as a unified part of the figure description. It offers a number of advantages over IMG, including captions, markup in alt text and text flow around figures.

Possible Value:
  ismap

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000528
	Array labels attribute  (labels)

The presence of this attribute has the same effect as TeX's border matrix command. The first row and column are separated from the rest of the array.

Example of a labelled array:

	 i	j	k

     a	(X	X	X  )
	  11	 21	 31 
	 		    
     b	(X	X	X  )
	  12	 22	 32 
	 		    
     c	(X	X	X  )
	  13	 23	33  


In HTML it is represented by:

  <array ldelim="(" rdelim=")" labels>
    <row><item>dummy<item>i<item>j<item>k
    <row><item>a<item>X_11_<item>X_21_<item>X_31_
    <row><item>b<item>X_12_<item>X_22_<item>X_32_
    <row><item>c<item>X_31_<item>X_32_<item>X_33_
  </array>


Note: An item is always required for the first item of the first row, although its contents will be ignored for labelled arrays. This has been emphasized above with the value "dummy".

Possible Value:
  labels

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000529
	Language attribute  (lang)

A LANG attribute identifies the natural language used by the content of the associated element.The syntax and registry of language values are defined by RFC 1766. In summary the language is given as a primary tag followed by zero or more subtags, separated by "-". White space is not allowed and all tags are case insensitive. The name space of tags is administered by IANA. The two letter primary tag is an ISO 639 language abbreviation, while the initial subtag is a two letter ISO 3166 country code. Example values for LANG include:

    en, en-US, en-uk, i-cherokee, x-pig-latin.

Text allowed:	Name

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000667
	Language attribute  (language)

The LANGUAGE attribute is mandatory unless the SRC attribute is present and specifies the scripting language. 

Text allowed:	Name

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000567
	Left delimiter attribute  (ldelim)

An entity or character for the left delimiter, e.g.
  ldelim="["	 for a left square bracket
or
  ldelim="|" .

The default is no delimiter.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000627
	Link color attribute  (link)

This attribute specifies the link color (Netscape extension).

The color should be specified in the hexadecimal RGB (red-green-blue) format.  For example #FF0000 means red, #FFFFFF means white.  You can use the asWedit pick color dialog to select one of the pre-defined colors.  Alternatively look in the X Window System color database (usually in the file /usr/lib/X11/rgb.txt).

Text allowed:	Hexadecimal color

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000631
	Margin height attribute  (marginheight)

The MARGINWIDTH attribute is used when the document author wants some control of the margins for this frame. If specified, the value for MARGINWIDTH is in pixels. Margins can not be less than one-so that frame objects will not touch frame edges-and can not be specified so that there is no space for the document contents.  The MARGINWIDTH attribute is optional; by default, all frames default to letting the browser decide on an appropriate margin width.

The MARGINHEIGHT attribute is just like MARGINWIDTH above, except it controls the upper an lower margins instead of the left and right margins.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000632
	Margin width attribute  (marginwidth)

The MARGINWIDTH attribute is used when the document author wants some control of the margins for this frame. If specified, the value for MARGINWIDTH is in pixels. Margins can not be less than one-so that frame objects will not touch frame edges-and can not be specified so that there is no space for the document contents.  The MARGINWIDTH attribute is optional; by default, all frames default to letting the browser decide on an appropriate margin width.

The MARGINHEIGHT attribute is just like MARGINWIDTH above, except it controls the upper an lower margins instead of the left and right margins.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000568
	Upper bound attribute  (max)

This is an integer or real number and specifies the upper bound for a range field.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000530
	Maximum length attribute  (maxlength)

Specifies the maximum number of characters permitted for text and password fields.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000531
	Message digest attribute  (md)

Specifies a message digest or cryptographic checksum for the linked document designated by the HREF attribute. It is used when you want to be sure that a linked object is indeed the same one that the author intended, and hasn't been modified in any way. For instance, MD="md5:jV2OfH+nnXHU8bnkPAad/mSQlTDZ", which specifies an MD5 checksum encoded as a base64 character string. The MD attribute is generally allowed for all elements which support URI based links.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000532
	HTTP method attribute  (method)

This specifies variations in the protocol used to send the form contents. It is currently restricted to GET (the default) or POST. The attribute was introduced to inform user agents which HTTP methods the server supports.

Possible Values:
  get
  post

Default value:	GET
~0000000533
	HTTP methods supported attribute  (methods)

The METHODS attribute of anchors and links provides information about the functions that the user may perform on an object. These are more accurately given by the HTTP protocol when it is used. However, for similar reasons as for the TITLE attribute, it may be useful to include the information in advance in the link. For example, the HTML user agent may chose a different rendering as a function of the methods allowed; for example, something that is searchable may get a different icon.

The value of the METHODS attribute is a whitespace-separated list of HTTP methods supported by the object for public use (GET, HEAD, POST, etc.).

Text allowed:	Names

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000569
	Lower bound attribute  (min)

This is an integer or real number and specifies the lower bound for a range field.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000534
	Multiple selections attribute  (multiple)

The presence of this attribute denotes that the SELECT element defines a multiple choice menu. In its absence, the element defines a single choice menu.

Possible Value:
  multiple

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000535
	Next document number attribute  (n)  	(Required)

The N attribute is used in the NEXTID element to denote a unique identifier.
It is equal to the next document-wide alpha-numeric identifier (of the form z123).

Example:

   <NEXTID N=Z27>


Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000538
	Name attribute  (name)

For <META> element:
Used to name a property such as author, publication date etc. If absent, the name can be assumed to be the same as the value of HTTP-EQUIV.

For <FRAME> element (Netscape extension):
The NAME attribute is used to assign a name to a frame so it can be targeted by links in other documents (These are usually from other frames in the same document.) The NAME attribute is optional; by default all windows are unnamed.  Names must begin with an alphanumeric character.  Named frames can have their window contents targeted with the new TARGET attribute.

Text allowed:	Name

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000536
	Named link end attribute  (name)

This attribute defines a named anchor for use as the destination of hypertext links. For example, the following defines an anchor, that can be used as the destination of a jump into a description of the Boston area.

The <A NAME="potomac">Potomac river</A> flows into Boston harbour.


Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000650
	Applet name attribute  (name)

The NAME attribute specifies the name of the applet.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000673
	Name attribute  (name)

This provides a character string used to name the field when submitting the form's data. Several fields may share the same name, for instance a group of radio buttons or checkboxes. The name is case insensitive.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000672
	Name attribute  (name)

Inside MAP element (client-side image maps) the NAME attribute specifies the name of the map so that it can be referenced by an IMG element.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000620
	Name attribute  (name)  	(Required)

The NAME attribute defines the name of an additional applet parameter.

Text allowed:	Name

NO default value!
~0000000537
	Formal name attribute  (name)  	(Required)

The formal name of the menu (for <select>) or field (for <textarea>) which is used in the form's contents list.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000587
	Flow around attribute  (noflow)

The presence of this attribute disables text flow around the table. It avoids the need to use the CLEAR or NEEDS attributes on the following element.

Possible Value:
  noflow

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000608
	Act on clicks attribute  (nohref)

The NOHREF attribute indicates that clicks in this region should perform no action.  An HREF attribute specifies where a click in that area should lead.  A relative anchor specification will be expanded using the URI of the map description as a base, rather than using the URI of the document from which the map description is referenced. If a BASE tag is present in the document containing the map description, that URI will be used as the base.

Possible Value:
  nohref

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000635
	Resizable attribute  (noresize)

The NORESIZE attribute has no value.  It is a flag that indicates that the frame is not resizable by the user.  Users typically resize frames by dragging a frame edge to a new position.  Note that if any frame adjacent to an edge is not resizable, that entire edge will be restricted from moving.  This will effect the resizability of other  frames.  The NORESIZE attribute is optional; by default all frames are resizable.

Possible Value:
  noresize

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000638
	Shadow attribute  (noshade)

The NOSHADE attribute lets you specify that you do not want any fancy shading of your horizontal rule (HR).

Possible Value:
  noshade

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000592
	Style notation attribute  (notation)  	(Required)

The NOTATATION attribute specifies an entity identifying an SGML notation in the HTML 3.0 DTD, for example:

   <style notation=dsssl-lite>
      --some dsssl-lite stuff ...--
   </style>


Text allowed:	Code notation

Default value:	dsssl-lite w3c-style
~0000000539
	Wordwrap attribute  (nowrap)

Inside TD element
_________________
The presence of this attribute disables automatic wrapping of text lines for this cell. If used uncautiously, it may result in excessively wide cells.

Inside other elements
_____________________
The NOWRAP attribute is used when you don't want the browser to automatically wrap lines. You can then explicitly specify line breaks (in current context) using the BR element.

Example for usage in the header element:

  <h1 nowrap>This heading has wordwrap turned off<br>
  and the BR element is used for explicit line breaks</H1>


Possible Value:
  nowrap

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000540
	Plain list attribute  (plain)

The presence of this attribute suppresses the display of bullets, e.g. <UL PLAIN>.

Possible Value:
  plain

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000541
	Prompt message attribute  (prompt)

The PROMPT attribute is used to change the default prompt supplied by the browser, e.g.

  <ISINDEX HREF="phone.db" PROMPT="Enter Surname:">

Usually the English default is as follow:
	This is a searchable index. Enter search keywords:


Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000570
	Right delimiter attribute  (rdelim)

An entity name or character for the right delimiter, e.g.
  rdelim="}"
or
  rdelim="|" .

The default is no delimiter.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000665
	Link relationship(s) attribute  (rel)

Used to describe the relationship of the linked object specified with the HREF attribute. The set of relationship names is not part of HTML 3 specification, although "Path" and "Node" are reserved for future use with hypertext paths or guided tours. The REL attribute can be used to support search for links serving particular relationships.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000542
	Link relationship(s) attribute  (rel)

Used to describe the relationship of the linked object specified with the HREF attribute. The set of relationship names is not part of HTML 3 specification, although "Path" and "Node" are reserved for future use with hypertext paths or guided tours. The REL attribute can be used to support search for links serving particular relationships.

Text allowed:	Name

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000666
	Reverse relationship(s) attribute  (rev)

The REV attribute defines a reverse relationship. A link from document A to document B with  'REV=relation'  expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with  'REL=relation'.
'REV=made' is sometimes used to identify the document author by supplying the author's email address with a 'mailto' URI, or a link to the author's home page. Tables of contents can use anchors with REV="ToC" to allow the software to insert page numbers when printing hypertext documents.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000543
	Reverse relationship(s) attribute  (rev)

The REV attribute defines a reverse relationship. A link from document A to document B with  'REV=relation'  expresses the same relationship as a link from B to A with  'REL=relation'.
'REV=made' is sometimes used to identify the document author by supplying the author's email address with a 'mailto' URI, or a link to the author's home page. Tables of contents can use anchors with REV="ToC" to allow the software to insert page numbers when printing hypertext documents.

Text allowed:	Name

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000544
	Role attribute  (role)

An optional space separated list of SGML NAME tokens that define the role this document plays, e.g. table of contents. The conventions for these names are outside the scope of this specification.

Possible Values:
  simple
  note
  caution
  warning

Default value:	SIMPLE
~0000000545
	Height attribute  (rows)  	(Required)

This gives the visible number of text lines shown by the field. User agents should allow text to grow beyond these limits by scrolling as needed.

Text allowed:	Number

NO default value!
~0000000634
	Rows attribute  (rows)

The ROWS and COLS attributes of FRAMESET determine how many regions the frame set will be divided into.
The default value for each attribute is one.

Each attribute takes as its value a comma separated list of values.  These values can be:
  N	- absolute pixel values,
  N%	- percentage values between 1 and 100,
  N*	- relative scaling values,

where 'N' above denotes a positive integer number.

A detailed description of the three possible value types follow.

  N	- A simple numeric value is assumed to be a fixed size in pixels.  This is the most dangerous type of value to use since the size of the viewer's window can and does vary substantially.  If fixed pixel values are used, it will almost certainly be necessary to mix them with one or more of the relative size values described below.  Otherwise, the client engine will likely override your specified pixel value to ensure that the total proportions of the frame are 100% of the width and height of the user's window.

  N%	- This is a simple percentage value between 1 and 100.  If the total is greater than 100 all percentages are scaled down.  If the total is less than 100, and relative-sized frames exist, extra space will be given to them.  If there are no relative-sized frames, all percentages will be scaled up to match a total of 100%.

  N*	-  The value on this field is optional. A single '*' character is a "relative-sized" frame and is interpreted as a request to give the frame all remaining space. If there exist multiple relative-sized frames, the remaining space is divided evenly among them.  If there is a value in front of the '*', that frame gets that much more relative space.  "2*,*" would give 2/3 of the space to the first frame, and 1/3 to the second.

Example for 3 rows, the first and the last being smaller than the center row:

     <FRAMESET ROWS="20%,60%,20%">

Example for 3 rows, the first and the last being fixed height, with the remaining space assigned to the middle row:

     <FRAMESET ROWS="100,*,100">


Of course you can supply both ROWS and COLS for the same FRAMESET to obtain a grid design, or you can nest frames to achieve a more complicated one.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000546
	Rows spanned attribute  (rowspan)

   For table cells (<TH> and <TD>):
A positive integer value that defines how many rows this cell spans. The default ROWSPAN is 1. ROWSPAN=0 has a special significance and implies that the cell spans all rows from the current row up to the last row of the table.

   For the <ITEM> element:
This can be used to provide a single item which spans several rows. The attribute value is a positive integer and defaults to one. It can be used together with the COLSPAN attribute.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	1
~0000000612
	Rules to render attribute  (rules)

Specifies where to draw rules within the table interior.

The values have been chosen to avoid an SGML NAME clash with the FRAME attribute. Their names and meanings are as follow:

 NONE	Suppresses internal rulings.

 BASIC	The THEAD, TFOOT and TBODY elements divide the table into groups of rows. This choice places a horizontal rule between each such group.

 ROWS	Place horizontal rules between all rows. User agents may choose to use a heavier rule between groups of rows for emphasis.

 COLS	Place vertical rules between groups of columns as defined by COLSET and COL elements, plus horizontal rules between row groups (see rules=basic).

 ALL	Place rules between all rows and all columns. User agents may choose to use a heavier rule between groups of rows and columns for emphasis.


If a document includes <TABLE BORDER> or <TABLE BORDER=n> then the default for the table element is RULES=ALL, except if n=0 for which RULES=NONE is appropriate.

Possible Values:
  none
  groups
  rows
  cols
  all

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000571
	__not_used_in_3.0 attribute  (script)

This attribute specifies source for the SCRIPT;

Text allowed:	URI

NO default value!
~0000000636
	Scrollbars attribute  (scrolling)

The SCROLLING attribute is used to describe if the frame should have a scrollbar or not.  "Yes" results in scrollbars always being visible on that frame.  "No" results in scrollbars never being visible.  "Auto" instructs the browser to decide whether scrollbars are needed, and place them where necessary.  The SCROLLING attribute is optional; the default value is auto.

Possible Values:
  yes
  no
  auto

Default value:	AUTO
~0000000547
	Initially selected attribute  (selected)

When present, this attribute signifies that the option should be initialized in its selected state. It is an error for more than one option to be selected for single choice menus.

Possible Value:
  selected

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000573
	Sequence number attribute  (seqnum)

A sequence number is associated with each level of header from the top level (H1) to the bottom level (H6). This attribute is used to set the sequence number associated with the header level of the current element to a given number, e.g. SEQNUM=10. Normally, the sequence number is initialized to 1 at the beginning of the document and incremented after each header element. It is reset to 1 by any header element of a higher level, e.g. an H1 header resets the sequence numbers for H2 to H6. The style of header numbering is controlled by the style sheet.

In Ordered List <OL> it means:
Set the starting sequence number for the first item, e.g. <OL SEQNUM=23> .

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000548
	Hotzone shape attribute  (shape)

The SHAPE attribute is used for graphical menus to specify the region of the background image to be associated with this option.
It uses the same definition as for the <a href="anchors.html">anchor</a> element.

This attribute is used within figures (and menus) to define shaped hotzones for graphical hypertext links. Full details of how to use this feature will be given with the description of the figure element.  The attribute value is a string taking one of the following forms:

  "default"
	Used to define a default link for the figure (or menu) background.
  "circle x, y, r"
	Where x and y define the center and r specifies the radius.
  "rect x, y, w, h"
	Where x, y define the upper left corner and
	w, h define the width and height respectively
  "polygon x1, y1, x2, y2, ..."
	Given n pairs of x, y coordinates, the polygon is closed by a line
linking the n'th point to the first. Intersecting polygons use the non-zero
winding number rule to determine if a point lies inside the polygon.

If a pointer event occurs in a region where two or more shapes overlap, the distance from the point to the center of gravity of each of the overlapping shapes is computed and the closest one chosen. This feature is useful when you want lots of closely spaced hotzones, for example over points on a map, as it allows you to use simple shapes without worrying about overlaps.

Note: The x coordinate increases to the right, and the y coordinate increases downwards in the same way as IMG and image maps. If both numbers are integers, the coordinates are interpreted as pixel offsets from the upper left corner of the image. Otherwise, the coordinates are interpreted as scaled values in the range 0.0 to 1.0 across the image. Note the syntax is tolerant of repeated white space characters between tokens.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000613
	Hotzone shape attribute  (shape)

The SHAPE attribute gives the shape of a clickable area.
Possible shapes are "RECT", "CIRCLE", and "POLYGON", which specify rectangular, circular, and polygonal regions respectively.  If the SHAPE tag is omitted, SHAPE="RECT" is assumed.

Possible Values:
  rect
  circle
  poly
  default

Default value:	RECT
~0000000549
	Size attribute  (size)

In the context of <HR> (Netscape extension) this lets the author give an indication of how thick they wish the horizontal rule to be.

In the context of a form text field this specifies the visible width of a text or password field.
For fixed pitch fonts, the size attribute specifies the maximum number of characters visible, while for variable pitch fonts, the attribute specifies the width in en units (half the point size).

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000649
	Size attribute  (size)

This attribute is used to change the size of the BASEFONT that all relative FONT changes are based on (Netscape extension).  It defaults to 3, and has a valid range of 1-7.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000550
	Delimiters Size attribute  (size)

This used to obtain oversized delimiters. The permitted values are: "normal" (the default), "medium", "large" and "huge".

Possible Values:
  normal
  medium
  large
  huge

Default value:	NORMAL
~0000000643
	Size attribute  (size)  	(Required)

This attribute is used to change the font size (Netscape extension).  Valid values range from 1-7.  The default FONT size is 3.  The value given to size can optionally have a '+' or '-' character in front of it to specify that it is relative to the document baseFONT.  The default baseFONT is 3, and can be changed with the BASEFONT element.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000596
	Size attribute  (size)

In the context of <HR> (Netscape extension) this lets the author give an indication of how thick they wish the horizontal rule to be.

In the context of a form text field this specifies the visible width of a text or password field.
For fixed pitch fonts, the size attribute specifies the maximum number of characters visible, while for variable pitch fonts, the attribute specifies the width in en units (half the point size).

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000551
	Skip sequence by attribute  (skip)

Increments the sequence number before rendering the element. It is used when headers have been left out of the sequence.
For instance, SKIP=3 advances the sequence number past 3 omitted items.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	0
~0000000606
	Span number attribute  (span)

A positive integer value that specifies how many columns this element applies to, defaulting to one. In the absence of SPAN attributes the first COL element applies to the first column, the second COL element to the second column and so on. If the second COL element had SPAN=2, it would apply to the second and third column. The next COL element would then apply to the fourth column and so on. SPAN=0 has a special significance and implies that the COL element spans all columns from the current column up to and including the last column.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	1
~0000000552
	"Custom image's URL" attribute  (src)

Specifies an image for use as a custom graphic (bullet etc.). The image is specified as a URI. This attribute may appear together with the MD attribute (in HTML 3).

For the <NOTE> it specifies an image preceding the note.

For the <INPUT> it specifies an image for use as the background of a SCRIBBLE, IMAGE, SUBMIT or RESET field.

For the <SELECT> it is used for graphical menus to specify the image to use.

Text allowed:	URI

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000648
	"Object's URL" attribute  (src)  	(Required)

The SRC attribute specifies the URL of an embeded element.  Its syntax is the same as that of the HREF attribute of the <A> tag.  It is mandatory.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000647
	"Frame's URL" attribute  (src)

The SRC attribute takes as its value the URL of the document to be displayed in this particular frame.  FRAMEs without SRC attributes are displayed as a blank space the size the frame would have been.

Text allowed:	URI

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000553
	"Custom image's URL" attribute  (src)  	(Required)

The SRC attribute specifies the URI of a graphical content to use for the current element (image, figure or figure overlay). Its syntax is the same as that of the HREF attribute of the <A> tag. It is mandatory.
This attribute may appear together with the MD attribute (in HTML 3).

Text allowed:	URI

NO default value!
~0000000653
	"Source URL" attribute  (src)

The SRC attribute is optional and, if given, specifies a URL that loads the text of a script.  

Note that the SRC attribute specifies the scripting language by using the .js suffix. The suffix must be mapped by the web server to the MIME type "application/x-javascript" which the server sends back in the HTTP GET reply's Content-type: header. Without a properly configured server (one that maps .js filename suffix to application/x-javascript MIME), Netscape won't respond properly with the data coming back in the HTTP response to the SRC-initiated request. 

Text allowed:	URI

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000639
	Start number attribute  (start)

The START attribute (Netscape extension) lets you start the numbering for ordered list at value other than '1'.
START is always specified in the default numbers, and will be converted based on TYPE before display.  Thus START=5 would display either an 'E', 'e', 'V', 'v', or '5' based on the TYPE tag.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000623
	Style attribute  (style)

A text string providing rendering information specific to this element.
The notation is specified with the STYLE element in the document head. The user agent can select an appropriate rendering style based on rendering annotations using the STYLE attribute of the current element, rendering information in the STYLE element in the document head, and linked style sheets. The specification of the syntax and semantics for style notations is outside the scope of this document.

In the current implementation (that would probably change soon) there is one attribute - NOTATATION - which specifies an entity identifying an SGML notation in the HTML 3.0 DTD, for example:

  <style notation=dsssl-lite>
    ... some dsssl-lite stuff ...
  </style>

Stylistic rules will in general match tag names and attribute values for elements in the document body. Context sensitive rules may be used for such purposes as rendering drop down capitals for the initial letter in the first paragraph following a header.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000577
	Symbol attribute  (sym)

An entity name for a symbol, e.g. "cub" for a curly bracket (brace). Defaults to "line".
The other choices are: "larr" (left arrow), "rarr" (right arrow), "hat" and "tilde".

Note: Don't include the & prefix, so  <above sym="&rarr;">  is wrong!

Possible Values:
  line
  cub
  larr
  rarr
  hat
  tilde

Default value:	LINE
~0000000624
	Target frame name attribute  (target)

The TARGET attribute is used to control where the HTML data should appear.  It is most useful when used with Netscape's new frames feature.

The attribute gives the name of the window where the information should appear.

The exact meaning of the attribute depends slightly on which element it is defined.  They are as follow (when declared on appropriate element):

  <A> 	Force the load of that link into the targeted window;

  <BASE>	This is used when you want all (or most) of the links in a document to be targeted to the same window.  In this case the TARGET attribute establishes  a default window name that all links in this document will be targeted to.  This default is of course overridden by specific instances of the TARGET attribute in individual anchor tags.

  <AREA>	The IETF Internet-Draft of Client-Side Image Maps defines an area tag.  This tag describes a shaped area in a client-side image map, and provides the link that should be followed when the user clicks there.  Adding the TARGET attribute to the area tag forces the load of that link into the targeted window.

  <FORM>	The form tag normally displays the results of a form submission in the same window the form was submitted from.  By adding the TARGET attribute to the form tag, the result of the form submission is instead loaded into the targeted window.


Allowed TARGET names
____________________
The window name specified by a TARGET attribute must begin with an alpha-numeric character to be valid. All other window names will be ignored.
Exception (Netscape): There are magic target names that all begin with the underscore character.

Magic TARGET names
__________________
These names all begin with the underscore character.  Their meaning is as follow:

  _blank	Causes the link to always be loaded in a new blank window.  This window is not named.

  _self	Causes the link to always load in the same window the anchor was clicked in.  This is useful for overriding a globally assigned BASE target.

  _parent	Makes the link load in the immediate FRAMESET parent of this document.  This defaults to acting like "_self" if the document has no parent.

  _top	Makes the link load in the full body of the window.  This defaults to acting like "_self" if the document is already at the top.  It is useful for breaking out of an arbitrarily deep FRAME nesting.


NOTE: Any targeted window name beginning with underscore which is not one of these names, will be ignored.

Text allowed:	Frame name (N)

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000628
	Text color attribute  (text)

This attribute specifies the text color (Netscape extension).

The color should be specified in the hexadecimal RGB (red-green-blue) format.  For example #FF0000 means red, #FFFFFF means white.  You can use the asWedit pick color dialog to select one of the pre-defined colors.  Alternatively look in the X Window System color database (usually in the file /usr/lib/X11/rgb.txt).

Text allowed:	Hexadecimal color

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000554
	Title attribute  (title)

In the context of hypertext link element <A>
____________________________________________
The Title is informational only and describes the object specified with the HREF attribute. It can be used for object types that don't possess titles, such as graphics, plain text and Gopher menus.

In the context of <LINK> element (part of head)
_______________________________________________
The Titile attribute may be used to label the bookmark.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000555
	Tab name to move to attribute  (to)

Specifies a previously defined tab stop (see Tab's ID attribute).

Text allowed:	Reference to an identifier

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000588
	Type of accepted data attribute  (type)

Defines the type of the field as one of: TEXT, PASSWORD, CHECKBOX, RADIO, RANGE, FILE, SCRIBBLE, HIDDEN, SUBMIT, IMAGE or RESET.
It defaults to TEXT. The attribute value is an SGML name token and and as such is case insensitive.

Possible Values:
  text
  password
  checkbox
  radio
  submit
  reset
  range
  file
  scribble
  hidden
  image

Default value:	TEXT
~0000000642
	Mark type attribute  (typeNul)

The TYPE attribute lets you choose the list mark for an entire unordered list (UL) or for a specific list item (LI).  The possible values are: DISC, CIRCLE and SQUARE.

Note that basic bulleted list has a default progression of bullet types that changes as you move through indented levels.  From a solid disc, to a circle to a square.  With this attribute no matter what your indent level you can specify what shape do you want for your bullet(s).

Possible Values:
  disc
  square
  circle

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000668
	Type attribute  (typeSpacer)

The TYPE attribute (Netscape Navigator) lets you choose the type of the SPACER.  The possible values are: horizontal, vertical and block.

Possible Values:
  horizontal
  vertical
  block

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000594
	Type of accepted data attribute  (type)

Defines the type of the field as one of: TEXT, PASSWORD, CHECKBOX, RADIO, SUBMIT, RESET, FILE, IMAGE or HIDDEN.
It defaults to TEXT. 

Possible Values:
  text
  password
  checkbox
  radio
  submit
  reset
  file
  image
  hidden

Default value:	TEXT
~0000000640
	Numbering style attribute  (type)

The TYPE attribute lets you choose the numbering style for the entire ordered list (OL) or for a specific list item (LI).

The possible values are as follow:

 value	numbering style		example
 _____	_______________		_______

  1	arabic (default)	1, 2, 3, ...
  i	lower-case Roman	i, ii, iii, ...
  I	upper-case Roman	I, II, III, ...
  a	lower-case alphabetic	a, b, c, ...
  A	upper-case alphabetic	A, B, C, ...

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000590
	Units attribute  (units)

Specifies the choice of units for the width and height attributes.
  units=pixels	- (the default) specifies pixels, while
  units=en	- specifies en units (a typographical unit equal to half the point size).

Possible Values:
  en
  pixels
  relative

Default value:	EN
~0000000589
	Units attribute  (units)

Specifies the choice of units for the width and height attributes.
  units=pixels	- (the default) specifies pixels, while
  units=en	- specifies en units (a typographical unit equal to half the point size).

Possible Values:
  en
  pixels

Default value:	PIXELS
~0000000579
	Range end attribute  (until)  	(Required)

References an SGML identifier for an element in the document body. It identifies the end of the marked range.

Text allowed:	Reference to an identifier

NO default value!
~0000000556
	Universal Resource Name attribute  (urn)

The universal resource name for the document (optional).

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000602
	Client usemap attribute  (usemap)

Adding a USEMAP attribute to an IMG element indicates that it is a client-side image map.  The USEMAP attribute can be used with the ISMAP attribute to indicate that the the image can be processed as either a client-side or server-side image map.  The argument to USEMAP specifies which map to use with the image, by specifying the URI for the file containing the map, followed by a '#', followed by the name of the map.  If the argument to USEMAP starts with a '#', the map is assumed to be in the same document as the IMG tag.  The presence of a USEMAP attribute overrides the effect of an enclosing anchor (A) element.

The different regions of the image are described using a MAP element.  The map describes each region in the image and indicates where it links to. The basic format for the MAP element is as follows:

  <MAP NAME="name">
  <AREA [SHAPE="shape"] COORDS="x,y,..." [HREF="reference"]
	[NOHREF] [ALT="alt"]>
  </MAP>


Backwards compatibility
_______________________
The client-side image maps extension was specifically designed to provide a variety of fallback options for browsers which do not support it.

The following three examples show mark-up demonstrating different fallback mechanisms possible:

This image map will work with any graphical browser:

  <A HREF="/cgi-bin/imagemap/pic1">
  <IMG SRC="pic1.jpg" USEMAP="maps.html#map1" ISMAP></A>

  Clicking here will take you to a page with an error message if
  you don't have client-side image map support:
  <A HREF="no_csim.html">
  <IMG SRC="pic2.jpg" USEMAP="maps.html#map2"></A>

   You can only click here if your browser supports client-side
   image maps: <IMG SRC="pic3.jpg" USEMAP="maps.html#map3">


The following example shows the use of a map in the same file as the image:

  <IMG SRC="picture.jpg" USEMAP="#mymap">


The following example defines a simple map which describes an image with a circle in the middle overlapping two large rectangles:

  <MAP NAME="welcomemap">
  <AREA SHAPE=CIRCLE COORDS="50,50,40" HREF="about_us.html"
	ALT="About our company">
  <AREA SHAPE=RECT COORDS="0,0,100,50" HREF="products.html"
	ALT="Our products">
  <AREA SHAPE=RECT COORDS="0,51,100,100 HREF="technology.html"
	ALT="Technology for the next century">
  </MAP>


Text allowed:	URI

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000591
	Vertical align attribute  (valign)

The VALIGN attribute can be used to explicitly specify the vertical alignment of material within a table row or individually in a single table cell.
It has the following values:

  valign=top	The cell contents appear at the top of each cell (the default).

  valign=middle	Cell contents are centered vertically in each cell.

  valign=bottom	The cell contents appear at the bottom of each cell.

  valign=baseline	This is used when you want to ensure that all cells in the row with "valign=baseline" share the same baseline. This constraint only applies to the first text line for each cell.


Note: In the absence of the VALIGN attribute in a cell, the default can be overridden by the presence of a VALIGN attribute on the parent TR element.

Possible Values:
  top
  middle
  bottom
  baseline

Default value:	TOP
~0000000610
	Vertical align attribute  (valign)

Defines whether the cell contents are aligned with the top, middle or bottom of the cell.

If present, the value of the attribute should be one of: TOP, MIDDLE, BOTTOM or BASELINE.
All cells in the same row with valign=baseline should be vertically positioned so that the first text line in each such cell occur on a common baseline. This constraint does not apply to subsequent text lines in these cells.

Possible Values:
  top
  middle
  bottom
  baseline

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000557
	Value attribute  (value)

   In the context of INPUT element:
This is a character string or number which is used to initialize text, range and hidden fields.

   In the context of OPTION (menu) element:
The string to be used together with the name attribute of the enclosing select element, when submitting the form. It defaults to the content of the OPTION element.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000641
	New number attribute  (value)

The VALUE attribute for list item inside an order list (Netscape) allows you to change the count, for that list item and all subsequent (i.e. restart the numbering).

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000558
	DTD version attribute  (version)

This is fixed by the DTD as the string "-//AdvaSoft//DTD HTML 3.2 experimental 961018//EN".

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	#FIXED = -//AdvaSoft//DTD HTML 3.2 experimental 961018//EN
~0000000597
	DTD version attribute  (version)

This is fixed by the DTD as the string "-//AdvaSoft//DTD HTML 3.2 extended 961018//EN"

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	#FIXED = -//AdvaSoft//DTD HTML 3.2 extended 961018//EN
~0000000629
	Visited link color attribute  (vlink)

This attribute specifies the visited link color, i.e. the color of the links that have already been clicked on - visited (Netscape extension).

The color should be specified in the hexadecimal RGB (red-green-blue) format.  For example #FF0000 means red, #FFFFFF means white.  You can use the asWedit pick color dialog to select one of the pre-defined colors.  Alternatively look in the X Window System color database (usually in the file /usr/lib/X11/rgb.txt).

Text allowed:	Hexadecimal color

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000646
	VRML (N) attribute  (vrml)

The VRML attribute specifies the VRML data to be used (Netscape 2.0 extension).
Note that VRML stands for Virtual Reality Modelling Language.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000621
	Vertical spacing attribute  (vspace)

The VSPACE specifies vertical spacing for the applet.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000664
	Vertical spacing attribute  (vspace)

The VSPACE specifies vertical spacing for the applet.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000559
	Width attribute  (width)

This is optionally used to specify a width as a number of characters to try and display within the current window width.
The user agent can exploit this suggestion to select an appropriate font size or to indent the content appropriately. 

The default is a width of 80 characters. Where the WIDTH attribute is supported, widths of 40, 80 and 132 characters should be presented optimally, with other widths being rounded up.


Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000619
	Width attribute  (width)  	(Required)

The WIDTH attribute is a hint to the browser (generally a User Agent) indicating how much width the applet will require.  The browser uses it (together with the HEIGHT hint) to lay out the page properly while it's waiting for the applet to draw itself.

Text allowed:	Number

NO default value!
~0000000662
	Width attribute  (width)  	(Required)

The WIDTH attribute is a hint to the browser (generally a User Agent) indicating how much width the applet will require.  The browser uses it (together with the HEIGHT hint) to lay out the page properly while it's waiting for the applet to draw itself.

Text allowed:	Any

NO default value!
~0000000674
	Width attribute  (width)

Specifies the desired width in pixels. The WIDTH attribute was added to IMG mainly to speed up display of the document. If the author specifies WIDTH and HEIGHT, the viewer of their document will not have to wait for the image to be loaded over the network and its size calculated.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000651
	Width attribute  (width)

Specifies the desired width in pixels. The WIDTH attribute was added to IMG mainly to speed up display of the document. If the author specifies WIDTH and HEIGHT, the viewer of their document will not have to wait for the image to be loaded over the network and its size calculated.

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000601
	Width attribute  (width)

This WIDTH attribute is used for the following elements:
	EMBED, HR, MULTICOL, SPACER, TABLE, TD, TH.

The value of this attribute is usually specified in pixels or as a relative width measured in percent.

Inside EMBED
___________

Specifies the width of the embeded object.


Inside HR
_________

The default horizontal rule is always as wide as the page.  With the WIDTH attribute, you can specify an exact width in pixels, or a relative width measured in percent of document width (e.g. width="50%").


Inside MULTICOL
_______________

Specifies controls the width of an individual column. All columns are always the same width, so the overall width of a multicolumn layout is (cols * width) + ([cols - 1] * gutter).


Inside SPACER
_____________

Specifies the width of BLOCK type spacer (you should also specify its height). For horizontal and vertical spacers you should use SIZE attribute instead.


Inside TABLE
____________

In the absence of this attribute the table width is automatically determined from the table contents. You can use the WIDTH attribute to set the table width to a fixed value in pixels (e.g. WIDTH=212) or as a percentage of the space between the current left and right margins (e.g. WIDTH="80%"). 


Inside TH and TD
_______________

Specifies the suggested width for a cell content in pixels excluding the cell padding. This value will normally be used except when it conflicts with the width requirements for other cells in the same column.

Text allowed:	Any

Default value:	IMPLIED
~0000000560
	Multicolumn wrapping attribute  (wrap)

The WRAP attribute is used for multicolumn lists.
Use "wrap=vert" if you want to arrange the list items down the page before wrapping to the next column. Use "wrap=horiz" if you want to arrange the items across the page (less useful). The user agent is responsible for determining how many columns are appropriate.

Possible Values:
  vert
  horiz
  none

Default value:	NONE
~0000000574
	Left offset attribute  (x)

The X offset from the top left corner of the base image. X increases to the right, and is given in pixels or en units (according to the value of the UNITS attribute).

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	0
~0000000575
	Top offset attribute  (y)

The Y offset from the top left corner of the base image. Y increases downwards, and is given in pixels or en units (according to the value of the UNITS attribute).

Text allowed:	Number

Default value:	0
~0000000070
	Layout menu (Alt+a)

The Layout menu provides following commands for laying out the HTML documents:

	 Document > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Heading > 	 (sub-menu)

	 List > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Paragraph 

	 Line break 

	 Horizontal rule 

	 Center 

	 Comment 

	 Others > 	 (sub-menu)

~0000007000
	Layout|Document sub-menu

The Layout|Document menu provides following commands:

	 Standard 

	 HTML 

	 Head > 		 (sub-menu)

	 Body 

	 Frames > 	 (sub-menu)

~0000700002
	Document|Head sub-menu

The Head sub-menu provides following commands:

	 Head 

	 Title 

	 Base context 

	 Meta-information 

	 Link from this document 

	 Searchable index 

	 Script 

	 Style 

~0000700005
	Document|Frames sub-menu

This sub-menu is used to support HTML frames extensions as implemented in Netscape Navigator 2.0.
It contains the following commands:

	 Frame Set 

	 No frames 

	 Frame 

~0000007001
	Layout|Heading sub-menu

The Layout|Heading menu provides commands to mark-up HTML headings:

	 H1 

	 H2 

	 H3 

	 H4 

	 H5 

	 H6 

~0000007002
	Layout|List sub-menu

The Layout|List menu provides commands to mark-up lists.
(Note that the DIR and MENU tags are deprecated in the HTML 3: use UL with type=plain instead, whenever possible.)

The menu includes following commands:

	 Convert text to 

	 Ordered 

	 Unordered 

	 Item 

	 Glossary 

	 Term 

	 Term definition 

	 Directory (O) 

	 Menu (O) 

~0000007010
	Layout|Others sub-menu

The Others menu provides the following additional HTML commands:

	 Address 

	 Preformatted 

	 Quoted Passage 

	 Multi column 

	 Spacer 

	 No script 

	 Division 

~0000000065
	Markup menu (Alt+M)

The Markup menu provides following commands for marking up of the HTML text:

	 Phrase > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Font > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Others > 		 (sub-menu)

	 Target 

	 Hyperlink 

	 Image 

	 Entities > 	 (sub-menu)

~0000006500
	Markup|Phrase sub-menu

The Markup|Phrase menu provides following commands for structural mark-up of HTML text:

	 Emphasis 

	 Strong 

	 Code 

	 Sample 

	 Keyboard 

	 Variable 

	 Citation 

~0000006501
	Markup|Font sub-menu

The Markup|Font menu provides following commands to mark-up directly physical appearence of HTML text:
These elements may be nested within one another. Browsers should, where practical, aim to combine different types of highlighting as required.

	 Bold 

	 Italic 

	 Typewriter 

	 Big 

	 Small 

	 Subscript 

	 Superscript 

	 Underline 

	 Strikeout 

	 Font 

	 Base font 

~0000006502
	Markup|Others sub-menu

The Markup|Others menu provides miscellaneous commands to mark-up HTML text:

	 No line break (N) 

	 Allow break (N) 

	 Term definition 

	 Span 

	 Unknown tag 

~0000006505
	Markup|Entities sub-menu

The Markup|Entities menu provides access to all entities supported by the program. 
To insert any entity choose the appropriate group and select than the required entity.
Note that we support a wide range of entities and some of them, notably the Greek might not be supported as yet by some browsers.

The entities are divided into the following logical groups:

	 User's > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Standard > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Latin1 > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Proposed > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Greek > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Spacing > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Dots > 	 (sub-menu)

~0000650500
	Entities|User's sub-menu

This menu allows you to insert the user-defined entities. 

The entities that are currently available are defined by the 'userEntities' resource string in the AsWedit resource file. For example to have German specific entities you might define this resource as:
	*userEntities:  &Auml;, &Euml;, &Ouml;, &Uuml;, &szlig;, &auml;, &euml;, &ouml;, &uuml;

To modify the number of columns the entities are shown in modify the '*EntUser_PD.numColumns: 2' declaration in the above file.

As default the following entities are available:

  &Auml;
  &Euml;
  &Ouml;
  &Uuml;
  &szlig;
  &auml;
  &euml;
  &ouml;
  &uuml;
~0000650501
	Entities|Standard sub-menu

This menu allows you to insert the following entities:

  &lt;
  &gt;
  &amp;
  &quot;
  &copy;
  &reg;
  &trade;
  &nbsp;
~0000650502
	Entities|Latin1 sub-menu

This menu allows you to insert the following entities:

  &Aacute;
  &Agrave;
  &Acirc;
  &Atilde;
  &Aring;
  &Auml;
  &AElig;
  &Ccedil;
  &Eacute;
  &Egrave;
  &Ecirc;
  &Euml;
  &Iacute;
  &Igrave;
  &Icirc;
  &Iuml;
  &ETH;
  &Ntilde;
  &Oacute;
  &Ograve;
  &Ocirc;
  &Otilde;
  &Ouml;
  &Oslash;
  &Uacute;
  &Ugrave;
  &Ucirc;
  &Uuml;
  &Yacute;
  &THORN;
  &szlig;
  &aacute;
  &agrave;
  &acirc;
  &aring;
  &atilde;
  &auml;
  &aelig;
  &ccedil;
  &eacute;
  &egrave;
  &ecirc;
  &euml;
  &iacute;
  &igrave;
  &icirc;
  &iuml;
  &eth;
  &ntilde;
  &oacute;
  &ograve;
  &ocirc;
  &otilde;
  &ouml;
  &oslash;
  &uacute;
  &ugrave;
  &ucirc;
  &uuml;
  &yacute;
  &thorn;
  &yuml;
~0000650503
	Entities|Proposed sub-menu

This menu allows you to insert the following entities:
(they are so called proposed entities in the RFC1866; note that some of the proposed entities, notably the '&copy;' entity, have been moved to the Standard entities menu as they are very often used)

  &iexcl;
  &cent;
  &pound;
  &curren;
  &yen;
  &brvbar;
  &sect;
  &uml;
  &ordf;
  &laquo;
  &not;
  &macr;
  &deg;
  &plusmn;
  &sup2;
  &sup3;
  &acute;
  &micro;
  &para;
  &middot;
  &cedil;
  &sup1;
  &ordm;
  &raquo;
  &frac14;
  &frac12;
  &frac34;
  &iquest;
  &divide;
~0000650504
	Entities|Greek sub-menu

This menu allows you to insert the following entities:

  &alpha;
  &beta;
  &gamma;
  &delta;
  &vepsilon;
  &zeta;
  &eta;
  &theta;
  &vtheta;
  &iota;
  &kappa;
  &lambda;
  &mu;
  &nu;
  &xi;
  &omicron;
  &pi;
  &varpi;
  &rho;
  &sigma;
  &vsigma;
  &tau;
  &upsilon;
  &phi;
  &varphi;
  &chi;
  &psi;
  &omega;
  &Gamma;
  &Delta;
  &Theta;
  &Lambda;
  &Xi;
  &Pi;
  &Sigma;
  &Upsilon;
  &Phi;
  &Psi;
  &Omega;
~0000650505
	Entities|Spacing sub-menu

This menu allows you to insert the following entities:

  &thinsp;
  &sp;
  &emsp;
  &ensp;
  &quad;
  &mdash;
  &ndash;
  &shy;
~0000650506
	Entities|Dots sub-menu

This menu allows you to insert the following entities:

  &ldots;
  &cdots;
  &vdots;
  &ddots;
  &dotfill;
~0000000075
	HTML menu (Alt+L)

The HTML menu provides following commands, mostly specific to HTML version 3:

	 Forms > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Tables > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Java Applet 

	 Parameter 

	 Image Map 

	 Active Area 

	 Embed 

~0000007500
	HTML|Forms sub-menu

The HTML|Forms menu provides following commands:

	 Form 

	 Examples > 	 (sub-menu)

	 Input element 

	 Text area 

	 Selection of option(s) 

	 Option 

~0000750001
	Forms|Examples sub-menu

This sub-menu offers you some FORM examples.  You can insert any of them in a place where a FORM element is allowed.

The form text stays highlighted and will be simply replace when you select any other form.  This is useful for choosing the right example for you.  Do the following:
  1. insert any example
  2. preview your document (F5 key)
  3. insert another example

Repeat steps 2-3 until you find a suitable example you want to base your form around.

Form testing
____________

Some of the examples were inspired by the original Form tutorial at NCSA site.  All of the examples use as their back-ends the form query service kindly supported by NCSA, so you can see them in action and know what to expect with your own forms.  The query server simply shows (returns to you) what you submitted.  The results include name/value pairs decoded and itemized.

	Try it! - Preview any of the examples and press Submit.

If you wish to write a prototype fill-out form and test it against the NCSA query server, you can use the following:

  For METHOD="POST", use
    ACTION="http://hoohoo.ncsa.uiuc.edu/htbin-post/post-query"

  For METHOD="GET", use
    ACTION="http://hoohoo.ncsa.uiuc.edu/htbin/query"

C source code for the query and post-query programs is distributed with the NCSA httpd server.

Important note:
If you use the GET method in your form, you will notice that the example GET server will choke if too much data (more than a couple hundred bytes) is submitted at a time -- the server is passing the data to the form-processing module via a shell command line, and the maximum shell command line length is being exceeded. This problem does not exist with the POST method and server.


The standard _asWedit examples are as follow (you can customize the examples for your site if you want):


	 Text entry 

	 Text entries 

	 Text and checkboxes 

	 Defaults changing 

	 Using radio buttons 

	 Questionnaire 

	 Comments 

	 Registration 

	 Form 9 

	 Form A 

	 Form B 

	 Form C 

	 Form D 

	 Form E 

	 Form F 

	 Form G 

	 Form H 

	 Form I 

	 Form J 

	 Form K 

~0000007502
	HTML|Tables sub-menu

The HTML|Tables menu provides following commands:

	 Convert text to 

	 Table 

	 Caption 

	 Column Group 

	 Column properties 

	 Static header 

	 Static Footer 

	 Body section 

	 Row 

	 Header cell 

	 Data cell 

